PC 100 DesignerGuide en PDF

Informatica PowerCenter (Version 10.
0)
Designer Guide
Informatica PowerCenter Designer Guide
Version 10.0
October 2015
Copyright (c) 1993-2015 Informatica LLC. All rights reserved.
This software and documentation contain proprietary information of Informatica LLC and are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and
disclosure and are also protected by copyright law. Reverse engineering of the software is prohibited. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form, by any means (electronic, photocopying, recording or otherwise) without prior consent of Informatica LLC. This Software may be protected by U.S. and/or
international Patents and other Patents Pending.
Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in the applicable software license agreement and as
provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7702-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013©(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14
(ALT III), as applicable.
The information in this product or documentation is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in this product or documentation, please report them to us
in writing.
Informatica, Informatica Platform, Informatica Data Services, PowerCenter, PowerCenterRT, PowerCenter Connect, PowerCenter Data Analyzer, PowerExchange,
PowerMart, Metadata Manager, Informatica Data Quality, Informatica Data Explorer, Informatica B2B Data Transformation, Informatica B2B Data Exchange Informatica
On Demand, Informatica Identity Resolution, Informatica Application Information Lifecycle Management, Informatica Complex Event Processing, Ultra Messaging and
Informatica Master Data Management are trademarks or registered trademarks of Informatica LLC in the United States and in jurisdictions throughout the world. All
other company and product names may be trade names or trademarks of their respective owners.
Portions of this software and/or documentation are subject to copyright held by third parties, including without limitation: Copyright DataDirect Technologies. All rights
reserved. Copyright © Sun Microsystems. All rights reserved. Copyright © RSA Security Inc. All Rights Reserved. Copyright © Ordinal Technology Corp. All rights
reserved.Copyright © Aandacht c.v. All rights reserved. Copyright Genivia, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright Isomorphic Software. All rights reserved. Copyright © Meta
Integration Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © Intalio. All rights reserved. Copyright © Oracle. All rights reserved. Copyright © Adobe Systems
Incorporated. All rights reserved. Copyright © DataArt, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © ComponentSource. All rights reserved. Copyright © Microsoft Corporation. All
rights reserved. Copyright © Rogue Wave Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © Teradata Corporation. All rights reserved. Copyright © Yahoo! Inc. All rights
reserved. Copyright © Glyph & Cog, LLC. All rights reserved. Copyright © Thinkmap, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © Clearpace Software Limited. All rights
reserved. Copyright © Information Builders, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © OSS Nokalva, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright Edifecs, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright Cleo Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © International Organization for Standardization 1986. All rights reserved. Copyright © ej-
technologies GmbH. All rights reserved. Copyright © Jaspersoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Copyright © International Business Machines Corporation. All rights
reserved. Copyright © yWorks GmbH. All rights reserved. Copyright © Lucent Technologies. All rights reserved. Copyright (c) University of Toronto. All rights reserved.
Copyright © Daniel Veillard. All rights reserved. Copyright © Unicode, Inc. Copyright IBM Corp. All rights reserved. Copyright © MicroQuill Software Publishing, Inc. All
rights reserved. Copyright © PassMark Software Pty Ltd. All rights reserved. Copyright © LogiXML, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © 2003-2010 Lorenzi Davide, All
rights reserved. Copyright © Red Hat, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © The Board of Trustees of the Leland Stanford Junior University. All rights reserved. Copyright
© EMC Corporation. All rights reserved. Copyright © Flexera Software. All rights reserved. Copyright © Jinfonet Software. All rights reserved. Copyright © Apple Inc. All
rights reserved. Copyright © Telerik Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © BEA Systems. All rights reserved. Copyright © PDFlib GmbH. All rights reserved. Copyright ©
Orientation in Objects GmbH. All rights reserved. Copyright © Tanuki Software, Ltd. All rights reserved. Copyright © Ricebridge. All rights reserved. Copyright © Sencha,
Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © Scalable Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © jQWidgets. All rights reserved. Copyright © Tableau Software, Inc. All rights
reserved. Copyright© MaxMind, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Copyright © TMate Software s.r.o. All rights reserved. Copyright © MapR Technologies Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright © Amazon Corporate LLC. All rights reserved. Copyright © Highsoft. All rights reserved. Copyright © Python Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Copyright © BeOpen.com. All rights reserved. Copyright © CNRI. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/), and/or other software which is licensed under various versions
of the Apache License (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of these Licenses at http://www.apache.org/licenses/. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software distributed under these Licenses is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied. See the Licenses for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the Licenses.
This product includes software which was developed by Mozilla (http://www.mozilla.org/), software copyright The JBoss Group, LLC, all rights reserved; software
copyright © 1999-2006 by Bruno Lowagie and Paulo Soares and other software which is licensed under various versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License
Agreement, which may be found at http:// www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html. The materials are provided free of charge by Informatica, "as-is", without warranty of any
kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
The product includes ACE(TM) and TAO(TM) software copyrighted by Douglas C. Schmidt and his research group at Washington University, University of California,
Irvine, and Vanderbilt University, Copyright (©) 1993-2006, all rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (copyright The OpenSSL Project. All Rights Reserved) and
redistribution of this software is subject to terms available at http://www.openssl.org and http://www.openssl.org/source/license.html.
This product includes Curl software which is Copyright 1996-2013, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this
software are subject to terms available at http://curl.haxx.se/docs/copyright.html. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
The product includes software copyright 2001-2005 (©) MetaStuff, Ltd. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms
available at http://www.dom4j.org/ license.html.
The product includes software copyright © 2004-2007, The Dojo Foundation. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to
terms available at http://dojotoolkit.org/license.
This product includes ICU software which is copyright International Business Machines Corporation and others. All rights reserved. Permissions and limitations
regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://source.icu-project.org/repos/icu/icu/trunk/license.html.
This product includes software copyright © 1996-2006 Per Bothner. All rights reserved. Your right to use such materials is set forth in the license which may be found at
http:// www.gnu.org/software/ kawa/Software-License.html.
This product includes OSSP UUID software which is Copyright © 2002 Ralf S. Engelschall, Copyright © 2002 The OSSP Project Copyright © 2002 Cable & Wireless
Deutschland. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php.
This product includes software developed by Boost (http://www.boost.org/) or under the Boost software license. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are
subject to terms available at http:/ /www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt.
This product includes software copyright © 1997-2007 University of Cambridge. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms available at
http:// www.pcre.org/license.txt.
This product includes software copyright © 2007 The Eclipse Foundation. All Rights Reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject to terms
available at http:// www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.php and at http://www.eclipse.org/org/documents/edl-v10.php.
This product includes software licensed under the terms at http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/license.html, http://www.bosrup.com/web/overlib/?License, http://
www.stlport.org/doc/ license.html, http://asm.ow2.org/license.html, http://www.cryptix.org/LICENSE.TXT, http://hsqldb.org/web/hsqlLicense.html, http://
httpunit.sourceforge.net/doc/ license.html, http://jung.sourceforge.net/license.txt , http://www.gzip.org/zlib/zlib_license.html, http://www.openldap.org/software/release/
license.html, http://www.libssh2.org, http://slf4j.org/license.html, http://www.sente.ch/software/OpenSourceLicense.html, http://fusesource.com/downloads/license-
agreements/fuse-message-broker-v-5-3- license-agreement; http://antlr.org/license.html; http://aopalliance.sourceforge.net/; http://www.bouncycastle.org/licence.html;
http://www.jgraph.com/jgraphdownload.html; http://www.jcraft.com/jsch/LICENSE.txt; http://jotm.objectweb.org/bsd_license.html; . http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/
2002/copyright-software-20021231; http://www.slf4j.org/license.html; http://nanoxml.sourceforge.net/orig/copyright.html; http://www.json.org/license.html; http://
forge.ow2.org/projects/javaservice/, http://www.postgresql.org/about/licence.html, http://www.sqlite.org/copyright.html, http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/license.html, http://
www.jaxen.org/faq.html, http://www.jdom.org/docs/faq.html, http://www.slf4j.org/license.html; http://www.iodbc.org/dataspace/iodbc/wiki/iODBC/License; http://
www.keplerproject.org/md5/license.html; http://www.toedter.com/en/jcalendar/license.html; http://www.edankert.com/bounce/index.html; http://www.net-snmp.org/about/
license.html; http://www.openmdx.org/#FAQ; http://www.php.net/license/3_01.txt; http://srp.stanford.edu/license.txt; http://www.schneier.com/blowfish.html; http://
www.jmock.org/license.html; http://xsom.java.net; http://benalman.com/about/license/; https://github.com/CreateJS/EaselJS/blob/master/src/easeljs/display/Bitmap.js;
http://www.h2database.com/html/license.html#summary; http://jsoncpp.sourceforge.net/LICENSE; http://jdbc.postgresql.org/license.html; http://
protobuf.googlecode.com/svn/trunk/src/google/protobuf/descriptor.proto; https://github.com/rantav/hector/blob/master/LICENSE; http://web.mit.edu/Kerberos/krb5-
current/doc/mitK5license.html; http://jibx.sourceforge.net/jibx-license.html; https://github.com/lyokato/libgeohash/blob/master/LICENSE; https://github.com/hjiang/jsonxx/
blob/master/LICENSE; https://code.google.com/p/lz4/; https://github.com/jedisct1/libsodium/blob/master/LICENSE; http://one-jar.sourceforge.net/index.php?
page=documents&file=license; https://github.com/EsotericSoftware/kryo/blob/master/license.txt; http://www.scala-lang.org/license.html; https://github.com/tinkerpop/
blueprints/blob/master/LICENSE.txt; http://gee.cs.oswego.edu/dl/classes/EDU/oswego/cs/dl/util/concurrent/intro.html; https://aws.amazon.com/asl/; https://github.com/
twbs/bootstrap/blob/master/LICENSE; https://sourceforge.net/p/xmlunit/code/HEAD/tree/trunk/LICENSE.txt; https://github.com/documentcloud/underscore-contrib/blob/
master/LICENSE, and https://github.com/apache/hbase/blob/master/LICENSE.txt.
This product includes software licensed under the Academic Free License (http://www.opensource.org/licenses/afl-3.0.php), the Common Development and Distribution
License (http://www.opensource.org/licenses/cddl1.php) the Common Public License (http://www.opensource.org/licenses/cpl1.0.php), the Sun Binary Code License
Agreement Supplemental License Terms, the BSD License (http:// www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php), the new BSD License (http://opensource.org/
licenses/BSD-3-Clause), the MIT License (http://www.opensource.org/licenses/mit-license.php), the Artistic License (http://www.opensource.org/licenses/artistic-
license-1.0) and the Initial Developer’s Public License Version 1.0 (http://www.firebirdsql.org/en/initial-developer-s-public-license-version-1-0/).
This product includes software copyright © 2003-2006 Joe WaInes, 2006-2007 XStream Committers. All rights reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this
software are subject to terms available at http://xstream.codehaus.org/license.html. This product includes software developed by the Indiana University Extreme! Lab.
For further information please visit http://www.extreme.indiana.edu/.
This product includes software Copyright (c) 2013 Frank Balluffi and Markus Moeller. All rights reserved. Permissions and limitations regarding this software are subject
to terms of the MIT license.
See patents at https://www.informatica.com/legal/patents.html.
DISCLAIMER: Informatica LLC provides this documentation "as is" without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied
warranties of noninfringement, merchantability, or use for a particular purpose. Informatica LLC does not warrant that this software or documentation is error free. The
information provided in this software or documentation may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. The information in this software and documentation is
subject to change at any time without notice.
NOTICES
This Informatica product (the "Software") includes certain drivers (the "DataDirect Drivers") from DataDirect Technologies, an operating company of Progress Software
Corporation ("DataDirect") which are subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. THE DATADIRECT DRIVERS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
2. IN NO EVENT WILL DATADIRECT OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO THE END-USER CUSTOMER FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE ODBC DRIVERS, WHETHER OR NOT
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITIES OF DAMAGES IN ADVANCE. THESE LIMITATIONS APPLY TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS.
Part Number: PC-DEG-10000-0001

Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Informatica Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Informatica My Support Portal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Informatica Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Informatica Product Availability Matrixes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Informatica Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Informatica How-To Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Informatica Knowledge Base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Informatica Support YouTube Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Informatica Marketplace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Informatica Velocity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Informatica Global Customer Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter 1: Using the Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Using the Designer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Designer Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Designer Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Configuring Designer Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Configuring General Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Configuring Tables Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Configuring Format Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Configuring Debug Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Configuring Web Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Configuring Miscellaneous Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Using Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Designer Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Workflow Manager Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Workflow Monitor Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Repository Manager Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Displaying a Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Creating a Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Configuring a Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Adding Custom Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Navigating the Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Search Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Iconizing and Restoring Workspace Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Arranging Workspace Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Zooming the Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Viewing the Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Designer Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4 Table of Contents
Adding a Repository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Printing the Workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Viewing the Last Saved Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Opening and Closing a Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Creating Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Checking Out and In Versioned Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Searching for Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Entering Descriptions for Repository Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Viewing and Comparing Versioned Repository Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Reverting to a Previous Object Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Copying Designer Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Exporting and Importing Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Working with Multiple Ports or Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Renaming Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Using Shortcut Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Previewing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Previewing Relational Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Previewing Flat File Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Previewing XML Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Working with Metadata Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Creating Metadata Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Editing Metadata Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Deleting Metadata Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using Business Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Adding Business Names to Sources or Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Displaying Business Names in the Navigator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Displaying Business Names as Column Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using Business Names as Port Names in Source Qualifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using Business Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Specifying the Documentation Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Creating Links to Documentation Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Viewing Business Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Viewing Mapplet and Mapping Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Viewing a Mapplet Composite Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Viewing a Mapping Composite Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 2: Working with Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Working with Sources Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Oracle Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Special Character Handling in Source Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Updating Source Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Creating Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Working with Relational Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table of Contents 5
Relational Source Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connectivity for Relational Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuring a Third-Party ODBC Data Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Importing Relational Source Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Updating a Relational Source Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Working with COBOL Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Importing COBOL Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Working with COBOL Copybooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Steps to Import a COBOL Source Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Components in a COBOL Source File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
FD Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
OCCURS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
REDEFINES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configuring COBOL Source Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configuring the Table Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuring Advanced Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuring the Columns Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Importing a Microsoft Excel Source Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Defining Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Formatting Columns of Numeric Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Steps to Import a Microsoft Excel Source Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Manually Creating a Source Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Troubleshooting Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Chapter 3: Working with Flat Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Working with Flat Files Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Creating Sessions with Flat File Sources and Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Importing Flat Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Special Character Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Selecting Code Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Changing Display Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Importing Fixed-Width Flat Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Importing Delimited Flat Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Editing Flat File Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Editing Table Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Updating Fixed-Width File Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Updating Delimited File Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Formatting Flat File Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Formatting Numeric Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Formatting Datetime Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Defining Default Datetime and Numeric Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6 Table of Contents
Working with File Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Working with Shift-Sensitive Flat Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Importing Flat Files with Shift Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Importing Flat Files without Shift Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Working with Multibyte Data in Fixed-Width Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Troubleshooting Flat Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Chapter 4: Working with Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Working with Targets Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Creating Target Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Maintaining Targets and Target Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Oracle Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Target Code Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Special Character Handling in Target Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Importing a Target Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Relational Target Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Connectivity for Relational Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Configuring a Third-Party ODBC Data Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Importing Relational Target Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Creating a Target Definition from a Source Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Creating a Target Definition from a Relational Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Creating a Target Definition from a Flat File Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Creating a Normalized Target from a COBOL Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Steps to Create a Target Definition from a Source Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Creating a Target Definition from a Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Creating a Target from a Transformation with One Output Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Creating a Target from a Transformation with Multiple Output Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Creating a Target from a Normalizer Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Creating a Target from a Mapplet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Transformation and Target Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Steps to Create a Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Manually Creating a Target Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Maintaining Relational Target Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Reimporting a Relational Target Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Creating a Primary Key-Foreign Key Relationship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Editing Table Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Editing Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Defining Indexes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Creating a Target Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
SQL DDL Commands in the Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Dropping and Re-creating Indexes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Re-creating Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Troubleshooting Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Table of Contents 7
Chapter 5: Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Mappings Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Object Dependency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Developing a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Working with Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Creating a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Opening a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copying a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Copying Mapping Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Copying Mapping Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Exporting and Importing a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Editing a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Debugging a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Deleting a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Viewing Link Paths to a Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Viewing Source Column Dependencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Connecting Mapping Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Options for Linking Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rules and Guidelines for Connecting Mapping Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Linking Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Manually Linking Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Linking Ports by Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Linking Ports by Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Propagating Port Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Understanding Dependency Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Propagating Dependencies in a Link Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Propagating Implicit Dependencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Propagated Attributes by Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rules and Guidelines for Propagating Ports and Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Steps to Propagate Port Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Working with Sources in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Working with Relational Sources in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Working with Transformations in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Working with Mapplets in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Working with Targets in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configuring Relational Targets in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Configuring Flat File Targets in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Configuring XML Targets in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setting the Target Load Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Creating Target Files by Transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Configuring the Target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8 Table of Contents
Configuring the Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Running the Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Rules and Guidelines for Creating Target Files by Transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Working with Relational Targets in a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rejecting Truncated and Overflow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Configuring the Target Update Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Configuring the Table Name Prefix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Adding Pre- and Post-Session SQL Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Overriding the Target Table Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Validating a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Connection Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Expression Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Object Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Data Flow Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Steps to Validate a Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Using the Workflow Generation Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Workflow Generation Wizard Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Troubleshooting Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 6: Mapplets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Mapplets Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Understanding Mapplet Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Mapplet Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Mapplet Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Viewing Mapplet Input and Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Using the Mapplet Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Creating a Mapplet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Validating Mapplets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Editing Mapplets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Mapplets and Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Using Mapplets in Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Creating and Configuring Mapplet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Connecting to Mapplet Input Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Connecting to Mapplet Output Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Viewing the Mapplet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Setting the Target Load Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Pipeline Partitioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rules and Guidelines for Mapplets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Tips for Mapplets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Chapter 7: Mapping Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Mapping Parameters and Variables Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table of Contents 9
Mapping Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Mapping Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Using Mapping Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Initial and Default Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Using String Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Using Datetime Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Code Page Relaxation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Mapping Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Step 1. Create a Mapping Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Step 2. Use a Mapping Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Step 3. Define a Parameter Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Mapping Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Variable Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Variable Datatype and Aggregation Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Variable Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Mapping Variables in Mapplets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Using Mapping Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Defining Expression Strings in Parameter Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tips for Mapping Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Troubleshooting Mapping Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Chapter 8: Working with User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Working with User-Defined Functions Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Creating User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configuring the Function Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Configuring Public Functions that Contain Private Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Steps to Create a User-Defined Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Managing User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Editing User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Deleting User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Exporting User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Validating User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Copying and Deploying User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Creating Expressions with User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Chapter 9: Using the Debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Using the Debugger Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Debugger Session Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Debug Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Creating Breakpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Selecting the Instance Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Creating Error Breakpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10 Table of Contents
Creating Data Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Entering the Data Breakpoint Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Steps to Enter Breakpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Editing a Breakpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Configuring the Debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Step 1. Debugger Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Step 2. Select Integration Service and Session Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Step 3. Select Session Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Step 4. Set Session Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Step 5. Set Target Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Running the Debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Initializing State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Running State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Paused State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Debugger Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Working with Persisted Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Designer Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Monitoring the Debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Monitoring Debug Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Monitoring Transformation Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Continuing the Debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Monitoring Target Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Monitoring the Debug Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Using the Workflow Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Modifying Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Evaluating Expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Evaluating Expressions Using Mapping Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Steps to Evaluate Expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Copying Breakpoint Information and Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Transferring Breakpoints and Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Troubleshooting the Debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Chapter 10: Viewing Data Lineage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Viewing Data Lineage Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Configuring Data Lineage Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Running Data Lineage from the Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Chapter 11: Comparing Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Comparing Objects Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Comparing Sources, Targets, and Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Comparing Mappings and Mapplets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Table of Contents 11
Chapter 12: Managing Business Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Managing Business Components Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Business Component Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Creating Links to Business Component Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Managing Business Components and Directories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Creating and Editing a Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Creating a Business Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Deleting a Directory or Business Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Copying a Directory or Business Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Chapter 13: Creating Cubes and Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Creating Cubes and Dimensions Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Understanding Multi-Dimensional Metadata. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Key Elements of Multi-Dimensional Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Creating a Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Step 1. Create a Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Step 2. Add Levels to the Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Step 3. Add Hierarchies to the Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Step 4. Add Levels to the Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Creating a Cube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Editing a Cube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Editing a Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Deleting a Cube or Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Opening and Closing a Cube. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Viewing Metadata for Cubes and Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tips for Cubes and Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Chapter 14: Using the Mapping Wizards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Maintaining Star Schemas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Understanding the Mapping Wizards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Using the Getting Started Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Using the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Choosing Sources for the Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Creating a Pass-Through Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Understanding the Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Steps to Create a Pass-Through Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Customizing the Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Configuring a Pass-Through Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Creating a Slowly Growing Target Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Handling Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Steps to Create a Slowly Growing Target Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Configuring a Slowly Growing Target Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Creating a Type 1 Dimension Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Handling Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Steps to Create a Type 1 Dimension Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Configuring a Type 1 Dimension Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Handling Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Numbering Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Steps to Create a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Customizing the Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configuring a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Flagging the Current Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Handling Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Steps to Create a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Configuring a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Maintaining the Effective Date Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Handling Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Steps to Create a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Configuring a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Creating a Type 3 Dimension Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Saving Previous Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Handling Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Marking the Effective Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Steps to Create a Type 3 Dimension Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Configuring a Type 3 Dimension Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Creating Targets in the Target Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Scheduling Sessions and Workflows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Creating a Mapping from the Informatica Mapping Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Step 1. Select the Mapping Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Step 2. Specify Mapping Details and Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Step 3. Create Mappings and Save Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Step 4. Import Mappings into the Repository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Appendix A: Datatype Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Datatype Reference Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Transformation Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Table of Contents 13
Integer Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Binary Datatype. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Date/Time Datatype. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Decimal and Double Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
String Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IBM DB2 and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Informix and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Datatype Synonyms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Microsoft SQL Server and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Uniqueidentifier Datatype. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Oracle and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Number(P,S) Datatype. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Char, Varchar, Clob Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
SAP HANA and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Sybase and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Binary and Varbinary Datatypes for Sybase IQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Teradata and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
ODBC and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
COBOL and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Flat File and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Number Datatype. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
XML and Transformation Datatypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Converting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Port-to-Port Data Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Converting Strings to Dates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Converting Strings to Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Appendix B: Configure the Web Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Configure the Web Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Preface
The PowerCenter Designer Guide is written for developers and software engineers responsible for
implementing a data warehouse. The PowerCenter Designer Guide assumes that you have a solid
understanding of your operating systems, relational database concepts, and database engines, flat files, or
mainframe system in your environment. This guide also assumes that you are familiar with the interface
requirements for your supporting applications.
Informatica Resources
Informatica My Support Portal

As an Informatica customer, the first step in reaching out to Informatica is through the Informatica My Support
Portal at https://mysupport.informatica.com. The My Support Portal is the largest online data integration
collaboration platform with over 100,000 Informatica customers and partners worldwide.
As a member, you can:
• Access all of your Informatica resources in one place.

• Review your support cases.
• Search the Knowledge Base, find product documentation, access how-to documents, and watch support
videos.
• Find your local Informatica User Group Network and collaborate with your peers.
Informatica Documentation
The Informatica Documentation team makes every effort to create accurate, usable documentation. If you
have questions, comments, or ideas about this documentation, contact the Informatica Documentation team
through email at infa_documentation@informatica.com. We will use your feedback to improve our
documentation. Let us know if we can contact you regarding your comments.
The Documentation team updates documentation as needed. To get the latest documentation for your
product, navigate to Product Documentation from https://mysupport.informatica.com.
Informatica Product Availability Matrixes

Product Availability Matrixes (PAMs) indicate the versions of operating systems, databases, and other types
of data sources and targets that a product release supports. You can access the PAMs on the Informatica My
Support Portal at https://mysupport.informatica.com.
15
Informatica Web Site
You can access the Informatica corporate web site at https://www.informatica.com. The site contains
information about Informatica, its background, upcoming events, and sales offices. You will also find product
and partner information. The services area of the site includes important information about technical support,
training and education, and implementation services.
Informatica How-To Library

As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica How-To Library at
https://mysupport.informatica.com. The How-To Library is a collection of resources to help you learn more
about Informatica products and features. It includes articles and interactive demonstrations that provide
solutions to common problems, compare features and behaviors, and guide you through performing specific
real-world tasks.
Informatica Knowledge Base

As an Informatica customer, you can access the Informatica Knowledge Base at
https://mysupport.informatica.com. Use the Knowledge Base to search for documented solutions to known
technical issues about Informatica products. You can also find answers to frequently asked questions,
technical white papers, and technical tips. If you have questions, comments, or ideas about the Knowledge
Base, contact the Informatica Knowledge Base team through email at KB_Feedback@informatica.com.
Informatica Support YouTube Channel

You can access the Informatica Support YouTube channel at http://www.youtube.com/user/INFASupport. The
Informatica Support YouTube channel includes videos about solutions that guide you through performing
specific tasks. If you have questions, comments, or ideas about the Informatica Support YouTube channel,
contact the Support YouTube team through email at supportvideos@informatica.com or send a tweet to
@INFASupport.
Informatica Marketplace
The Informatica Marketplace is a forum where developers and partners can share solutions that augment,
extend, or enhance data integration implementations. By leveraging any of the hundreds of solutions
available on the Marketplace, you can improve your productivity and speed up time to implementation on
your projects. You can access Informatica Marketplace at http://www.informaticamarketplace.com.
Informatica Velocity
You can access Informatica Velocity at https://mysupport.informatica.com. Developed from the real-world
experience of hundreds of data management projects, Informatica Velocity represents the collective
knowledge of our consultants who have worked with organizations from around the world to plan, develop,
deploy, and maintain successful data management solutions. If you have questions, comments, or ideas
about Informatica Velocity, contact Informatica Professional Services at ips@informatica.com.
Informatica Global Customer Support

You can contact a Customer Support Center by telephone or through the Online Support.
Online Support requires a user name and password. You can request a user name and password at
http://mysupport.informatica.com.
16 Preface
The telephone numbers for Informatica Global Customer Support are available from the Informatica web site
at http://www.informatica.com/us/services-and-training/support-services/global-support-centers/.
Preface 17
CHAPTER 1
Using the Designer

This chapter includes the following topics:
• Using the Designer Overview, 18

• Configuring Designer Options, 20
• Using Toolbars, 27
• Adding Custom Tools, 29
• Navigating the Workspace, 30
• Designer Tasks , 34
• Previewing Data, 40
• Working with Metadata Extensions, 42
• Using Business Names, 44
• Using Business Documentation, 45
• Viewing Mapplet and Mapping Reports, 47
Using the Designer Overview

The Designer has tools to help you build mappings and mapplets so you can specify how to move and
transform data between sources and targets. The Designer helps you create source definitions, target
definitions, and transformations to build the mappings.
The Designer includes windows so you can view folders, repository objects, and tasks. You can work in
multiple folders and repositories at one time.
You can configure general Designer settings, such as font and background color. You can also configure
specific tool settings for each Designer tool.
Designer Tools
The Designer provides the following tools:
• Source Analyzer. Import or create source definitions for flat file, XML, COBOL, Application, and relational
sources.
• Target Designer. Import or create target definitions.
• Transformation Developer. Create reusable transformations.
• Mapplet Designer. Create mapplets.
18
• Mapping Designer. Create mappings.
Designer Windows
The Designer consists of the following windows:
• Navigator. Connect to multiple repositories and folders. You can also copy and delete objects and create
shortcuts using the Navigator.
• Workspace. View or edit sources, targets, mapplets, transformations, and mappings. You work with a
single tool at a time in the workspace, which has two formats: default and workbook. You can view
multiple versions of an object in the workspace.
• Status bar. Displays the status of the operation you perform.
• Output. Provides details when you perform certain tasks, such as saving work or validating a mapping.
Right-click the Output window to access window options, such as printing output text, saving text to file,
and changing the font size.
• Overview. View workbooks that contain large mappings or a lot of objects. The Overview window outlines
the visible area in the workspace and highlights selected objects in color. To open the Overview window,
click View > Overview Window.
• Instance Data. View transformation data while you run the Debugger to debug a mapping.
• Target Data. View target data while you run the Debugger to debug a mapping.
You can view a list of open windows, and you can switch from one window to another in the Designer. To
view the list of open windows, click Window > Windows.
The following figure shows the Designer windows:
1. Status Bar
2. Navigator
3. Output
4. Workspace
The following figure shows the Overview window:
Using the Designer Overview 19

The objects within the outline display in the workspace. Objects filled with color are selected in the
workspace.
Configuring Designer Options

You can configure how the Designer displays general information, tables, and tools. The Designer lets you
specify display options including the background color of the tools, the organization of the navigator window,
and the font used in different tools. You can also specify other options such as whether the Source Analyzer
imports primary keys. Some changes require you to restart the Designer to apply the changes. The Designer
warns you if you need to restart the program.
You can configure the following options in the Designer:
• General. You can configure general display options, XML import, file directories, and the organization of
the Navigator window.
• Tables. You can configure the columns, size, and behavior of table definitions.
• Format. You can configure the color, font, and other format options of Designer tools.
• Debug. You can configure display and TCP/IP options of the Debugger.
• Web services. You can configure backward compatibility and WSDL creation options for the Web
Services Hub.
• Miscellaneous. You can configure the available functions for the Copy Wizard and checkouts.
Configuring General Options

You can configure general options for the Navigator window, the Display window, and directories.
To configure general options:
1. Click Tools > Options.

2. Click the General tab.
20 Chapter 1: Using the Designer

3. You can configure the following general options:
General Option Description
Reload Tables/Mappings Reloads the last view of a tool when you open it. For example, if you have a
when Opening a Folder mapping open when you disconnect from a repository, the mapping displays
the next time you open the folder and the Mapping Designer.
Ask Whether to Reload the Appears only when you select Reload Tables/Mappings when Opening a
Tables/Mappings Folder. Select to have the Designer prompt you to reload objects each time
you open a folder.
Display Tool Names on Displays the name of the tool in the upper left corner of the workspace or
Views workbook.
Delay Overview Window By default, when you drag the focus of the Overview window, the focus of the
Pans workbook moves concurrently. When you select this option, the focus of the
workspace does not change until you release the mouse button.
Receive Notifications from You can receive notification messages in the Designer and view them in the
Repository Service Output window. Notification messages include information about objects that
another user creates, modifies, or deletes. You receive notifications about
mappings, mapplets, shortcuts, source definitions, target definitions, and
transformations. The Repository Service notifies you of the changes so you
know that objects you are working with may be out of date. For the Designer
to receive a notification, the folder containing the object must be open in the
Navigator. For the Designer to receive notification of a modified or deleted
object, the object must be open in the workspace. You also receive user-
created notifications that are posted by the user who manages the Repository
Service. Default is enabled.
Save All MX Data Saves all MX data when you save mappings in the Designer. Select this
option to use MX views for third-party repository tools.
When you save MX data for mappings, PowerCenter creates a field
expression for each target field in the mappings. These expressions are
different from the transformation expressions that you create in the
Expression Editor.
You must save and check in the mapping before you can access the MX data.
Default is disabled.
Note: Saving MX data can impact repository performance. Use this option
only when you want to use MX views.
Save Only Source/Target Saves only dependency-related MX data when you save mappings in the
Dependencies Designer. Select this option if you do not need to view expressions of fields in
MX views, but you use the Repository Manager to view source/target
dependencies. Default is disabled.
Group Source by Displays sources grouped by database in the Navigator. Otherwise, sources
Database appear in alphabetic order by source name, with the database name in
parentheses.
Display Sources Using Displays sources by business names in the Navigator. If you enable the option
Business Names to display sources by business names, the Navigator displays the business
names first, and then the source type name and table name in parentheses.
Configuring Designer Options 21

General Option Description
Display Targets Using Displays targets by business names in the Navigator. If you enable the option
Business Names to display targets by business names, the Navigator displays the business
names first, then the target type name and table name in parentheses.
Workspace File The directory for workspace files that are created by the Designer. Workspace
files maintain the last source or target that you opened, or the last mapping
that you saved. This directory should be a local directory to prevent file
corruption or overwrites by multiple users. By default, the Designer creates
files in the installation directory.
HTML Documentation HTML or URL path to enter links to business documentation.

Path or URL
Configuring Tables Options

You can configure the columns, size, and behavior of table definitions.
To configure table definition options:

2. Click the Tables tab.
3. From the Tables list, select the repository object you want to configure.
The Columns section lists available display parameters for each repository object. Use the up and down
arrows to change the display order of the columns.
4. You can configure the following options for the selected object type:
Tables Option Tool Availability Description
Columns Default All tools Default width of table columns in bytes.

Width
Columns Available All tools Columns that are available to display when the repository
object is full-size.
Columns Selected All tools Columns that appear in the Designer when the repository
object is full-size. To display a column, select it in the
Columns Available list and click the double-arrow button to
move the column into the Columns Selected list. You can
also delete columns and change the order in which they
appear.
Tools All tools Select the Designer tool you want to configure.
Import Primary Keys Source Analyzer, Designer imports primary keys for relational source or
Target Designer target definitions.
Import Foreign Keys Source Analyzer, Designer imports foreign keys for relational source or target
Target Designer definitions.

Tables Option Tool Availability Description
Create Source Mapping Designer, Designer creates a Source Qualifier or a Normalizer

Qualifier When Mapplet Designer transformation for each source you add to the mapping.
Opening Sources Clear the option to manually create all Source Qualifiers
and Normalizers. You might want to create a Source
Qualifier manually when you use the Source Qualifier to join
relational tables.
Use Business Mapping Designer, Source Qualifier uses business names as column names.
Names as Column Mapplet Designer
Names for Source
Qualifier
General Default All tools Default width of all repository objects.

Width
General Default All tools Default height of all repository objects.

Height
Show Tooltips All tools Shows the column or repository object name when you
move the pointer over a column or the title bar of an object.
When selected, this option also displays business names
when you move the pointer over the icon on the title bar of
an object. This option applies to all repository objects.
Some options on the Tables tab are disabled, depending on the tool that you select to edit. Click Reset
All to revert to default setting for this tab.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for each repository object type you want to configure.
Configuring Format Options

You can configure the color, font, and other format options for each tool in the Designer.
To configure format options:

2. Click the Format tab.
3. To apply a color theme, click Select Theme.
4. In the Workspace Colors section, select a Designer tool from the Tools menu to configure the workspace
colors.
5. Select a workspace element, and click Color to change the color of the element.
Elements in the Workspace Colors section depend on the tool that you select to configure. You can
configure the color of the following elements:
Element Tool Availability Description
Background All tools Background of the workspace area.
Foreground Text All tools Text that appears in the workspace area.

Element Tool Availability Description
Link Selection Source Analyzer, Selected link between repository objects in the
Target Designer, workspace.
Mapplet Designer,
Mapping Designer
Relationship Link Source Analyzer, Link showing primary-key/foreign-key relationship

Target Designer, between two tables.
Mapplet Designer,
Mapping Designer
Propagate Link Mapplet Designer, Link affected by port attribute propagation.

Mapping Designer
Data Flow Link Mapplet Designer, Link between ports of repository objects in a mapplet
Mapping Designer or mapping in the workspace.
Metadata Flow Link Mapplet Designer, Link between an MQ Source Qualifier transformation
Mapping Designer and the associated source.
6. In the Caption Colors section, select an object type from the Tables menu to configure the title bar text
and background colors.
You can configure the following colors:
Option Description
Foreground Color of the table caption text.
Background Background color of the table caption.
Background(2) Second background color of the table caption. You can combine two background
colors to create a color gradient in the title bar of the repository object. Choose
the same color for Background and Background(2) if you do not want a color
gradient.
7. In the Fonts section, select a component of the Designer from the Categories menu to view or change its
font.
The Current Font field shows the font of the currently selected Designer component. Click Change to
change the display font and language script for the Designer component selected in the Categories
menu. You might want to do this if the PowerCenter Client code page is different from the source file
code page.
Using Color Themes

Use color themes to quickly select the colors of the workspace elements in the Designer tools. When you
apply a color theme, you update the colors of the workspace elements in all the Designer tools collectively.
You can choose from the following standard color themes:
• Informatica Classic. This is the standard color scheme for workspace elements. The workspace
background is gray, the workspace text is white, and the link colors are blue, red, blue-gray, dark green,
and black.

• High Contrast Black. Bright link colors stand out against the black background. The workspace
background is black, the workspace text is white, and the link colors are purple, red, light blue, bright
green, and white.
• Colored Backgrounds. Each Designer tool has a different pastel-colored workspace background. The
workspace text is black, and the link colors are the same as in the Informatica Classic color theme.
After you select a color theme for the Designer tools, you can modify the color of individual workspace
elements. Changes that you make to individual elements do not appear in the Preview section of the Theme
Selector dialog box.
To select a color theme for the Designer tools:
1. In the Designer, click Tools > Options.

2. Click the Format tab.
3. In the Color Themes section of the Format tab, click Select Theme.
4. Select a theme from the Theme menu.
5. Click the tabs in the Preview section to see how the workspace elements appear in each of the Designer
tools.
6. Click OK to apply the color theme.
Configuring Debug Options

You can configure Debugger display and TCP/IP options on the Debug tab.
To configure Debug options:

2. Click the Debug tab.
3. You can configure the following options for the Debugger:
Option Description
Data Display Select information to display in the Target Data and Instance Data windows.
TCP/IP Select a specific TCP/IP port or a range of ports for the Designer connection to the
Integration Service.
Configuring Web Service Options

You can configure web service options on the WebService tab.
To configure web service options:

2. Click the WebService tab.

3. You can configure the following options for web services:
Option Description
Create separate groups for Indicates whether to create separate XML views for message and header
message and header ports ports when you add message ports to web service source and target
definitions. If you create separate groups for message and header ports,
the Designer creates one view for the message ID and another view for
the header ports.
Web service source and target definitions that include message and
header ports in separate views match the format of previous versions of
web service source or target definitions. This option is provided for
backward compatibility to PowerCenter version 8.1.x.
Create separate targets for Indicates whether to create separate target definitions for fault responses.
faults If you create separate target definitions for fault responses, the Designer
creates a target definition for each fault in the output message. Web
service targets that include a separate definition for each fault in the
output message match the format of previous versions of web service
target definitions. This option is provided for backward compatibility to
PowerCenter version 8.1.x.
Create WSDL Indicates whether to generate the WSDL for mappings generated from
relational or flat file sources or targets, transformations, or mapplets. If
you generate a web service mapping without a WSDL, the Designer can
generate the WSDL after you create the mapping. Click the browse button
to select the directory in which the Designer creates the WSDL files. The
name of the WSDL file is the name of the mapping with a .wsdl extension.
Configuring Miscellaneous Options

You can configure Copy Wizard and versioning options on the Miscellaneous tab.
To configure Miscellaneous options:

2. Click the Miscellaneous tab.
3. You can configure the following options:
Option Description
Generate Unique Name When Generates unique names for copied objects if you select the Rename
Resolved to “Rename” option in the Copy Wizard window. For example, if the source object
s_customers has the same name as a source in the destination folder, the
Rename option generates the unique name s_customers1.
Show Checkout Image in Displays the Check Out icon when you check out an object.
Navigator
Allow Delete Without Checkout You can delete versioned repository objects without first checking them
out. You cannot, however, delete an object that another user has checked
out. If you select this option, the Repository Service checks out an object
to you when you delete it.

Option Description
Check In Deleted Objects Checks in deleted objects after you save the changes to the repository.
Automatically After They Are When you clear this option, the deleted object remains checked out and
Saved you must check it in from the results view.
Reset All Resets all Miscellaneous options to the default values.
Using Toolbars
Toolbars allow you to select tools and tasks quickly. You can configure the toolbars you want to display or
hide. You can also create a new toolbar and add or remove toolbar buttons.
Designer Toolbars
You can configure the Designer to display the following toolbars:
• Standard. Contains buttons to connect to and disconnect from repository and folders, and to toggle views
and columns.
• Repository. Contains buttons to connect to and disconnect from repositories and folders, export and
import objects, save changes, and print the workspace.
• View. Contains buttons to configure toolbars, toggle windows, toggle full-screen view, change workspace
mode, and view properties.
• Layout. Contains buttons to iconize, and arrange repository objects, copy, link, and move columns, and
zoom in/out of the workspace.
• Mappings/Mapplets. Contains buttons to create, edit, and parse mappings and mapplets.
• Transformations. Contains buttons to create transformations.
• Advanced Transformations. Contains buttons to create advanced transformations.
• Versioning. Contains buttons to check in objects, undo checkouts, find checkouts, view history, undo
labels, and manage queries.
• Debugger. Contains buttons to start, stop, and continue the Debugger.
• Tools. Contains buttons to connect to the other PowerCenter Client applications. When you use a Tools
button to open another PowerCenter Client application, PowerCenter uses the same repository connection
to connect to the repository and opens the same folders.
If you do not see all buttons in the toolbar, you can configure the toolbar.
Workflow Manager Toolbars

The Workflow Manager can display the following toolbars to help you select tools and perform operations
quickly:
• Standard. Contains buttons to connect to and disconnect from repositories and folders, toggle windows,
zoom in and out, pan the workspace, and find objects.
• Connections. Contains buttons to create and edit connections, services, and server grids.
• Repository. Contains buttons to connect to, disconnect from, and add repositories, open folders, close
tools, save changes to repositories, and print the workspace.
Using Toolbars 27
• View. You can customize toolbars, toggle the status bar and windows, toggle full-screen view, create a
new workbook, and view the properties of objects.
• Layout. Contains buttons to arrange objects in the workspace, find objects, zoom in and out, and pan the
workspace.
• Tasks. Contains buttons to create tasks.
• Workflow. Contains buttons to edit workflow properties.
• Run. Contains buttons to schedule the workflow, start the workflow, or start a task.
• Versioning. Contains buttons to check in objects, undo checkouts, compare versions, compare versions,
list checked-out objects, and list repository queries.
to connect to the repository and opens the same folders. By default, PowerCenter displays the Tools
toolbar.
Workflow Monitor Toolbars

The Workflow Monitor can display the following toolbars to help you perform operations quickly:
• Standard. Contains buttons to connect to and disconnect from repositories, print, view print previews,
search the workspace, show or hide the navigator in task view, and show or hide the output window.
• Integration Service. Contains buttons to connect to and disconnect from Integration Services, ping
Integration Service, and perform workflow operations.
• View. Contains buttons to configure time increments and show properties, workflow logs, or session logs.
• Filters. Contains buttons to display most recent runs, and to filter tasks, Integration Services, and folders.
Repository Manager Toolbars

The Repository Manager displays the following toolbars by default:
• Standard. Contains buttons to connect to and disconnect from repositories, view dependencies for
selected objects, search by keyword, view object properties, close the Dependency window, and toggle
the Navigator and Output windows.
to connect to the repository and opens the same folders.
Displaying a Toolbar
You can configure a toolbar to display at all times. You can configure the toolbars to display in the Designer,
Workflow Manager, and the Workflow Monitor.
To display a toolbar:
1. Click Tools > Customize.

2. On the Toolbars tab, select the toolbars you want to display.
3. To show tooltips as you hold the pointer over a toolbar button, select Show Tooltips.
4. Click OK.

Creating a Toolbar
You can create a new toolbar and choose buttons for the new toolbar. You can create toolbars in the
Designer, Workflow Manager, and the Workflow Monitor.
To create a new toolbar:

2. On the Toolbars tab, click New.
3. Enter a name for the new toolbar and click OK.
A new floating toolbar appears, and the toolbar name appears in the toolbar list.
4. Click the Commands tab.
5. Select a toolbar from the Categories list to view the buttons available.
6. Drag any button from the Buttons area to the new floating toolbar.
7. Click OK when you finish creating the toolbar.
Configuring a Toolbar
To configure a toolbar, add or remove buttons on the toolbar. You can configure toolbars to display in the
Designer, Workflow Manager, and the Workflow Monitor.
To configure a toolbar:

2. Verify you select the toolbar you want to configure.
The toolbar appears.
3. To remove a button from the toolbar, drag the button from the toolbar to the Customize dialog box.
4. To add a button, click the Commands tab.
5. Select a toolbar from the Categories list to view the buttons available.
6. Drag any button from the Buttons area to the customized toolbar.
7. Click OK when you finish customizing the toolbar.
Adding Custom Tools

The Designer lets you add custom tools to the Tools menu. You can start programs that you frequently use
from within the Designer. For example, you can start the Business Objects Designer or a web browser from
within the Designer.
When you add custom tools, the Designer appends the tool names to the bottom of the Tools menu. To start
a tool, click the Tools menu and select the custom tool.
You can add, delete, and rearrange the order of custom tools. Click Tools > Customize and click the Tools
tab.
The Menu Contents list displays the custom tools. The Designer places the tool names at the bottom of the
Tools menu in the order in which they appear in this list.
Adding Custom Tools 29

To add a custom tool:
1. Click the Add Custom Tool button.

You can add up to nine tools to the Tools menu.
2. In the Menu Contents field, enter a unique name for the custom tool. The Designer displays this name on
the Tools menu.
Tip: Enter an ampersand (&) before a character in the tool name to use that character as a quick access
key.
3. Use the arrow buttons to place the new tool in the appropriate position on the Tools menu.
4. Enter the following information for the tool:
Option Description
Command Name and file path of the tool executable file. Click the Browse button to select the
executable file.
Arguments Arguments that the Designer passes to the custom tool. The arguments are optional or
required, depending on the tool.
If you want the Designer to prompt you for arguments when you start the custom tool,
select Prompt for Arguments.
Initial Directory Directory in which the custom tool should start. If you do not enter an initial directory,
the Designer uses the custom tool program executable directory.
5. Click OK.
Navigating the Workspace

When you view or edit repository objects in the workspace, complete the following tasks to navigate the
workspace easily:
• Search for columns or ports.

• Resize repository objects.
• Zoom in or zoom out of the workspace.
Search Tools
The Designer includes the Find Next and Find in Workspace tools to help you find columns or ports in
repository objects or strings in the output window.
Find Next
Use the Find Next tool to search for a column or port name in:
• Transformations
• Mapplets
• Source definitions
• Target definitions

With the Find Next tool, you can search one object at a time. You cannot search multiple objects at the same
time. Use Find Next in each Designer tool. Select a single transformation or click in the Output window before
performing the search.
The Designer saves the last 10 strings searched in the Find Next box on the Standard toolbar.
To find a column or port name:
1. Select the transformation, mapplet, source or target definition, or click the Output window.
2. Enter the text you want to search in the Find box on the Standard toolbar. For example, you might enter
add to locate an address column.
Tip: The search is not case sensitive.
3. Click Edit > Find Next, click the Find Next button, or press Enter to search for the string.
The Designer finds the first occurrence of the search string.
Tip: You can also press F3 to search for the string.
4. Press Enter again to search for the next occurrence of the search string. The Designer searches each
port or column name in the transformation and wraps to the top of the transformation until it finds a
match.
Find in Workspace
You can search for a string in the Save, Generate, or Validate tabs in the Output window. The Find in
Workspace tool searches for a field name or transformation name in all transformations in the workspace.
The Find in Workspace tool lets you to search all of the transformations in the workspace for port or
transformation names. You can search for column or port names or table names matching the search string.
You can specify whether to search across all names in the workspace, or across the business name of a
table, column, or port. You can also choose to search for whole word matches for the search string or
matches which match the case of the search string.
To find a column, port, or transformation name in the workspace:
1. In a Designer tool, click the Find in Workspace button, or click Edit > Find in Workspace.
The Find in Workspace dialog box opens.
2. Choose to search for field names or table names matching the search text.
Look for Option Description
Fields Designer searches for column or port names matching the search text.
Tables Designer searches for table names matching the search text.
3. Specify the search string in the Find What entry field, or select a search string from the list.
The Designer saves the last 10 search strings in the list.
Navigating the Workspace 31

4. Specify whether you want to look for matches to the search text among all names or business names.
Find In Option Description
Names Designer searches across all names of tables, columns, or ports in the workspace.
Business Names Designer searches across the business names of tables, columns, or ports in the
workspace.
5. Specify search criteria.
Search Option Description
Look in all Tables Select this option to search across all tables in the workspace. If you do not select
this option, the Designer searches across all currently selected tables in the
workspace. This option is selected when you search for table names matching the
search string.
Match Whole Word Select this option to find names or business names that match the specified
Only string.
Match Case Select this option if you want to search for strings that match the case of the
specified search string.
6. Click Find Now.

All matches appear in the table at the bottom of the Find in Workspace dialog box.
7. Click Close.
Iconizing and Restoring Workspace Objects

Each Designer tool displays different objects in the workspace. You might view source definitions, target
definitions, transformations, mapplets, or entire mappings, depending on which tool you have open. The
Designer can display repository objects in the following forms:
• Normal. The Designer displays the information in each object in columns. The Designer displays objects
normally by default.
• Iconized. The Designer reduces objects to a named icon. You might iconize objects when working with
large mappings. You can view descriptions associated with iconized objects by holding the pointer above
the icon.
• Zoom. The Designer changes the magnification level of the normal and iconized objects in the workspace
when you use the zoom feature. You can apply magnification levels from 30 to 100 percent in 10 percent
increments.
Iconizing Workspace Objects

You can iconize objects in the workspace.
To iconize workspace objects:
1. Select the object in the workspace.

To select more than one object, Shift-click or Ctrl-click multiple objects. You can also select multiple
objects by clicking Edit > Select All or dragging a rectangle around those objects.

2. Click Layout > Arrange All Iconic.
Tip: You can also right-click and select Arrange All Iconic.
Restoring Workspace Objects

You can restore iconized objects to normal size.
To restore iconized workspace objects to normal size:
1. Select the object.

To select more than one object, Shift-click or Ctrl-click multiple objects.
You can also select multiple objects by clicking Edit > Select All or dragging a rectangle around those
objects.
2. Click Layout > Arrange.
Tip: You can also restore an object by double-clicking the iconized object or right-clicking the object and
selecting Arrange.
Arranging Workspace Objects

You can display specific pipelines in the Mapping Designer.
To display specific pipelines in the Mapping Designer:
1. Click Layout > Arrange.

2. Select pipelines by target.
You can select the Iconic option to display arranged pipelines in iconized form.
3. Click OK.
Zooming the Workspace

You can zoom in and out of the workspace. Use the toolbar or the Layout menu options to set zoom levels.
The toolbar has the following zoom options:
• Zoom in 10% on button. Uses a point you select as the center point from which to increase the current
magnification in 10 percent increments.
• Zoom out 10% on button. Uses a point you select as the center point from which to decrease the current
magnification in 10 percent increments.
• Zoom in based on rectangle. Increases the current magnification of a rectangular area you select.
Degree of magnification depends on the size of the area you select, workspace size, and current
magnification.
• Drop-down list. Maintains the center point of the workspace and sets the zoom level to the percent you
select from the list.
• Scale to fit. Scales all workspace objects to fit the workspace.
The Layout menu has the following zoom options:
• Zoom Center. Maintains the center point of the workspace and zooms in or out by 10 percent increments.
• Zoom Point. Uses a point you select as the center point from which to zoom in or out by 10 percent
increments.
• Zoom Rectangle. Increases the current magnification of a rectangular area you select. Degree of
magnification depends on the size of the area you select, workspace size, and current magnification.
Navigating the Workspace 33

• Zoom Normal. Sets the zoom level to 100 percent.
• Scale to Fit. Scales all workspace objects to fit the workspace.
• Zoom Percent. Maintains the center point of the workspace and sets the zoom level to the percent you
choose.
When you add objects to a workspace, the Designer uses the magnification level of the other objects. The
Designer saves the zoom level for each Designer tool in a folder when you exit.
Viewing the Workspace

You can maximize the workspace window by clicking View > Full Screen. You can see the Standard toolbar
and the Transformation toolbar when you are in full screen view. The full screen view hides the menu, the
Navigator and Output windows, and the title bar. To use the menu when you are in full screen view, point
anywhere on the top of the screen to show the menu.
To go back to normal view, click the Close Full Screen button or press Esc.
Designer Tasks
You can complete the following tasks in each Designer tool:
• Add a repository.
• Print the workspace.
• View date and time an object was last saved.
• Open and close a folder.
• Create shortcuts.
• Check out and in repository objects.
• Search for repository objects.
• Enter descriptions for repository objects.
• View older versions of objects inthe workspace.
• Revert to a previously saved object version.
• Copy objects.
• Export and import repository objects.
• Work with multiple objects, ports, or columns.
• Rename ports.
• Use shortcut keys.
You can also view object dependencies in the Designer.
Adding a Repository
To edit a repository object, first add a repository in the Navigator so you can access the repository object. To
add a repository in the Navigator, click Repository > Add. Use the Add Repositories dialog box to add the
repository.

Printing the Workspace
To print the workspace:
u Click Repository > Print.

You can also right-click the workspace and choose Print.
Setting up the Workspace Printout

To specify a header and a footer for the workspace print out:
u Click Repository > Page Setup.
Previewing the Workspace Print Out

To preview the workspace before you print:
u Click Repository > Print Preview.
Viewing the Last Saved Date/Time

You can view the date and time an object was last saved in the repository. To view the “Last Saved” date and
time, select the object in the Navigator and click View > Properties.
Note: Sources do not have a “Last Saved” date and time.
For Windows, use the Regional Settings in the Control Panel to configure the “Last Saved” date and time
format.
Opening and Closing a Folder

Double-click a folder to open a folder and tool at the same time. When you double-click the folder, the
Designer opens the folder in the Navigator and displays the last tool that was active within the folder.
You can also select a folder and then choose a tool to open a workspace. If you select the Reload Tables/
Mappings When Opening a Folder option, the Designer also displays the last objects open when using that
tool.
For example, if you close a folder with the Source Analyzer active, the next time you open the folder using
the Open Folder button, the Designer displays the Source Analyzer.
To close a folder:
u Select the folder in the Navigator and click the Disconnect button. To close all open folders and tools,
click Repository > Close All Tools.
Creating Shortcuts
To create a shortcut to an object in a shared folder, drag the object into the destination folder or into the
mapping. For example, to create a shortcut to a source, drag the source from the shared folder into the
mapping you have open in the workspace. You can also create a shortcut by dropping the source into the
destination folder. To use the new shortcut, drag it into the workspace.
You can create a shortcut to a shared folder in the same repository. You can also create a shortcut in a local
repository that points to a shared folder in the global repository, as long as both repositories are in the same
domain.
As with copying objects, the destination folder must be open.
Designer Tasks 35
Note: You cannot create shortcuts to objects in non-shared folders.
Checking Out and In Versioned Objects

When you work with versioned objects, you must check out an object to modify it, and save it to commit
changes to the repository. Checking in an object adds a new version to the object history. You must check in
the object to allow other users to make changes to it.
Searching for Objects

Use an object query to search for objects in the repository that meet specified conditions. When you run a
query, the repository returns results based on those conditions. You may want to create an object query to
complete the following tasks:
• Track repository objects during development. You can add Label, User, Last saved, or Comments
parameters to queries to track objects during development.
• Associate a query with a deployment group. When you create a dynamic deployment group, you can
associate an object query with it.
To create an object query, click Tools > Queries to open the Query Browser.
From the Query Browser, you can create, edit, and delete queries. You can also configure permissions for
each query from the Query Browser. You can run any query for which you have read permissions from the
Query Browser.
Entering Descriptions for Repository Objects

You can enter descriptions and comments for each repository object. You can enter a maximum number of
characters equal to 2,000 bytes/K. K is the maximum number of bytes a character contains in the selected
repository code page. For example, if the repository code page is a Japanese code page where K=2, each
description and comment field lets you enter up to 1,000 characters.
Viewing and Comparing Versioned Repository Objects

You can view and compare versions of objects. If an object has multiple versions, you can find the versions
of the object in the View History window. In addition to comparing versions of an object in a window, you can
view the various versions of an object in the workspace to graphically compare them.
Rules and Guidelines for Viewing and Comparing Versioned Repository

Objects
Use the following rules and guidelines when you view older versions of objects in the workspace:
• You cannot simultaneously view multiple versions of composite objects, such as mappings and mapplets.
• Older versions of composite objects might not include the child objects that were used when the
composite object was checked in. If you open a composite object that includes a child object version that
is purged from the repository, the preceding version of the child object appears in the workspace as part
of the composite object. For example, you want to view version 5 of a mapping that originally included
version 3 of a source definition, but version 3 of the source definition is purged from the repository. When
you view version 5 of the mapping, version 2 of the source definition appears as part of the mapping.
• Shortcut objects are not updated when you modify the objects they reference. When you open a shortcut
object, you view the same version of the object that the shortcut originally referenced, even if subsequent
versions exist.

Viewing an Older Version of a Repository Object
To open an older version of an object in the workspace:
1. In the workspace or Navigator, select the object and click Versioning > View History.
2. Select the version you want to view in the workspace and click Tools > Open in Workspace.
Note: An older version of an object is read-only, and the version number appears as a prefix before the
object name. You can simultaneously view multiple versions of a non-composite object in the workspace.
Comparing Versions of a Repository Object

To compare two versions of an object:
1. In the workspace or Navigator, select an object and click Versioning > View History.
2. Select the versions you want to compare, and then click Compare > Selected Versions.
To compare a version of the object with the previous version, select a version and click Compare >
Previous Version.
A window appears where you can view detailed information about both versions of the object.
Note: You can also access the View History window from the Query Results window when you execute a
query.
Reverting to a Previous Object Version

When you edit an object in the Designer, you can revert to a previously saved version, undoing changes you
entered since the last save. You can revert to the previously saved versions of multiple objects at the same
time.
To revert to a previously saved version of an object:
1. Open the object in the workspace.

2. Select the object and click Edit > Revert to Saved.
3. Click Yes. If you selected more than one object, click Yes to All.
The Designer removes all changes entered since the last time you saved the object.
Copying Designer Objects

You can copy Designer objects within the same folder, to a different folder, or to a different repository. You
can copy any of the Designer objects such as sources, targets, mappings, mapplets, transformations, and
dimensions. You must open the target folder before you can copy objects to it.
Use the Copy Wizard in the Designer to copy objects. The Copy Wizard checks for conflicts in the target
folder and provides choices to resolve the conflicts. For example, if an item already exists in the target folder,
a description of the problem displays in the screen. The Copy Wizard displays possible resolutions. For a
duplicate object, you can rename, reuse, replace, or skip copying the object.
To configure display settings and functions of the Copy Wizard, click Tools > Options in the Designer.
You can import objects from an XML file through the Import Wizard in the Designer.
The Import Wizard provides the same options to resolve conflicts as the Copy Wizard.
Designer Tasks 37
Copying Mapping Segments
You can copy segments of mappings and mapplets when you want to reuse a portion of the mapping logic. A
segment consists of one of more objects in a mapping or mapplet. The objects can be sources, targets,
shortcuts, transformations, and mapplets. To copy mapping segments, select and copy the segments from
one mapping and paste them into a target mapping. You can paste segments of mappings or mapplets into
an empty mapping or mapplet workspace. You can also copy segments across folders or repositories.
To copy a segment of a mapping or mapplet:
1. Open a mapping or mapplet.

2. Select a segment by highlighting each object you want to copy.
You can select multiple objects. You can also select segments by dragging the pointer in a rectangle
around objects in the workspace.
3. Copy the segment to the clipboard.
4. Open a target mapping or mapplet.
Optionally, you can open an empty mapping or mapplet workspace.
5. Click Edit > Paste or press Ctrl+V.
The Copy Wizard opens if you have copy conflicts.
Copying Objects as an Image

In the Designer workspace, you can copy an image of objects such as mappings or transformations to the
Clipboard. You can then paste the image file into the workspace of any application that uses graphics.
To copy objects in the Designer workspace as an image:
1. In the Designer, open the tool associated with the object you want to copy.
For example, open the Mapping Designer if you want to copy a mapping as an image.
2. Open the object you want to copy.
If you choose to show iconized mappings, the copied image does not show mapping links. You can copy
the mapping links by selecting them manually.
3. Drag the pointer to create a rectangle around the objects you want to select.
You can also Ctrl-click to select individual objects. However, if you use this method to select objects, the
copied image does not show mapping links.
4. Press Shift+Alt+C or click Edit > Copy As Image.
You can copy one image to the Clipboard at a time.
5. Paste the image into the workspace of any application that uses graphic files.
For example, you can paste the image into a Microsoft Word document.
Exporting and Importing Objects

To export an object to an XML file, right-click the object and choose Export Objects in the Designer. The
Designer saves all necessary information to import that object back into a repository.
To import an object from an XML file in the Designer, click Repository > Import Objects.
Working with Multiple Ports or Columns

In all Designer tools, you can move or delete multiple ports or columns at the same time.

Note: You cannot select multiple ports or columns when editing COBOL sources in the Source Analyzer.
To select consecutive ports or columns:
1. Double-click the source, target, or transformation.

2. In the Edit Tables dialog box, choose the Ports or Columns tab.
3. Select the first port or column using the row header number in the transformation.
4. To select a range to move or delete, hold down the Shift key as you click the last port or column in the
range. To select individual ports or columns, hold down the Ctrl key and click each port or column using
the row header number you want to move or delete.
Note: When you select multiple ports or columns, the Designer disables add, copy, and paste.
5. Click Delete.
Renaming Ports
You can rename ports in sources, targets, and transformations. To rename a port in a source, target, or
transformation, double-click the port, and type in the new name. The Designer propagates the new name to
the mappings and mapplets that use this source, target, or transformation. You can rename ports in the
following Designer tools:
• Source Analyzer. To rename a port in a source.

• Target Designer. To rename a port in a target.
• Transformation Developer. To rename a port in a reusable transformation.
• Mapplet Designer and Mapping Designer. To rename a port in a non-reusable transformation. You can
propagate the new name to other non-reusable transformations that access this port through the
Designer.
Using Shortcut Keys

When editing a repository object, use shortcuts on the Ports or Columns tab.
The following table lists the Designer shortcuts:
Task Shortcut
Add a new field or port. Alt+F
Cancel editing in a cell. Esc
Select or clear a port type check box. Space bar
Copy a row. Alt+O
Copy text in a cell. Ctrl+C
Cut a row. Alt+C
Edit the text of a cell. F2, then move the cursor to the location inside the
cell.
Find all combination and list boxes. Type the first letter on the list.
Designer Tasks 39
Task Shortcut
Find tables or fields in the workspace. Ctrl+F
Move current row down. Alt+W
Move current row up. Alt+U
Open the Expression Editor from the expression field. F2, then press F3
Paste a row. Alt+P
Paste copied text into a cell. Ctrl+V
Select the text of a cell. F2
Validate the default value in a transformation. Alt+V
Previewing Data
You can preview source and target data in the Designer. Preview source or target data before you create a
mapping or while you work with a mapping.
You can preview the following types of data:
• Relational tables and views. Preview relational sources and targets. You can preview data for a valid
relational source definition or target definition in the Designer. A source definition or shortcut to a source
definition is valid if it matches the source table. A target definition is valid if it matches the target table.
You must be able to connect to the source or target database to preview relational data.
• Fixed-width and delimited flat files. Preview flat file sources and targets that do not contain binary data.
You can preview data for a valid flat file source or target definition in the Designer. A source or target
definition is valid if it matches the source file.
• XML files. Preview XML file data in the XML Editor. You can preview XML data using an XML definition
and an external XML file. To preview data, you must have a valid XML definition in the repository and data
in an external XML file that is valid for the definition. You can view data for one XML view at a time.
Tip: Preview source data to verify that you extract data from the correct source. You can also preview
source data to determine which columns to use in a mapping. You can preview target data before you
truncate target tables or when you implement an update strategy.
Previewing Relational Data

To preview relational source or target data:
1. Select a relational source or target definition in the workspace.

2. Right-click the source or target definition in the workspace and choose Preview Data.
3. Select a data source name.
4. Enter a database user name and password.
The user name must have database permissions to view the object.

5. Enter the database table owner name.
6. Enter the number of rows you want to preview.
The Preview Data dialog box can display up to 500 rows and up to 65,000 columns.
7. Click Connect.
8. To change the number of rows you want to preview, enter a new number and click Refresh.
9. Click Close.
Previewing Flat File Data

To preview flat file source and target data:
1. Select a flat file source or target definition in the workspace.

2. Right-click the source or target definition in the workspace and choose Preview Data.
3. Click the Browse button to select a flat file.
4. Locate and select the file you want to preview and click Open.
5. Select a code page from the Preview Data dialog box.
The code page must match the code page of the source. If the code page does not match the code page
of the source, the data might display incorrectly.
The Designer lists the five code pages you have most recently selected. Then it lists all remaining code
pages in alphabetical order.
6. Enter the starting row number and the number of rows you want to preview.
The Preview Data dialog box can display up to 500 rows and up to 65,000 columns.
7. Click Open.
Note: The Preview Data dialog box displays shift characters display as periods (.) in shift-sensitive flat
files.
8. To change the starting row number or the number of rows you want to preview, enter a new number and
click Refresh.
9. Click Close.
Previewing XML Data

To preview the XML data:
1. Double-click the XML definition in the workspace.

The XML editor appears.
2. Select a view in the XML editor workspace.
3. Click XML Views > Preview Data.
4. Browse for the XML file containing data to preview.
The Preview XML Data dialog box displays data from the XML file using the view that you chose.
5. If you want to use a different XML file, click the Select File icon on the dialog box.
6. Click OK.
Previewing Data 41
Working with Metadata Extensions
You can extend the metadata stored in the repository by associating information with individual repository
objects. For example, you may want to store contact information with the sources you create. If you create an
Aggregator transformation, you may want to store an email address with that transformation. You associate
information with repository objects using metadata extensions.
Repository objects can contain both vendor-defined and user-defined metadata extensions. You can view
and change the values of vendor-defined metadata extensions, but you cannot create, delete, or redefine
them. You can create, edit, delete, and view user-defined metadata extensions and change their values.
You can create metadata extensions for the following objects in the Designer:
• Source definitions
• Target definitions
• Transformations
• Mappings
• Mapplets
You can create either reusable or non-reusable metadata extensions. You associate reusable metadata
extensions with all repository objects of a certain type, such as all source definitions or all Expression
transformations. You associate non-reusable metadata extensions with a single repository object, such as
one target definition or one mapping.
Creating Metadata Extensions

You can create user-defined, reusable, and non-reusable metadata extensions for repository objects using
the Designer. To create a metadata extension, you edit the object for which you want to create the metadata
extension, and then add the metadata extension to the Metadata Extension tab.
If you have multiple reusable metadata extensions to create, it is easier to create them using the Repository
Manager.
To create a metadata extension:
1. Open the appropriate Designer tool.

2. Drag the appropriate object into the workspace.
3. Double-click the title bar of the object to edit it. If the object is a mapping or mapplet, click Mappings >
Metadata Extensions or Mapplets > Metadata Extensions.
4. Click the Metadata Extensions tab.
This tab lists the existing user-defined and vendor-defined metadata extensions. User-defined metadata
extensions appear in the User Defined Metadata Domain. If they exist, vendor-defined metadata
extensions appear in their own domains.
5. Click the Add button.
A new row appears in the User Defined Metadata Extension Domain.

6. Enter the following information:
Field Description
Extension Name Name of the metadata extension. Metadata extension names must be unique for
each type of object in a domain.
Metadata extension names cannot contain special characters except underscores
and cannot begin with numbers.
Datatype Select numeric (integer), string, or boolean.
Precision Maximum length for string metadata extensions.
Value For a numeric metadata extension, the value must be an integer between
-2,147,483,647 and 2,147,483,647.
For a boolean metadata extension, choose true or false.
For a string metadata extension, click the Open button in the Value field to enter a
value of more than one line, up to 2,147,483,647 bytes.
Reusable Makes the metadata extension reusable or non-reusable. Select to apply the
metadata extension to all objects of this type (reusable). Clear to make the metadata
extension apply to this object only (non-reusable).
If you create a reusable metadata extension for a transformation, the metadata
extension applies to all transformations of that type (for example, all Aggregator
transformations or all Router transformations), and not to all transformations.
Note: If you make a metadata extension reusable, you cannot change it back to non-
reusable. The Designer makes the extension reusable as soon as you confirm the
action.
UnOverride Restores the default value of the metadata extension when you click Revert. This
column appears only if the value of one of the metadata extensions was changed.
Description Description of the metadata extension.
7. Click OK.
Editing Metadata Extensions

You can edit user-defined, reusable, and non-reusable metadata extensions for repository objects using the
Designer. To edit a metadata extension, you edit the repository object, and then make changes to the
Metadata Extension tab.
What you can edit depends on whether the metadata extension is reusable or non-reusable. You can
promote a non-reusable metadata extension to reusable, but you cannot change a reusable metadata
extension to non-reusable.
Editing Reusable Metadata Extensions

If the metadata extension you want to edit is reusable and editable, you can change the value of the
metadata extension, but not any of its properties. However, if the vendor or user who created the metadata
extension did not make it editable, you cannot edit the metadata extension or its value.
To edit the value of a reusable metadata extension, click the Metadata Extensions tab and modify the Value
field. To restore the default value for a metadata extension, click Revert in the UnOverride column.
Working with Metadata Extensions 43

Editing Non-Reusable Metadata Extensions
If the metadata extension you want to edit is non-reusable, you can change the value of the metadata
extension and its properties. You can also promote the metadata extension to a reusable metadata
extension.
To edit a non-reusable metadata extension, click the Metadata Extensions tab. You can update the Datatype,
Value, Precision, and Description fields.
To make the metadata extension reusable, select Reusable. If you make a metadata extension reusable, you
cannot change it back to non-reusable. The Designer makes the extension reusable as soon as you confirm
the action.
To restore the default value for a metadata extension, click Revert in the UnOverride column.
Deleting Metadata Extensions

You delete reusable metadata extensions in the Repository Manager.
You can delete non-reusable metadata extensions in the Designer. To delete metadata extensions, edit the
repository object, and then delete the metadata extension from the Metadata Extension tab.
Using Business Names

You can add business names to sources, targets, and columns. Business names are descriptive names that
you give to a source, target, or column. They appear in the Navigator in the Business Components source
node and in the source and target nodes. Business names can also appear as column names of the source
and target definition in the workspace. You can also create source qualifiers to display business names as
column names in the Mapping and Mapplet Designers.
Adding Business Names to Sources or Targets

You can add business names to source and target definitions. When you import source definitions for
PeopleSoft and SAP, the Designer imports business names.
To add a business name to a source or target:
1. In the Source Analyzer or Target Designer, open the source or target definition.
2. In the Edit Tables dialog box, click Rename.
3. Enter the business name in the Business Name field.
4. Click OK.
To display business names in the Navigator, enable the Display Table As Business Name option. The
business name appears in the Navigator with the table name in parentheses.
Displaying Business Names in the Navigator

You can configure the Designer to display business names if they exist for source and target definitions in the
Navigator. When you enable business names to display in the Navigator, the table names appear in
parentheses.
For example, if you create a source definition with the table name EMPLOYEES and business name
Employee Data, the Navigator displays the business name with the table name in parentheses.

If you create a shortcut to a source or target when you enable business names to display in the Navigator,
the Designer names the shortcut Shortcut_To_BusinessName.
Displaying Business Names as Column Names

You can display column business names in source and target definitions. You can configure the Designer to
select business names as column names in the workspace. You can have duplicate column business names
for source and target definitions.
Using Business Names as Port Names in Source Qualifiers

Use business names of source columns as port names in Source Qualifier transformations.
To add business names to existing Source Qualifiers in a mapping, you must enable the option to display
business names. Then delete the existing source and reimport it with the Source Qualifier.
If the source has no business names, the Source Qualifier contains the port names. If the business name
contains characters that are not allowed as a port name, the Designer replaces each of the characters with
an underscore (_). Business names usually contain spaces between words, which is not allowed in a port
name. For example, the business name Employee Data becomes Employee_Data.
Tip: Avoid using PowerCenter reserved words, such as DD_INSERT, for business and port names.
Using Business Documentation

Business documentation provides details about a repository object or transformation expression. You can
create and edit links to business documentation that you have developed for repository objects through the
Designer. The documentation must reside on a local machine, network server, or company intranet or
internet web site in a Windows environment.
You can develop business documentation in HTML, PDF, or any text format, for the following repository
objects:
• Source and target tables and table instances

• All transformations and transformation instances
• Mapplets
• Mappings
• Business component directories
To access business documentation, you need to complete the following tasks:
• Specify the documentation path in the Designer.

• Create a link in the repository object.
• Click the link to view the documentation.
Specifying the Documentation Path

You specify a documentation path or root where you store the documentation files. You reference this path in
the links you add to each repository object.
Using Business Documentation 45

If you store the files on a local machine or network server, use a file path. If you place the files on the
organization’s intranet or internet web site, use a URL.
The following formats are valid documentation paths or roots:
• File path to a local drive, such as c:\doc\informatica\

• File path to a network server, such as \\server5\doc\informatica\
• URL, such as http://www.internal.company.com/doc/
Related Topics:
• “Configuring General Options” on page 20
Creating Links to Documentation Files

You can create links in repository objects to documentation files. Click these links in the Properties or Edit
dialog box of each object to view the business documentation.
The links must be a valid URL or file path to reference a business document. Use either of the following
formats:
• Root variable. Use the string “file://$docroot” to refer to the documentation root you have specified in the
documentation path field.
For example, if a document root is http://internal.company.com/doc, the Designer points to http://
internal.company.com/doc/finance/vendors_help.html, but displays file://$docroot as part of the link.
• Complete file path or link. Precede the file path with ://, such as file://c:\doc\help\ or http://
internal.company.com/doc/help/. A file path must be preceded by file:// to be valid.
To create a link, edit the properties of the object. How you do this depends on the type of object you want to
document.
The following table summarizes how to create a link for repository objects:
Repository Object How to Create Documentation Links
Table/Transformation - Double-click the table/transformation in the workspace to open it.

- Enter the documentation link in the Description window.
Mapping/Mapplet - Open the mapping/mapplet in the workspace.

- Click Mappings > Edit or Mapplets > Edit.
- Enter the documentation link in the comment field.
Business Component Directory - Select the business component directory in the Navigator.
- Click Repository > Business Component > Edit Properties.
- Enter the documentation link in the comment field.
Tip: To add comments to individual business components, edit the properties of the original object it
references.
Viewing Business Documentation

When you click a link to business documentation, Windows launches the corresponding application to view
the file.

Viewing Mapplet and Mapping Reports
You can view PowerCenter Repository Reports for mappings and mapplets in the Designer. View reports to
get more information about the sources, targets, ports, and transformations in mappings and mapplets. When
you view a report, the Designer launches JasperReports Server in a browser window and displays the report.
You can view the following reports:
• Mapplet Composite Report

• Mapping Composite Report
An administrator uses the Administrator tool to create a Reporting and Dashboards Service and adds a
reporting source for the service. The reporting source must be the PowerCenter repository that contains the
mappings and mapplets you want to report on.
Viewing a Mapplet Composite Report

The Mapplet Composite Report includes information about a mapplet:
• All objects. Information about all objects in the mapplet.

• Transformations. Transformations used in the mapplet.
To view a Mapplet Composite Report:
1. In the Designer, open a mapplet.

2. Right-click in the workspace and choose View Mapplet Report.
The Designer launches JasperReports Server in the default browser for the client machine and runs the
Mapplet Composite Report.
Viewing a Mapping Composite Report

View a mapping report to get more information about the objects in a PowerCenter mapping. The Mapping
Composite Report includes information about the following components in the mapplet:
• Source and target fields. Fields used in mapping sources.

• Port connections. Port-level connections between objects.
• Transformation ports. Transformation ports for each transformation in the mapping.
• Object-level connections. Connections between all objects in the mapping.
To view a Mapping Composite Report:
1. In the Designer, open a mapplet.

2. Right-click in the workspace and choose View Mapping Report.
The Designer launches JasperReports Server in the default browser for the client machine and runs the
Mapping Composite Report.
Viewing Mapplet and Mapping Reports 47

CHAPTER 2
Working with Sources

• Working with Sources Overview , 48

• Working with Relational Sources, 51
• Working with COBOL Sources, 56
• Components in a COBOL Source File, 58
• Configuring COBOL Source Definitions, 59
• Importing a Microsoft Excel Source Definition, 63
• Manually Creating a Source Definition, 64
• Troubleshooting Sources, 65
Working with Sources Overview

To extract data from a source, first define sources in the repository. You can import or create the following
types of source definitions in the Source Analyzer:
• Relational tables, views, and synonyms

• Fixed-width and delimited flat files that do not contain binary data.
• COBOL files
• XML files
• Web Services Description Language (WSDL)
• Data models using certain data modeling tools through Metadata Exchange for Data Models (an add-on
product)
You can import sources that use multibyte character sets. Source code pages must be a superset of the
target code pages.
Source definitions can be single- or multi-group. A single-group source has a single group in the source
definition. Relational sources use a single-group source definition. A multi-group source has multiple groups
in the source definition. Non-relational sources such as XML sources use multi-group source definitions.
Note: Because source definitions must match the source, you should import definitions instead of creating
them manually.
48
Oracle Sources
You can import Oracle sources that use basic compression and OLTP compression. You can also manually
create source definitions for Oracle sources that use basic compression and OLTP compression.
Special Character Handling in Source Definitions

You can import, create, or edit source definitions with table and column names containing special characters,
such as the slash (/) character through the Designer. When you use the Source Analyzer to import a source
definition, the Designer retains special characters in table and field names.
However, when you add a source definition with special characters to a mapping, the Designer either retains
or replaces the special character. Also, when you generate the default SQL statement in a Source Qualifier
transformation for a relational source, the Designer uses quotation marks around some special characters.
The Designer handles special characters differently for relational and non-relational sources.
The following table describes how the Designer handles special characters in relational sources:
Special Character Source Analyzer Behavior Mapping Designer Behavior
@#$_ - Retains the character in the source - Retains the character in the source instance
definition table name. table name.
- Retains the character in the source - Retains the character in the source instance
definition column names. column names.
- Retains the character in the Source Qualifier
transformation name.
- Retains the character in the Source Qualifier
transformation port names.
- Does not use quotation marks around the table
or column names in the SQL query.
/+-=~`!%^&*()[] - Retains the character in the source - Replaces the character in the source instance
{}';?,<>\| definition table name. table name with the underscore character.
<space> - Retains the character in the source - Retains the character in the source instance
- Replaces the character in the Source Qualifier
transformation name with the underscore
character.
- Replaces the character in the Source Qualifier
transformation port names with the underscore
character.
- Delimits table and column names including
special characters with quotation marks in the
SQL query.
.":\t\r\n - Designer does not recognize these - Designer does not recognize these characters
characters in relational source in relational source table and column names.
table and column names.
. - Designer recognizes the period in - Designer recognizes the period in ODBC

ODBC sources. source instances.
Note: Although the Designer replaces slash characters with underscore characters for source table names, it
retains slash characters in source definition port names.
Working with Sources Overview 49

The following table describes how the Designer handles special characters in non-relational sources:
Special Character Source Analyzer Behavior Mapping Designer Behavior
@#$_ - Retains the character in the source - Retains the character in the source instance
definition table name. table name.
- Retains the character in the source - Retains the character in the source instance
Note: You cannot use the @ - Retains the character in the Source Qualifier
character as the first character in a transformation name.
table or column name. - Retains the character in the Source Qualifier
transformation port names.
Note: You cannot use the @ character as
the first character in a table or column name.
/ - Retains the character in the source - Replaces the character in the source
definition table name. instance table name with the underscore
- Retains the character in the source character.
definition column names. - Retains the character in the source instance
column names.
- Replaces the character in the Source
Qualifier transformation name with the
underscore character.
- Replaces the character in the Source
Qualifier transformation port names with the
underscore character.
.+-=~`!%^&*()[] - Designer does not recognize these - Designer does not recognize these
{}'" characters in non-relational source characters in non-relational source table and
;:?,<>\|\t\r\n table and column names. column names.
<space>
Some databases require special configuration or commands to allow table and field names containing the
slash character. For more information, see the database documentation.
Updating Source Definitions

When you update a source definition, the Designer propagates the changes to all mappings using that
source. Some changes to source definitions can invalidate mappings.
The following table describes how you can impact mappings when you edit source definitions:
Modification Result
Add a column. Mappings are not invalidated.
Change a column datatype. Mappings may be invalidated. If the column is connected to an input port that
uses a datatype incompatible with the new one, the mapping is invalidated.
Change a column name. Mapping may be invalidated. If you change the column name for a column you
just added, the mapping remains valid. If you change the column name for an
existing column, the mapping is invalidated.
Delete a column. Mappings can be invalidated if the mapping uses values from the deleted column.
50 Chapter 2: Working with Sources

When you add a new column to a source in the Source Analyzer, all mappings using the source definition
remain valid. However, when you add a new column and change some of its properties, the Designer
invalidates mappings using the source definition.
You can change the following properties for a newly added source column without invalidating a mapping:
• Name
• Datatype
• Format
• Usage
• Redefines
• Occurs
• Key type
If the changes invalidate the mapping, you must open and edit the mapping. Then click Repository > Save to
save the changes to the repository. If the invalidated mapping is used in a session, you must validate the
session.
Creating Sessions
When you create a session, you can specify a source location different from the location you use when you
import the source definition. If the source is a file, you can override some of the file properties when you
create a session.
Working with Relational Sources

You can add and maintain relational source definitions in the following ways:
• Import source definitions. Import source definitions into the Source Analyzer.
• Update source definitions. Update source definitions either manually or by reimporting the definition.
To import a relational source definition, you need to configure connectivity between the source database and
the PowerCenter Client.
Relational Source Definitions

You can import relational source definitions from database tables, views, and synonyms. When you import a
source definition, you import the following source metadata:
• Source name
• Database location
• Column names
• Datatypes
• Key constraints
Note: When you import a source definition from a synonym, you might need to manually define the
constraints in the definition.
After importing a relational source definition, you can optionally enter business names for the table and
columns. You can also manually define key relationships, which can be logical relationships created in the
repository that do not exist in the database.
Working with Relational Sources 51

Connectivity for Relational Sources
To import a source definition, you must be able to connect to the source database from the client machine
using a properly configured ODBC data source or gateway. You may also require read permission on the
database object.
When you create an ODBC data source, you must also specify the driver that the ODBC driver manager
sends database calls to. The following table shows the recommended ODBC drivers to use with each
database:
Database ODBC Driver Requires Database

Client Software
IBM DB2 IBM ODBC driver Yes
Informix DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver No
Microsoft Access Microsoft Access driver Yes
Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel driver Yes
Microsoft SQL Server Microsoft SQL Server ODBC driver No
Oracle DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver No
Sybase ASE DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver No
SAP HANA SAP HANA ODBC driver Yes
Teradata Teradata ODBC driver n/a
When you use a third-party ODBC data source to import a source definition, the Designer displays a
message indicating that the third-party driver is not listed in powermart.ini. The Designer attempts to import
source definition metadata using a driver that is shipped with PowerCenter. If the third-party provides a driver
to import metadata, configure powrmart.ini.
Configuring a Third-Party ODBC Data Source

To import a source definition with a ODBC driver that is not included in the powrmart.ini, configure the
powrmart.ini.
To configure powrmart.ini for a third-party ODBC data source:
1. Copy the driver to the following directory:

<PowerCenter Installation Directory>\client\bin
2. Locate and open powrmart.ini in the following directory:
3. Add an entry into the file under the ODBCDLL section that includes the name of the ODBC data source
and the driver.
For example, if Vendor A provided a driver named vendoraodbc.dll, enter the following under the
ODBCDLL heading:
Vendor A=vendoraodbc.dll
4. Save and close powrmart.ini.

5. Restart the PowerCenter Client and import the source definition.
Importing Relational Source Definitions

To create a relational source definition, use the Source Analyzer to import source metadata.
To import a relational source definition:
1. In the Source Analyzer, click Sources > Import from Database.

2. Select the ODBC data source used to connect to the source database.
If you need to create or modify an ODBC data source, click the Browse to open the ODBC
Administrator. Create the data source, and click OK. Select the new ODBC data source.
3. Enter a database user name and password to connect to the database.
Note: You must have the appropriate database permissions to view the object.
You may need to specify the owner name for database objects you want to use as sources.
4. Optionally, use the search field to limit the number of tables that appear.
Note: To enable case-sensitive search for a table, enclose the search string in double quotes.
5. Click Connect.
If no table names appear, or if the table you want to import does not appear, click All.
6. Scroll down through the list of sources to find the source you want to import. Select the relational object
or objects you want to import.
You can hold down the Shift key to select a block of sources within one folder or hold down the Ctrl key
to make non-consecutive selections within a folder. You can also select all tables within a folder by
selecting the folder and clicking Select All. Use the Select None button to clear all highlighted
selections.
7. Click OK.
The source definition appears in the Source Analyzer. In the Navigator, the new source definition
appears in the Sources node of the active repository folder, under the source database name.
Updating a Relational Source Definition

You can update a source definition to add business names or to reflect new column names, datatypes, or
other changes. You can update a source definition in the following ways:
• Edit the definition. Manually edit the source definition if you need to configure properties that you cannot
import or if you want to make minor changes to the source definition.
• Reimport the definition. If the source changes are significant, you may need to reimport the source
definition. This overwrites or renames the existing source definition. You can retain existing primary key-
foreign key relationships and descriptions in the source definition being replaced.
When you update a source definition, the Designer propagates the changes to all mappings using that
source. Some changes to source definitions can invalidate mappings.
If the changes invalidate the mapping, you must open and edit the mapping. Then click Repository > Save to
save the changes to the repository. If the invalidated mapping is used in a session, you must validate the
session.

Editing Relational Source Definitions
You might want to manually edit a source definition to record properties that you cannot import from the
source. You can edit a relational source definition to create key columns and key relationships. These
relationships can be logical relationships. They do not have to exist in the database.
You can add descriptions or specify links to business documentation for source definitions at any time.
Adding descriptions or business documentation links to source definitions is an easy way to document the
purpose of a source definition. You can add or modify descriptions to any existing source definition.
To edit a relational source definition:
1. In the Source Analyzer, double-click the title bar of the source definition.
2. Edit the following settings:
Table Settings Description
Select Table Displays the source definition you are editing. To choose a different open source
definition to edit, select it from the list.
Rename button Opens a dialog box to edit the name of the source definition and enter a business
name.
Owner Name Table owner in the database.
Description Optional description of source table. Character limit is 2,000 bytes/K, where K is the
maximum number of bytes for each character in the repository code page. Enter
links to business documentation.
Database Type Indicates the source or database type. If necessary, select a new database type.
3. Click the Columns Tab.

Column Settings Description
Column Name The column names in the source. When editing a relational source definition, edit
the column name only if the actual source column name changed.
Datatype The datatypes that display in the source definition depend on the source type of the
source definition.

Column Settings Description
Precision and Scale Precision is the maximum number of significant digits for numeric datatypes, or the
maximum number of characters for string datatypes. Precision includes scale. Scale
is the maximum number of digits after the decimal point for numeric values.
Therefore, the value 11.47 has a precision of 4 and a scale of 2. The string
Informatica has a precision (or length) of 11.
All datatypes for relational sources have a maximum precision. For example, the
Integer datatype has a maximum precision of 10 digits. Some numeric datatypes
have a similar limit on the scale or do not allow you to set the scale beyond 0.
Integers, for example, have a scale of 0, since by definition they never include
decimal values.
You can change the precision and scale for some datatypes to values that differ
from the values defined in the database. However, changing the precision or scale
can cause numeric overflow on numeric columns, truncation on character columns,
or insertion of zeroes on datetime columns when the Integration Service reads from
the source column.
Not Null Choose whether you want to allow null data in the source.
Key Type Select Primary, Foreign, Primary-Foreign, or Not a Key. Applies to relational
sources only.
Business Name Optionally, you can add business names to each source column.
5. Click OK.
Reimporting a Source Definition

Complete the following steps to reimport a source definition. You can retain the following information in the
source definition being replaced:
• Primary key-foreign key relationships

• Source definition description
• Column or port description
To reimport a relational source definition:
1. In the Designer, connect to the repository containing the source definition you want to update.
2. Open the Source Analyzer and import the source definition again.
3. The Designer prompts you to rename or replace the existing source tables.
4. To view the differences between the table you are importing and the existing table, click Compare.
A dialog box displays the attributes in each source side-by-side.
5. Specify whether you want to retain primary key-foreign key information or source descriptions in the
existing source definition.

The following table describes the options in the Table Exists dialog box:
Option Description
Apply to all Tables Apply rename, replace, or skip all tables in the folder.
Retain User-Defined Pk-Fk Relationships Keep the primary key-foreign key relationships in the source
definition being replaced.
Retain User-Defined Descriptions Retain the source description and column and port
descriptions of the source definition being replaced.
6. Click Replace, Rename, or Skip:
Option Description
Replace Replace the source definition with a new one.
Rename Enter a unique name for the new source definition.
Skip Do not import the new source definition.
7. If you click Rename, enter the name of the source definition and click OK.
Working with COBOL Sources

To provide support for mainframe source data, you can import a COBOL file as a source definition in the
Designer. COBOL files are fixed-width files that may contain text and binary data. PowerCenter supports the
following code pages for COBOL files:
• 7-bit ASCII
• EBCDIC-US
• 8-bit ASCII
• 8-bit EBCDIC
• ASCII-based MBCS
• EBCDIC-based MBCS
You can import shift-sensitive COBOL files that do not contain shift keys. Define the shift states for each
column in the COBOL source definition.
COBOL sources often denormalize data and compact the equivalent of separate table records into a single
record. You use the Normalizer transformation to normalize these records in the mapping.
After you import a COBOL source definition, review and configure the COBOL file to create record groups.
COBOL files often represent the functional equivalent of multiple source tables within the same set of
records. When you review the structure of the COBOL file, you can adjust the description to identify which
groups of fields constitute a single pseudo-table.

Importing COBOL Sources
The Designer uses the data structures stored in the Data Division of a COBOL program to create a source
definition. When you import a COBOL file, the Designer looks for a specific COBOL file format, which is
different than the standard ANSI format.
The Designer looks for a COBOL file format similar to the following example:
identification division.
program-id. mead.
environment division.
select file-one assign to "fname".
data division.
file section.
fd FILE-ONE.
01 SCHOOL-REC.
02 SCHOOL-ID PIC 9(15).
02 SCHOOL-NM PIC X(25).
02 CLASS-REC OCCURS 2 TIMES.
03 CLASS-ID PIC 9(5).
03 CLASS-NM PIC X(25).
03 STUDENT-REC OCCURS 5 TIMES.
04 STUDENT-ID PIC 9(15).
04 STUDENT-NM PIC X(25).
04 PARENT-REC OCCURS 2 TIMES.
05 PARENT-ID PIC 9(15).
05 PARENT-NM PIC X(25).
03 TEACHER-REC OCCURS 3 TIMES.
04 TEACHER-ID PIC 9(15).
04 TEACHER-NM PIC X(25).
02 SPORT-REC OCCURS 2 TIMES.
03 SPORT-TEAM PIC X(30).
working-storage section.
procedure division.
stop run.
Working with COBOL Copybooks

The Designer cannot recognize a COBOL copybook (.cpy file) as a COBOL file (.cbl file) because it lacks the
proper format. To import a COBOL copybook in the Designer, you can insert it into a COBOL file template by
using the COBOL statement “copy.” After you insert the copybook file into the COBOL file template, you can
save the file as a .cbl file and import it in the Designer.
If the .cbl file and the .cpy file are not in the same local directory, the Designer prompts for the location of
the .cpy file.
When the COBOL copybook file contains tabs, the Designer expands tabs into spaces. By default, the
Designer expands a tab character into eight spaces. You can change this default setting in powrmart.ini. You
can find powrmart.ini in the root directory of the PowerCenter Client installation.
To change the default setting, add the following text to powrmart.ini:

[AnalyzerOptions]
TabSize=n
where n is the number of spaces the Designer reads for every tab character. To apply changes, restart the
Designer.
For example, the COBOL copybook file is called sample.cpy. The COBOL file below shows how to use the
copy statement to insert the sample copybook into a COBOL file template:
identification division.
program-id. mead.
environment division.
select file-one assign to "fname".
data division.
Working with COBOL Sources 57

file section.
fd FILE-ONE.
copy “sample.cpy”.
working-storage section.
procedure division.
stop run.
Steps to Import a COBOL Source Structure

To import a COBOL source structure, complete the following steps:
1. Open the Source Analyzer, and click Sources > Import from COBOL file.
2. Select the COBOL file you want to analyze.
3. Select the code page of the COBOL file.
This is the code page of the COBOL file (.cbl), not the data file. The code page must be compatible with
the PowerCenter Client code page.
When you select this code page, the data file uses this code page by default. After you import the
COBOL file, you can configure the code page of the source data when you adjust the source definition or
when you run the workflow.
The Designer lists the five code pages you have most recently selected. Then it lists all remaining code
pages in alphabetical order.
4. Click OK.
The COBOL source definition appears in the Designer. More than one definition may appear if the COBOL
file has more than one FD entry.
Components in a COBOL Source File

When you import a COBOL source, the Designer scans the file for the following components:
• FD Section
• Fields
• OCCURS
• REDEFINES
FD Section
The Designer assumes that each FD entry defines the equivalent of a source table in a relational source and
creates a different COBOL source definition for each such entry. For example, if the COBOL file has two FD
entries, CUSTOMERS and ORDERS, the Designer creates one COBOL source definition containing the
fields attributed to CUSTOMERS, and another with the fields that belong to ORDERS.
Fields
The Designer identifies each field definition, reads the datatype, and assigns it to the appropriate source
definition.

OCCURS
COBOL files often contain multiple instances of the same type of data within the same record. For example, a
COBOL file may include data about four different financial quarters, each stored in the same record. When
the Designer analyzes the file, it creates a different column for each OCCURS statement in the COBOL file.
These OCCURS statements define repeated information in the same record. Use the Normalizer
transformation to normalize this information.
For each OCCURS statement, the Designer creates the following items:
• One target table when you drag the COBOL source definition into the Target Designer.
• A primary-foreign key relationship
• A generated column ID (GCID)
REDEFINES
COBOL uses REDEFINES statements to build the description of one record based on the definition of
another record. When you import the COBOL source, the Designer creates a single source that includes
REDEFINES.
The REDEFINES statement lets you specify multiple PICTURE clauses for the sample physical data location.
Therefore, you need to use Filter transformations to separate the data into the tables created by
REDEFINES.
For each REDEFINES:
• The Designer creates one target table when you drag the COBOL source definition into the Target
Designer.
• The Designer creates one primary-foreign key relationship.
• The Designer creates a generated key (GK).
• You need a separate Filter transformation in the mapping.
Configuring COBOL Source Definitions

After you import a COBOL source definition, you may need to configure some of the source properties. The
COBOL source definition is similar to a fixed-width flat file definition. However, a COBOL file has some
unique properties to consider when you configure the definition:
• OCCURS
• Field definition
• Word or byte storage
• Field attributes
Review the following tabs and dialog boxes when you configure a COBOL source definition:
• Table tab. Review storage.

• Advanced properties. Review properties for fixed-width data files.
• Columns tab. Review OCCURS, FD section, and field attributes.
Configuring COBOL Source Definitions 59

Configuring the Table Tab
Configure the Table tab of a COBOL source definition similar to the way you configure a flat file definition.
However, with a COBOL definition, you also need to consider storage type.
The Integration Service supports COMP-1 word storage in network byte order and with the floating point in
the IEEE 754 4 byte format. Also, the Integration Service supports COMP-2 word storage in network byte
order and with the floating point in the IEEE 754 8 byte format.
You may need to switch to byte storage for IBM VS COBOL and MicroFocus COBOL-related data files by
selecting the IBM COMP option in the source definition. The Integration Service provides COMP word
storage by default. COMP columns are 2, 4, and 8 bytes on IBM mainframes. COMP columns can be 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 bytes elsewhere, when derived through MicroFocus COBOL. Clear the IBM COMP option to
use byte storage.
The following table describes the COBOL file properties that you can set on the Table tab:
Table Option Description
Rename button Use the Rename button to rename the source definition and enter a business name for the
source definition.
Owner Name Not applicable for COBOL files.
Description Additional comments about the source definition.
Database Type Source location or type. This must be set to VSAM.
IBM COMP Indicates the storage type. If selected, the Integration Service uses word storage. Otherwise,
it uses byte storage.
Flat File Type Select Fixed-width.
Advanced button Use the Advanced button to open a dialog box with fixed-width options.
Configuring Advanced Properties

Click Advanced on the Table tab to configure properties for fixed-width files.
When you import a COBOL file, you choose the code page of the COBOL file so the Designer can read the
file correctly. After you import the COBOL file, you can change the code page to that of the source data so
the Integration Service can read the data when you run a workflow. You can select the code page of the data
file in Advanced Properties.
Related Topics:
• “Updating Fixed-Width File Properties” on page 74
Configuring the Columns Tab

When you review the Columns tab of a COBOL source definition, you see several levels of columns in
addition to multiple attributes for those columns. You might want to review and configure the following
properties:

OCCURS
When you review the contents of the Columns tab in a COBOL source, you see several levels of columns.
These levels represent the separate record sets contained within a single COBOL source.
For example, the following COBOL source contains a nested record set, HST_MTH. Each record set begins
with a level 5 heading, indicating the beginning of the record. The columns within each record set must all be
at the same level beneath the record heading. For example, the record set HST_MTH contains several
columns, starting with HST_ACCR_REM. An OCCURS setting of 24 indicates that, when you review the data
in this COBOL source, each record contains 24 nested records for HST_MTH.
The following figure shows a sample COBOL source definition with an OCCURS setting of 4:
All of the columns in HST_MTH are at the same level, 7, in this COBOL source. The heading for the record
HST_MTH is at level 5, two levels above the columns in that source.
FD Section
You may need to configure the source definition to group fields. Although the Designer creates a separate
source definition for each FD entry in the COBOL file, each entry may represent the functional equivalent of
multiple tables of data. When you configure the source definition, you create different levels of fields within
the source to group data into separate pseudo-tables.
Field Attributes
When you review a COBOL source, you see several attributes for each field, the COBOL equivalent of a
column, that represent how you can configure a field in a COBOL file.
Among these attributes, the picture clause is the most fundamental, since it shows how the COBOL file
represents data. COBOL uses its own set of conventions for configuring how data is formatted within the
column. For example, the picture X(32) indicates that text data in the field is 32 bytes long. The picture
clause 9(7) indicates that the field contains numeric data of no more than 7 digits in length. The picture N(8),
an Nstring datatype containing double-byte characters, indicates that the text data in the field is 16 bytes
long.
You may need to adjust the definition of a field in the Source Analyzer, modifying the picture in the process.
Since the Integration Service uses the source definition as a map for finding data in the source file, you need
to be cautious when you make such adjustments.
The following table describes the attributes you can set in the Columns tab of a COBOL source definition:
Attribute Description
Physical offsets (POffs) Offset of the field in the file. The Designer calculates this read-only setting using the
physical length, picture, usage, and REDEFINES settings for the field.
Physical length (PLen) Number of bytes in this field.
Configuring COBOL Source Definitions 61

Attribute Description
Column name Name of the field.
Level An indicator used to identify all fields that provide data for the same record. If you
want to group fields, you set all its columns to the same level. Using this feature, it is
possible to create multiple record types, which are the equivalent of separate tables of
data from the same COBOL source.
Occurs A COBOL statement indicating that multiple instances of this field appear in the same
record.
Datatype Field datatype: String, Nstring, or Numeric.
Precision (Prec) Precision of numeric values in the field.
Scale Scale of numeric values in the field.
Picture How the file represents data.
Usage Storage format for data in the field. Different COBOL conventions exist, such as
COMP-1 and COMP-X. All available conventions appear in the list of usages for each
field.
Key Type Type of key constraint to apply to this field. When you configure a field as a primary
key, the Integration Service generates unique numeric IDs for this field when running
a workflow using the COBOL file as a source.
Signed (S) Indicates whether numeric values in the field are signed.
Trailing sign (T) If selected, indicates that the sign (+ or -) exists in the last digit of the field. If not
selected, the sign appears as the first character in the field.
Included sign (I) Indicates whether the sign is included in any value appearing in the field.
Real decimal point (R) For numeric values, specifies whether the decimal point is a period (.) or a V
character.
Redefines Indicates that the field uses a REDEFINES statement in COBOL to base its own field
definition on that of another field.
Shift key You can define the shift state for shift-sensitive COBOL files that do not contain shift
keys.
This attribute appears when you select User Defined Shift State in the Edit Flat File
Information dialog box for fixed-width files.
Choose Shift-In if the column contains single-byte characters. Choose Shift-Out if the
column contains multibyte characters.
Business Name Additional comments about the field.

Related Topics:
• “Working with Shift-Sensitive Flat Files” on page 86
Importing a Microsoft Excel Source Definition

PowerCenter treats a Microsoft Excel source as a relational database, not a flat file. Like relational sources,
the Designer uses ODBC to import a Microsoft Excel source. You do not need database permissions to
import Microsoft Excel sources.
Complete the following tasks before you import an Excel source definition:
1. Install the Microsoft Excel ODBC driver on the system.

2. Create a Microsoft Excel ODBC data source for each source file in the ODBC Data Source
Administrator.
3. Prepare Microsoft Excel spreadsheets by defining ranges and formatting columns of numeric data.
Defining Ranges
The Designer creates source definitions based on ranges you define in Microsoft Excel. You can define one
or more ranges in a Microsoft Excel sheet. If you have multiple sheets, define at least one range for each
sheet. When you import sources in the Designer, each range displays as a relational source.
You must define a range in the Designer to import the Excel source definition.
To define a range:
1. Open the Microsoft Excel file.

2. Highlight the column or group of columns of data to import.
3. Click Insert > Name > Define.
4. Enter a name for the selected range and click OK.
5. If you have multiple sheets, select each sheet and repeat steps 2 to 4 to define ranges for each set of
data.
6. Click File > Save.
Formatting Columns of Numeric Data

In Microsoft Excel, you can assign datatypes to columns of data. The Microsoft Excel datatypes are ODBC
datatypes. PowerCenter supports ODBC datatypes and converts them to transformation datatypes. If you do
not assign datatypes in Microsoft Excel, the Designer imports each column as VARCHAR. If you want to
perform numeric or aggregate calculations in a mapping, assign numeric datatypes in Microsoft Excel before
importing the spreadsheet.
To format columns in Microsoft Excel:
1. Open the Microsoft Excel file.

2. Select the columns of data that consist of numeric data.
3. Click Format > Cells.
4. In the Number tab, select Number.
5. Specify the number of decimal places.
Importing a Microsoft Excel Source Definition 63

6. Click OK.
7. Click File > Save.
Steps to Import a Microsoft Excel Source Definition

After you define ranges and format cells, you can import the ranges in the Designer. Ranges display as
source definitions when you import the source.
To import a Microsoft Excel source definition:
1. In the Designer, connect to the repository and open the folder for the source definition.
2. Open the Source Analyzer and click Sources > Import from Database.
3. Select Excel Files (Microsoft Excel Driver (*.xls)) for the data source.
4. Click the Browse button to open the ODBC Administrator.
5. In the User or System DSN tabs, depending on where you created the data source, double-click the
Microsoft Excel driver.
6. Click Select Workbook and browse for the Microsoft Excel file, which is considered a relational database.
7. Click OK three times to return to the Import Tables dialog box.
8. Click Connect in the Import Tables dialog box.
You do not need to enter a database user name and password. The ranges you defined in the Microsoft
Excel file appear as table names. The database owner is No Owner because you are not required to
enter a database user name.
9. Select the table you want to import.
To select more than one table, hold down the Ctrl or Shift keys to highlight multiple tables.
10. Click OK.
In the Navigator, the source definition appears in the Sources node, under the database name.
Manually Creating a Source Definition

You can manually create a source definition.
To create a source definition:
1. In the Source Analyzer, click Sources > Create.

2. Enter the name for the source, the database name, and database type.
3. Click Create.
An empty table structure appears in the workspace. (It may be covered by the dialog box.) The new
source table also appears within the Navigator window.
4. Click Done when you are finished creating source definitions.
5. Configure the source definition.
The source definition is saved to the repository. You can now use the source definition in a mapping. You can
also create a source table based on this definition in the source database.

Troubleshooting Sources
I imported a source from a DB2 database and received an SQL0954C error message from the DB2
operating system.
If the value of the DB2 system variable APPLHEAPSZ is too small when you use the Designer to import
sources from a DB2 database, the Designer reports an error accessing the repository. The Designer status
bar displays the following message:
SQL Error:[IBM][CLI Driver][DB2]SQL0954C: Not enough storage is available in the
application heap to process the statement.
If you receive this error, increase the value of the APPLHEAPSZ variable for the DB2 operating system.
APPLHEAPSZ is the application heap size in 4KB pages for each process using the database.
Troubleshooting Sources 65
CHAPTER 3
Working with Flat Files

• Working with Flat Files Overview, 66

• Importing Flat Files, 66
• Editing Flat File Definitions, 72
• Formatting Flat File Columns, 80
• Working with File Lists, 86
• Working with Shift-Sensitive Flat Files, 86
• Working with Multibyte Data in Fixed-Width Targets, 88
• Troubleshooting Flat Files, 88
Working with Flat Files Overview

To use flat files as sources, targets, and lookups in a mapping, you must import or create the definitions in
the repository. You can import or create flat file source definitions in the Source Analyzer. You can import or
create flat file target definitions in the Target Designer. You can import flat file lookups or use existing file
definitions in a Lookup transformation.
Note: Because source definitions must match the source, you should import file source definitions instead of
creating them manually.
Creating Sessions with Flat File Sources and Targets

When you create sessions using file sources and targets, you can override some properties you define in the
Designer. When you create a session with a file source, you can specify a source file location different from
the location you use when you import the file source definition.
Importing Flat Files

You can import fixed-width and delimited flat file definitions that do not contain binary data. When importing
the definition, the file must be in a directory local to the client machine. In addition, the PowerCenter
Integration Service must be able to access all source files during the session.
66
When you create a file source, target, or lookup definition, you must define the properties of the file. The Flat
File Wizard prompts you for the following file properties:
• File name and location

• File code page
• File type
• Column names and datatypes
• Number of header rows in the file
• Column size and null characters for fixed-width files
• Delimiter types, quote character, and escape character for delimited files
Special Character Handling

When you import a flat file in the Designer, the Flat File Wizard uses the file name as the name of the flat file
definition by default. You can import a flat file with any valid file name through the Flat File Wizard. However,
the Designer does not recognize some special characters in flat file source and target names.
When you import a flat file, the Flat File Wizard changes invalid characters and spaces into underscores ( _ ).
For example, you have the source file “sample prices+items.dat”. When you import this flat file in the
Designer, the Flat File Wizard names the file definition sample_prices_items by default.
Related Topics:
• “Special Character Handling in Source Definitions” on page 49
• “Special Character Handling in Target Definitions” on page 90
Selecting Code Pages

When you import a flat file in the Designer, you can select the code page of the file. The Designer lists the
five code pages you have most recently selected. Then it lists all remaining code pages in alphabetical order.
The code page represents the code page of the data contained in the file. When you configure the file
definition, specify delimiters, null characters, and escape characters that are supported by the code page.
For delimited files, specify delimiters, optional quotes, and escape characters that are contained in the
source file code page. For fixed-width files, specify null characters as either a binary value from 0 to 255 or a
character from the selected code page.
When you configure the flat file definition, use delimiters, escape characters, and null characters that are
valid in the code page necessary to run a workflow.
• ASCII data movement mode. Use characters from the code page you define for the flat file. Any 8-bit
characters you specified in previous versions of PowerCenter are still valid.
• Unicode data movement mode. Use characters from the code page you define for the flat file.
Changing Display Fonts

You can use the Flat File Wizard to preview the data contained in a flat file. By default, the Flat File Wizard
displays fonts based on the system locale. For example, the PowerCenter Client is installed on a Windows
machine that uses the default Latin-1 system locale. By default, the font in the Flat File Wizard is set to
Courier. The preview window displays Latin-1 characters in the Courier font.
Importing Flat Files 67

To display a font that is not compatible with the Latin-1 locale, you must change the font for the Flat File
Wizard. For example, if you want to see Japanese fonts in the preview window of the Flat File Wizard on the
Latin-1 machine, you must change the font to a Japanese font, such as MS Gothic.
You can configure the font for the Flat File Wizard in the Designer.
If you configure the font and still encounter problems displaying text in the preview window, complete the
following tasks:
1. Reset the formats for the Designer.

2. Ensure that the language of the data is installed on the machine. If necessary, install the language.
Resetting Designer Formats

You can reset Designer formats to default settings.
To change the Designer formats back to the default settings:
1. In the Designer, click Tools > Options > Format.

2. Click Reset All to reset to default.
Installing a Language
To install a language on a Windows machine:
u Click Control Panel > Regional Options.
Importing Fixed-Width Flat Files

Fixed-width flat files are byte-oriented, which means that the field lengths are measured in bytes. They can
also be line sequential, which means each row ends with a newline character. You can import a fixed-width
file that does not contain binary data or multibyte character data greater than two bytes per character.
When you import a fixed-width file, you can create, move, or delete column breaks using the Flat File Wizard.
Incorrect positioning of column breaks can create misalignment errors when you run a session with a file
source containing single-byte and multibyte characters. Misalignment of multibyte data in a file causes errors
in a workflow.
To import a fixed-width flat file definition:
1. To import a source definition, open the Source Analyzer and click Sources > Import from File. To
import a target definition, open the Target Designer and click Targets > Import from File.
The Open Flat File dialog box appears.
2. Select the file you want to use.
3. Select a code page.
When you import a flat file source definition, select a code page that matches the code page of the data
in the file.
4. Click OK.
The contents of the file appear in the window at the bottom of the Flat File Wizard.
68 Chapter 3: Working with Flat Files

Fixed-Width Flat File Description

Wizard, Step 1 of 3
Flat File Type File type. Select Fixed Width for a fixed-width file.
Enter a Name for This Name of the source. This is the name of the source in the repository. You can
Source use the file name or any other logical name.
Start Import At Row Indicates the row number at which the Flat File Wizard starts reading when it
imports the file.
For example, if you specify to start at row 2, the Flat File Wizard skips 1 row
before reading.
Import Field Names From If selected, the Designer uses data in the first row for column names. Select
First Line this option if column names appear in the first row. Invalid field names are
preceded by “FIELD_.”
6. Click Next.
Follow the directions in the wizard to manipulate the column breaks in the file preview window. Move
existing column breaks by dragging them. Double-click a column break to delete it.
For shift-sensitive files, the Flat File Wizard displays single-byte shift characters as ‘.’ in the window.
Double-byte shift characters appear as ‘..’ in the window so you can configure the column breaks
accurately.
7. Click Next.
Enter column information for each column in the file.
To switch between columns, select a new column in the Source Definition or Target Definition group,
or click the column heading in the file preview window.
Fixed-Width Flat File Description

Wizard, Step 3 of 3
Name Port name that you want to appear for each column. If you select Import Field
Names from First Line, the wizard reads the column names provided in the
file.
Datatype Column datatype. Select Text, Numeric, or Datetime, and then enter the
appropriate Length/Precision, Scale, and Width.
For numeric columns, Precision is the number of significant digits, and Width
is the number of bytes to read from source files or to write to target files.
For text columns, Precision is measured in bytes for fixed-width files and in
characters for delimited files.
By default, the Flat File Wizard enters the same value for both Precision and
Width. You can change the value of the precision to enter the number of
significant digits, but the width must be greater than or equal to the precision.
Note: Only characters 0 to 9 are considered numeric. Columns that contain
multibyte character set numbers, such as Japanese, are considered text.

8. Click Finish.
Note: If the file size exceeds 256 KB or contains more than 16 KB of data for each row, verify that the
Flat File Wizard imports the file with the correct field precision and width. If not, adjust the field precision
and width in the Flat File Wizard or in the imported definition.
Importing Delimited Flat Files

Delimited flat files are always character-oriented and line sequential. The column precision is always
measured in characters for string columns and in significant digits for numeric columns. Each row ends with a
newline character. You can import a delimited file that does not contain binary data or multibyte character
data greater than two bytes per character.
Complete the following steps to import a delimited file for either a source or target definition:
1. To import a source definition, open the Source Analyzer, and click Sources > Import from File. To
import a target definition, open the Target Designer and click Targets > Import from File.
The Open Flat File dialog box appears.
2. Select the file you want to use.
3. Select a code page.
When you import a flat file source definition, select a code page that matches the code page of the data
in the file.
4. Click OK.
The contents of the file appear in the preview window at the bottom of the Flat File Wizard.
Delimited Flat File Description

Wizard, Step 1 of 3
Flat File Type File type. Select Delimited for a delimited file.
Enter a Name for This Name of the source. This is the name of the source definition in the repository.
Source You can use the file name or any other logical name.
Start Import At Row Indicates the row number at which the Flat File Wizard starts reading when
Flat File Wizard imports the file. For example, if you specify to start at row 2,
the Flat File Wizard skips 1 row before reading.
Import Field Names From If selected, the Designer uses data in the first row for column names. Select
First Line this option if column names appear in the first row. Invalid field names are
preceded by “FIELD_”.
6. Click Next.
Any incorrectly parsed fields display in red text in the file preview window at the bottom of this screen.

7. Enter the following settings:
Delimited Flat File Description

Wizard, Step 2 of 3
Delimiters Character used to separate columns of data. Use the Other field to enter a
different delimiter. Delimiters must be printable characters and must be
different from the escape character and the quote character if selected. You
cannot select unprintable multibyte characters as delimiters.
Treat Consecutive If selected, the Flat File Wizard reads one or more consecutive column
Delimiters as One delimiters as one. Otherwise, the Flat File Wizard reads two consecutive
delimiters as a null value.
Treat Multiple Delimiters If selected, the Flat File Wizard reads a specified set of delimiters as one.
as AND
Escape Character Character immediately preceding a column delimiter character embedded in

an unquoted string, or immediately preceding the quote character in a quoted
string. When you specify an escape character, the Integration Service reads
the delimiter character as a regular character. This is called escaping the
delimiter or quote character.
Remove Escape This option is selected by default. Clear this option to include the escape
Character From Data character in the output string.
Use Default Text Length If selected, the Flat File Wizard uses the entered default text length for all
string datatypes.
Text Qualifier Quote character that defines the boundaries of text strings. Choose No Quote,
Single Quote, or Double Quotes. If you select a quote character, the Flat File
Wizard ignores delimiters within pairs of quotes.
8. Click Next.
9. Enter column information for each column in the file.

To switch between columns, select a new column in the Source Definition pane or Target Definition
pane, or click the column heading in the file preview.
Delimited Flat Description

File Wizard,
Step 3 of 3
Name Port name that you want to appear for each column. If you select Import Field Names
from First Line, the wizard reads the column names provided in the file instead.
Datatype Column datatype. Select Text, Numeric, or Datetime, and then enter the appropriate
Length/Precision, Scale, and Width.
For numeric columns, Precision is the number of significant digits. The Flat File Wizard
ignores the width for numeric columns in delimited files.
For Text columns, Precision is the maximum number of characters contained in the
source field or the target field. The Flat File Wizard ignores the precision when reading
text columns in or writing text columns to delimited files.
By default, the Flat File Wizard enters the same value for both Precision and Width.
You can change the value of the precision or width, but the Flat File Wizard only lets
you define the precision to be greater than or equal to the width.
Note: Only characters 0 to 9 are considered numeric. Columns that contain multibyte
character set numbers, such as Japanese, are considered text.
10. Click Finish.

Note: If the file size exceeds 256 KB or contains more than 16 KB of data for each line, verify that the
Flat File Wizard imports the file with the correct field precision. If not, adjust the field precision in the Flat
File Wizard or in the imported definition.
Related Topics:
• “Rules and Guidelines for Delimited File Settings” on page 79
• “Formatting Flat File Columns” on page 80
Editing Flat File Definitions

After you import a flat file source or target definition, you may need to add business names and configure file
properties. Additionally, if the file definition changes, you might want to manually edit the definition.
You can edit source or target flat file definitions using the following definition tabs:
• Table tab. Edit properties such as table name, business name, and flat file properties.
• Columns tab. Edit column information such as column names, datatypes, precision, and formats.
• Properties tab. View the default numeric and datetime format properties in the Source Analyzer and the
Target Designer. You can edit these properties for each source and target instance in a mapping in the
Mapping Designer.
• Metadata Extensions tab. Extend the metadata stored in the repository by associating information with
repository objects, such as flat file definitions.
Note: If the file structure for a source definition changes significantly, you may need to reimport the file
source definition.

When you update a source or target definition, the Designer propagates the changes to any mapping using
that source or target. Some changes to source and target definitions can invalidate mappings. If the changes
invalidate the mapping, you must validate the mapping. You can validate mappings from the Query Results or
View Dependencies window or from the Repository Navigator. You can also validate multiple objects without
opening them in the workspace. If you cannot validate the mapping from these locations, you must open and
edit the mapping.
When you create sessions using file source, target, or lookups, you can override some properties you define
in the Designer. For example, when you create a session with a file source, you can specify a source file
location different from the location you use when you import the file source definition.
Editing Table Options

You can edit the following options on the Table tab of a flat file source or target definition:
• Business name. Add a more descriptive name to the source or target definition.
• Description. Add a comment or link to business documentation. These display in Repository Manager for
the source or target definition. Adding comments or business documentation links to a source or target is
an easy way to document its purpose. You can add or modify comments to any existing source or target.
You can enter up to (2,000 bytes)/K characters in the description, where K is the maximum number of
bytes a character contains in the selected repository code page. For example, if the repository code page
is a Japanese code page where K=2, each description and comment field can contain up to 1,000
characters.
• Keywords. Track flat file targets with key words. As development and maintenance work continues, the
number of targets increases. While all of these targets may appear in the same folder, they may all serve
different purposes. Keywords can help you find related targets. Keywords can include developer names,
mappings, or the associated schema.
Use keywords to perform searches in the Repository Manager.
• Database type. Define the source or target type. Choose Flat File for flat file sources and targets.
• Flat file information. When the database type is flat file, define the flat file properties by clicking the
Advanced button.
To add options to a flat file source or target definition:
1. To add options to a source definition, in the Source Analyzer, double-click the title bar of the source
definition. To add options to a target definition, in the Target Designer, double-click the title bar of the
target definition.
The Edit Tables dialog box appears.
2. Click the Rename button to edit the source or target name and the business name.
3. Choose Flat File in the Database Type field.
4. Click the Advanced button to edit the flat file properties.
A different dialog box appears for fixed-width and delimited files.
5. To add a description, type a description in the Description field.
6. To add keywords for target definitions, click Edit Keywords.
The Edit Keywords dialog box appears. Use the buttons to create and move keywords.
Related Topics:
• “Importing Fixed-Width Flat Files” on page 68
• “Importing Delimited Flat Files” on page 70
Editing Flat File Definitions 73

Editing Columns
You can edit the following information in the Columns tab of a flat file source or target definition:
• Column Name. The names of columns in the flat file source or target.
• File name columns. You can add a file name column to a flat file source or target. For sources, use the
CurrentlyProcessedFileName column to return the names of the source files from which rows of data were
read. Use this column if you configure the session to read data from a file list. For targets, use the
FileName column to dynamically name flat file targets.
• Datatype. The datatype of the column. For flat files, you can choose bigint, datetime, double, int, nstring,
number, or string.
• Precision, Scale, and Format. When importing file definitions, you often need to consider the precision,
scale, field width, and format of values in each column. You can edit the field width and format by clicking
in the Format column. Enter the precision, scale, and format.
• Not Null. Choose whether you want to allow null data in the source or target.
• Key Type. Choose NOT A KEY for flat file source and target definitions.
• Shift Key. You can define the shift state for shift-sensitive fixed-width flat file sources that do not contain
shift keys. This attribute appears when you select User Defined Shift State in the Edit Flat File Information
dialog box for fixed-width files.
Choose Shift-In if the column contains single-byte characters. Choose Shift-Out if the column contains
multibyte characters.
• Business Name. Optionally, you can add business names to each source or target field.
Note: If the file columns for a source or lookup definition change significantly, you may need to reimport the
file.
To edit the columns of flat file source and target definitions:
1. To edit a source definition, in the Source Analyzer, double-click the title bar of the flat file source
definition. To edit a flat file source definition, in the Target Designer, double-click the title bar of the flat
file target definition.
2. Click the Columns tab.
3. Configure the options of the source or target definition as described above.
4. If you want to add columns, select a column and click Add.
5. Enter the name, datatype, and other characteristics of the column.
Repeat these steps for each column you want to add to the source or target definition.
6. If you want to move a column, use the Up and Down buttons, or drag it within the scrolling list.
Updating Fixed-Width File Properties

After you import a fixed-width file, you can update the file properties. Double-click the title bar of the source
or target definition. Edit the table and column information.
To edit file properties, click the Advanced button on the Table tab. The Edit Flat File Information - Fixed
Width Files dialog box appears. The Edit Flat File Information - Fixed Width Files dialog box contains more
options for file sources than for file targets. For example, it contains information that the Integration Service
needs to read the file, such as the number of initial rows to skip, or the number of bytes between rows.

The following table describes the fixed-width file properties that you can configure for source, target, and
lookup definitions:
Fixed-Width Description for Sources and Lookups Description for Targets

Advanced
Setting
Null Character Character used in the source file to represent Character the Integration Service uses in
a null value. This can be any valid character the target file to represent a null value.
in the file code page or any binary value from This can be any valid character in the file
0 to 255. code page.
Repeat Null If selected, the Integration Service reads If selected, the Integration Service writes
Character repeat null characters in a single field as a as many null characters as possible into
single null value. When you specify a the target field. If you do not select this
multibyte null character and select Repeat option, the Integration Service enters a
Null Character, the field may contain extra single null character at the beginning of
trailing bytes if the field length is not evenly the field to represent a null value.
divisible by the number of bytes in the null If you specify a multibyte null character
character. In this case, the field is not null. and there are extra bytes left after writing
You should always specify a single-byte null null characters, the Integration Service
character. pads the column with single-byte spaces.
If a column is not big enough to take a
null character because it is smaller than
the multibyte character specified as the
null character, the session fails at
initialization.
Code Page Code page of the file definition. Code page of the file definition.
For source definitions, use a source code Use a code page that is a superset of the
page that is a subset of the target code page. source code page.
For lookup file definitions, use a code page
that is a superset of the source code page
and a subset of the target code page.
Line Sequential If selected, the Integration Service reads a n/a

line feed or carriage return character in the
last column as the end of the column. Use this
option if the file uses line feeds or carriage
returns to shorten the last column of each
row.
Number of Initial Indicates the number of rows the Integration n/a

Rows to Skip Service skips when it reads the file. Use this
setting to skip blank or header rows. One row
may contain multiple records.
Enter any integer from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
Number of Bytes to Number of bytes between the last column of n/a

Skip Between one row and the first column of the next. The
Records Integration Service skips the entered number
of bytes at the end of each row to avoid
reading carriage return or line feed
characters. Enter 1 for UNIX files and 2 for
DOS files.

Fixed-Width Description for Sources and Lookups Description for Targets
Advanced
Setting
Strip Trailing If selected, the Integration Service strips n/a

Blanks trailing blanks from string values.
User Defined Shift If selected, you can define the shift state for n/a
State source columns on the Columns tab.
Select User Defined Shift State when the
source file contains both multibyte and single-
byte data, but does not contain shift-in and
shift-out keys. If a multibyte file source does
not contain shift keys, you must define shift
states for each column in the flat file source
definition so the Integration Service can read
each character correctly.
Null Character Handling

You can specify single-byte or multibyte null characters for fixed-width file sources. When reading a fixed-
width source file, the Integration Service uses these characters to determine if a column is null. When writing
to a fixed-width target file, the Integration Service uses these characters to represent null values.
The following table describes how the Integration Service uses the Null Character and Repeat Null Character
properties to determine if a column is null:
Null Repeat Integration Service Behavior When Integration Service Behavior When
Character Null Reading From Sources and Writing To Targets
Character Lookups
Binary Disabled A column is null if the first byte in the Integration Service enters a single
column is the binary null character. The binary null character at the beginning
Integration Service reads the rest of the of the field to represent a null value.
column as text data to determine the If there are extra bytes left after writing
column alignment and track the shift the null character, the Integration
state for shift-sensitive code pages. If Service pads the column with single-
data in the column is misaligned, the byte spaces.
Integration Service skips the row and
writes the skipped row and a
corresponding error message to the
session log.
Non-binary Disabled A column is null if the first character in Integration Service enters a single null
the column is the null character. The character at the beginning of the field
Integration Service reads the rest of the to represent a null value.
column to determine the column If you specify a multibyte null character
alignment and track the shift state for and there are extra bytes left after
shift sensitive code pages. If data in the writing the null character, the
column is misaligned, the Integration Integration Service pads the column
Service skips the row and writes the with single-byte spaces. If a column is
skipped row and a corresponding error not big enough to take a null character
message to the session log. because it is smaller than the multibyte
character specified as the null
character, the session fails at
initialization.

Null Repeat Integration Service Behavior When Integration Service Behavior When
Character Null Reading From Sources and Writing To Targets
Character Lookups
Binary Enabled A column is null if it contains only the Integration Service writes as many
specified binary null character. The binary null characters as possible into
next column inherits the initial shift the target field.
state of the code page.
Non-binary Enabled A column is null if the repeating null Integration Service writes as many null
character fits into the column exactly, characters as possible into the target
with no bytes leftover. For example, a field.
five-byte column is not null if you If you specify a multibyte null character
specify a two-byte repeating null and there are extra bytes left after
character. writing the null characters, the
In shift-sensitive code pages, shift Integration Service pads the column
bytes do not affect the null value of a with single-byte spaces.
column. If a column contains a shift If a column is not big enough to take a
byte at the beginning or end of the null character because it is smaller
column and the repeating null character than the multibyte character specified
fits into the column with no bytes left as the null character, the session fails
over, the column is null. at initialization.
Specify a single-byte null character
when you use repeating non-binary null
characters. This ensures that repeating
null characters fit into a column exactly.
Updating Delimited File Properties

After you import a delimited file, you can update the file properties. Double-click the title bar of the source or
target definition. Edit the table and column information.
To edit file properties, click the Advanced button on the Table tab. The Edit Flat File Information - Delimited
Files dialog box appears. The Edit Flat File Information - Delimited Files dialog box contains more options for
file sources than for file targets. For example, it contains information that the Integration Service needs to
read the file, such as the number of initial rows to skip or the escape character.

The following table describes the delimited file properties that you can configure:
Delimited File Description for Sources and Lookups Description for Targets
Advanced Settings
Column Delimiters Character used to separate columns of Character used to separate columns of
data. Delimiters can be either printable or data. Delimiters can be either printable or
single-byte unprintable characters, and single-byte unprintable characters and
must be different from the escape must be different from the quote
character and the quote character. You character. You can enter a single-byte
can enter a single-byte unprintable unprintable character by browsing the
character by browsing the delimiter list in delimiter list in the Delimiters dialog box.
the Delimiters dialog box. You cannot select unprintable multibyte
You cannot select unprintable multibyte characters as delimiters. If you enter more
characters as delimiters. You cannot than one delimiter, the Integration Service
select the NULL character as the column uses the first delimiter you specify.
delimiter for a flat file source.
Treat Consecutive If selected, the Integration Service treats n/a

Delimiters as One one or more consecutive column
delimiters as one. Otherwise, the
Integration Service reads two consecutive
delimiters as a null value.
Treat Multiple If selected, the Integration Service treats n/a

Delimiters as AND a specified set of delimiters as one. For
example, a source file contains the
following record: abc~def|ghi~|~|jkl|~mno.
By default, the Integration Service reads
the record as nine columns separated by
eight delimiters: abc, def, ghi, NULL,
NULL, NULL, jkl, NULL, mno. If you select
this option and specify the delimiter as ( ~
| ), the Integration Service reads the
record as three columns separated by two
delimiters: abc~def|ghi, NULL, jkl|~mno.
Optional Quotes Select No Quotes, Single Quotes, or Select No Quotes, Single Quotes, or
Double Quotes. Quote character that Double Quotes. Quote character that
defines the boundaries of text strings. defines the boundaries of text strings.
Double Quotes is chosen by default. Double Quotes is chosen by default.
If selected, the Integration Service If you select a quote character, the
ignores column delimiters within the quote Integration Service does not treat column
character. delimiter characters within the quote
For example, a source file uses a comma characters as a delimiter.
as a delimiter and the Integration Service For example, a target file uses a comma
reads the following row from the source as a delimiter and the Integration Service
file: 342-3849, ‘Smith, Jenna’, ‘Rockville, writes the following row to the target file:
MD’, 6. 342-3849, ‘Smith, Jenna’, ‘Rockville, MD’,
If you select the optional single quote 6.
character, the Integration Service ignores If you select the optional single quote
the commas within the quotes and reads character, the Integration Service ignores
the row as four fields. the commas within the quotes and writes
If you do not select the optional single the row as four fields.
quote, the Integration Service reads six If you do not select the optional single
separate fields. quote, the Integration Service writes six
Note: You can improve session separate fields.
performance if the source file does not
contain quotes or escape characters.

Delimited File Description for Sources and Lookups Description for Targets
Advanced Settings
Code Page Code page of the file definition. Code page of the file definition.
For source definitions, use a source code Use a code page that is a superset of the
page that is a subset of the target code source code page.
page. For lookup file definitions, use a
code page that is a superset of the source
code page and a subset of the target
code page.
Row Delimiter Specify a line break character. Select n/a

from the list or enter a character. Preface
an octal code with a backslash (\). To use
a single character, enter the character.
The Integration Service uses only the first
character when the entry is not preceded
by a backslash. The character must be a
single-byte character, and no other
character in the code page can contain
that byte. Default is line-feed, \012 LF
(\n).
Escape Character Character used to escape a delimiter n/a

character in an unquoted string if the
delimiter is the next character after the
escape character. If selected, the
Integration Service reads the delimiter
character as a regular character
embedded in the string, called escaping
the delimiter character.
Note: You can improve session
performance if the source file does not
contain quotes or escape characters.
Remove Escape This option is selected by default. Clear n/a

Character From Data this option to include the escape
character in the output string.
Number of Initial Indicates the number of rows the n/a

Rows to Skip Integration Service skips when it reads
the file. Use this setting to skip blank or
header rows.
Rules and Guidelines for Delimited File Settings

Delimited files are character-oriented and line sequential. Use the following rules and guidelines when you
configure delimited files:
• The column and row delimiter character, quote character, and escape character must all be different for a
source definition. These properties must also be contained in the source or target file code page.
• The escape character and delimiters must be valid in the code page of the source or target file.
Use the following rules and guidelines when you configure delimited file sources:
• In a quoted string, use the escape character to escape the quote character. If the escape character does
not immediately precede a quote character, the Integration Service reads the escape character as an
ordinary character.

• Use an escape character to escape the column delimiter. However, in a quoted string, you do not need to
use an escape character to escape the delimiter since the quotes serve this purpose. If the escape
character does not immediately precede a delimiter character, the Integration Service reads the escape
character as an ordinary character.
• When two consecutive quote characters appear within a quoted string, the Integration Service reads them
as one quote character. For example, the Integration Service reads the following quoted string as I’m
going tomorrow:
2353,‘I’’m going tomorrow’MD
• The Integration Service reads a string as a quoted string only if the quote character you select is the first
character of the field.
• If the field length exceeds the column size defined in the Source Qualifier transformation, the Integration
Service truncates the field.
• If the row of data exceeds the larger of the line sequential buffer length or the total row size defined in the
Source Qualifier transformation, the Integration Service drops the row and writes it to the session log file.
To determine the row size defined in the Source Qualifier transformation, add the column precision and
the delimiters, and then multiply the total by the maximum bytes per character.
Formatting Flat File Columns

When you import or edit flat file definitions, you need to define the following column options:
• Precision. Precision is defined differently for different datatypes.

• Scale. Scale is the maximum number of digits after the decimal point for numeric values.
• Field width. Field width is the number of bytes the Integration Service reads from or writes to a file. Field
width applies to fixed-width file definitions only. Field width must be greater than or equal to the precision.

The following table describes precision and field width for flat file definitions:
Datatype Fixed-Width Flat Files Delimited Flat Files
Number Precision is the number of significant digits. Precision is the number of

Field width is the number of bytes the Integration Service significant digits.
reads from or writes to the file. By default, the field width The Integration Service
equals the precision. ignores any field width
Use the Format column to define the field width. When you formatting.
configure the field width, accommodate characters such as
thousand separators, decimal separators, and negative signs.
For example, “‑123,456” has a field width of 8.
Datetime You do not enter a precision value. You do not enter a

Field width is the number of bytes the Integration Service precision value.
reads from or writes to the file. The Integration Service
The datetime format specified for the column determines the ignores any field width
field width. For example, the default datetime format of formatting.
MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS has a field width of 19.
Use the Format column to define the format and field width.
String Precision is the number of bytes the Integration Service reads Precision is the maximum
from or writes to the file. number of characters the
You do not enter a field width for string values. The precision Integration Service reads
is the total length of the source or target field. from or writes to the file.
Note: If you plan to load multibyte data into a fixed-width file You do not enter a field
target, you need to configure the precision to accommodate width.
the multibyte data.
• Format. Format defines the appearance of numeric and datetime values.

For datetime values, you can choose to output only the date or time parts of the data. For example, you
can configure the file definition for datetime data with the following format:
03/2002
For numeric values, you can choose thousands and decimal separators. For example, you can configure
the file definition for numeric data with the following format:
1.000.000,95
Note: If the source file structure changes significantly, you may need to reimport the flat file source
definition.
You can define the appearance of number and datetime columns at the following locations:
- Source or target field. You can define the format for individual columns on the Columns tab for the
source in the Source Analyzer, or for the target in the Target Designer.
- Source or target instance in a mapping. You can define the default datetime and numeric formats for
a source or target instance in a mapping in the Mapping Designer. The Integration Service uses the
default formats you define when you do not define a format for an individual column.
Formatting Numeric Columns

When you edit flat file definitions, you can define formats for numeric values with the Number datatype.
Bigint, double, and integer datatypes have a default precision, scale, and format. You can change the
precision for a column that is an integer or double datatype.
Formatting Flat File Columns 81

Use the Format column on the Columns tab of a flat file source or target definition to define the format for
numeric values.
You can define the following formatting options for numeric values in the Column Format Settings dialog box:
• Numeric data
• Field width
When you define formatting options in the Column Format Settings dialog box, the Designer shows the
options you define in the Format column on the Columns tab.
Numeric Data
You can define decimal and thousands separators in the numeric data area of the Column Format Settings
dialog box. For the decimal separator, you can choose a comma or a period. The default is the period. For
the thousands separator, you can choose no separator, a comma, or a period. The default is no separator.
To specify numeric separators, click Override Separators and choose a separator from the Decimal Separator
and Thousands Separator fields. You can override one or both separators. When you override the
separators, you must choose different options for each.
For example, the source data contains a numeric field with the following data:
9.999.999,00
5.000.000,00
Choose the period as the thousands separator, and choose the comma as the decimal separator in the flat
file source definition.
For example, you want to output the data above to a file target with the following format:
9,999,999.00
Choose the comma as the thousands separator, and choose the period as the decimal separator in the flat
file target definition.
Field Width
You can change the field width in the Column Format Settings dialog box by padding the width or by defining
a fixed-width value in bytes. By default, the field width equals the precision.
To output numeric data to a fixed-width flat file, you must configure the field width for the target field to
accommodate the total length of the target field. If the data for a target field is too long for the field width, the
Integration Service rejects the row and writes a message to the session log. When you configure the field
width for flat file target definitions, you must accommodate characters the Integration Service writes to the
target file, such as decimals and negative signs.
To adjust the field width, select Adjust Width and enter the number of bytes in the Padding field. When you
adjust the field width, the Integration Service defines the field width as the field precision plus the padding
you enter. For example, when the precision of a field is 10 and you enter 5 in the Padding field, the
Integration Service reads 15 bytes from a file source, and it writes 15 bytes to a file target.
To fix the field width, select Fixed Width and enter the number of bytes in the Field Width field. The Designer
lets you enter a field width greater than or equal to the precision. When you enter 20 in the Field Width field,
the Integration Service reads 20 bytes from a file source, and it writes 20 bytes to a file target.
For example, you have a target field with a precision of four, scale of zero. You want to add two blank spaces
to the target field to make the target file easier to view. Select Adjust Width and enter 2 in the Padding field.
Or, select Fixed Width and enter 6 in the Field Width field.
When padding numeric data in flat file targets, the Integration Service adds blank spaces to the left side of
the target column.

Note: You might adjust the field width for a target field if you think another user might change the precision of
the field. When the precision changes, the field width adjusts accordingly.
Format Column
When you override the numeric separators or define the field width, the Designer shows the options you
define in the Format column on the Columns tab. For example, you have a numeric column with a precision
of five. Click the Format column and define the options in the Column Format Settings dialog box.
The following figure shows the format options the Designer displays in the Format column:
The Designer displays N,NNN(F 6.5).NN in the Format column for the PRICE column. “N,NNN” displays the
thousands separator you specified. “F” indicates a fixed field width. This displays “A” when you adjust the
field width. “6.5” is the field width and precision in bytes. The first number is the field width, the second is the
precision. “.NN” displays the decimal separator you specified.
Note: If you do not define decimal and thousands separators for a particular source or target field, the
Integration Service uses the separators you specify in the source or target instance in the Mapping Designer.
Related Topics:
• “Defining Default Datetime and Numeric Formats” on page 85
Formatting Datetime Columns

When you edit flat file definitions, you can define formats for datetime values. Use the Format column on the
Columns tab of a flat file source or target definition to define the format for datetime values.
You can define the following formatting options for datetime values in the Column Format Settings dialog box:
• Format string
• Field width
When you define formatting options in the Column Format Settings dialog box, the Designer shows the
options you define in the Format column on the Columns tab.

Format String
You can enter any datetime format in the Format String field in the Column Format Settings dialog box. For
example, you can specify the datetime format as MM/YYYY. Or, you can specify the time only, for example,
HH24:MI.
To specify the datetime format, choose Format String and enter the format in the Format String field. You can
choose a format from the list, or you can enter a format using the keyboard. The default format is MM/DD/
YYYY HH24:MI:SS, which has a field width of 19.
For example, the source data contains a datetime field with the following data:
11/28/2002
10/15/2003
Enter the following format in the flat file source definition: MM/DD/YYYY.
For example, you want to output the data above to a file target with the following format:
28-11-2002
15-10-2003
Enter the following format in the flat file target definition: DD-MM-YYYY.
You can also enter any single-byte or multibyte string literal in the Format String field. To enter a string literal,
enclose it in double quotes (“”). When you enter string literals in the format string, the Integration Service
writes the strings to the file target when it runs the session. You might want to add string literals to describe
the different date parts.
For example, you enter the following text in the Format String field:
“Month”MM/”Day”DD/”Year”YYYY
When you run the session and the Integration Service outputs the date October 21, 2002, it writes the
following to the target file:
Month10/Day21/Year2002
Field Width
You can define the field width after you define a format string. You can change the field width by padding the
width or by defining a fixed-width value in bytes. By default, the field width equals the precision.
To adjust the field width after you enter a format string, select Adjust Width and enter the number of bytes in
the Padding field. When you adjust the field width, the Integration Service defines the field width as the
number of bytes required for the datetime format plus the padding you enter. For example, when the datetime
format is MM/YYYY and you enter 5 in the Padding field for a flat file source, the Integration Service reads 12
bytes from the file. When the datetime format is MM/YYYY and you enter 5 in the Padding field for a flat file
target, the Integration Service writes 12 bytes to the file.
When you use Adjust Width, the Integration Service adjusts the field width based on the format string. You
can change the format string without manually adjusting the field width.
To fix the field width after you enter a format string, select Fixed Width and enter the number of bytes in the
Field Width field. You must specify a fixed-width value greater than or equal to the number of bytes required
for the datetime format or the Integration Service truncates the data. For example, when the datetime format
is MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS.NS, specify a fixed-width value greater than or equal to 29. When you enter 21
in the Field Width field, the Integration Service reads 21 bytes from a file source, and it writes 21 bytes to a
file target.
For example, you have a target field with a datetime format of MM/DD/YYYY, which requires 10 bytes. You
want to add two blank spaces to the target field to make the target file easier to view. Select Adjust Width and
enter 2 in the Padding field. Or, select Fixed Width and enter 12 in the Field Width field.

Note: When padding datetime data in flat file targets, the Integration Service adds blank spaces to the right
side of the target column.
Format Column
When you choose a datetime format or define the field width, the Designer shows the options you define in
the Format column on the Columns tab. For example, you define the options in the Column Format Settings
dialog box.
The following figure shows the options the Designer displays in the Format column:
The Designer displays A 30 MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS.US in the Format column for the DATE port. The “A”
indicates the field width is adjusted. The “30” is the field width in bytes: 26 bytes for precision to the
microsecond, plus four bytes for padding.
Note: If you do not define a datetime format for a source or target field, the Integration Service uses the
datetime format you specify in the source or target instance in the mapping.
Defining Default Datetime and Numeric Formats

When you use a flat file source or target definition in a mapping, you can define the default formats for
datetime and number columns in the file. The Integration Service uses the default formats you define when
you do not define the format for an individual column.
If you do not define the default formats, the Integration Service uses the following formats:
Format Description
Datetime Format Datetime format. Default is MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS.
Thousand separator Thousand separator. Choose no separator, a comma, or a period. Default is no

separator.
Decimal separator Decimal separator. Choose a comma or a period. Default is a period.

Note: You can view the default formats for each source or target instance on the Mappings tab in the session
properties.
Working with File Lists

You can create a session to read multiple source files for one source instance in a mapping. For example, if
your organization collects data for multiple locations that you want to process through the same mapping, you
can create a file list. A file list is a file that contains the names and directories of each source file you want
the Integration Service to use.
You configure the session to read a file list. When you configure a session to read a file list, the Integration
Service reads rows of data from the different source files in the file list. To configure the mapping to write the
source file name to each target row, add the CurrentlyProcessedFileName port to the flat file source
definition. The Integration Service uses this port to return the source file name.
You add the CurrentlyProcessedFileName port to a flat file source definition in the Source Analyzer.
To add the CurrentlyProcessedFileName port:
1. Open the flat file source definition in the Source Analyzer.

2. Click the Properties tab.
3. Select Add CurrentlyProcessedFlatFileName Port.
The Designer adds the CurrentlyProcessedFileName port as the last column on the Columns tab. The
CurrentlyProcessedFileName port is a string port with default precision of 256 characters.
4. Click the Columns tab to see your changes.
You may change the precision of the CurrentlyProcessedFileName port if you wish.
5. To remove the CurrentlyProcessedFileName port, click the Properties tab and clear the Add Currently
Processed Flat File Name Port check box.
Working with Shift-Sensitive Flat Files

You can import shift-sensitive flat files in the Flat File Wizard in both fixed-width mode and delimited mode.
A shift-sensitive file may contain both multibyte and single-byte characters. A file may or may not contain
shift-in and shift-out keys to separate multibyte characters from single-byte characters.
Shift-in and shift-out keys separate multibyte characters so the Flat File Wizard and the Integration Service
can read each character correctly. A shift-out key signals the beginning of a sequence of multibyte
characters. A shift-in key signals the end of this sequence. If the file source does not contain shift keys, you
need to define shift states for each column in the file so the Integration Service can read each character
correctly.
Note: Use single-byte and double-byte shift keys.

Importing Flat Files with Shift Keys
Use the Flat File Wizard to import a file source that contains shift keys. You can import both fixed-width and
delimited files that contain shift keys. The Flat File Wizard and the Integration Service use the shift keys in
the file to determine the shift state of each column in the source.
The Flat File Wizard and the Integration Service can handle consecutive shift characters.
The following example is a valid row from a shift-sensitive flat file:

aaa-oAAA-i-oAAA-iaaaaa
The following table describes the notation used in this example:
Notation Description
a Single-byte character
A Multibyte character
-o Shift-out character
-i Shift-in character
The Flat File Wizard displays single-byte shift characters as ‘.’ in the window. Double-byte shift characters
display as ‘..’ in the window. Shift-in characters display on a green background. Shift-out characters display
on a blue background.
Requirements for Shift-Sensitive Flat Files

The Designer returns an error if you analyze a shift-sensitive flat file that contains shift-in and shift-out
characters, but does not meet the following requirements:
• A shift-out and a shift-in character must enclose all multibyte characters. Single-byte characters do not
need to be enclosed with shift characters.
• The first shift character in a row must be a shift-out character.
• A file cannot contain nested shift characters. For example, you cannot have the following sequence:
-oAA-oAA-iaaa
• A shift-in character must close a shift-out character in the same row.
The Flat File Wizard disables the fixed-width option if the file has a multibyte character that contains more
than two bytes per character. Each row in a file must not exceed 16 KB.
The Flat File Wizard validates up to 500 rows or 256 KB of data, whichever comes first. If the file does not
meet the above requirements, the Integration Service writes errors to the session log.
Importing Flat Files without Shift Keys

Use the Flat File Wizard to import a fixed-width file source that does not contain shift keys. However, after
you import the source definition, you must define shift states for each column in the file source definition so
the Integration Service can read each character correctly.
You can also import shift-sensitive COBOL files that do not contain shift keys. When you do, you must also
define the shift states for each column in the COBOL source definition.
Working with Shift-Sensitive Flat Files 87

Note: When you create a session using a flat file source that contains user-defined shift states, verify that the
code page in the Workflow Manager is the same as the code page you chose in the Designer. If you choose
a different source code page in the Workflow Manager, the Integration Service does not use the shift keys
you defined in the Designer.
To define shift states for fixed-width shift-sensitive files:
1. In the Designer, import the flat file source or COBOL file.

2. In the Source Analyzer, double-click the title bar of the file source definition.
3. In the Flat File Information section of the Table tab, select Fixed Width and click Advanced.
The Edit Flat File Information - Fixed Width Files dialog box appears.
4. Select User Defined Shift State and click OK.
The Shift Key column appears.
6. Choose a shift key for each column.
Choose Shift-In if the column contains single-byte characters. Choose Shift-Out if the column contains
multibyte characters.
7. Click OK.
Working with Multibyte Data in Fixed-Width Targets

To load multibyte data into a fixed-width flat file target, configure the precision to accommodate the multibyte
data. Fixed-width files are byte-oriented, not character-oriented. When you configure the precision for a fixed-
width target, you need to consider the number of bytes you load into the target, rather than the number of
characters. The Integration Service writes the row to the reject file if the precision is not large enough to
accommodate the multibyte data. When the Integration Service writes the row to the reject file, it writes a
message in the session log.
Note: Delimited files are character-oriented, and you do not need to allow for additional precision for
multibyte data.
Troubleshooting Flat Files

I ran a session for a flat file target that contains multibyte data. The data in the flat file target does not
include some multibyte characters.
If the code page you select when you imported the flat file target using the Flat File Wizard is not a superset
of the source code page, characters that are not encoded in the target code page may be lost. Select a code
page that is a superset of the source code page when you import a flat file target using the Flat File Wizard.

CHAPTER 4
Working with Targets

• Working with Targets Overview, 89

• Importing a Target Definition, 92
• Creating a Target Definition from a Source Definition, 94
• Creating a Target Definition from a Transformation, 96
• Manually Creating a Target Definition, 100
• Maintaining Relational Target Definitions, 100
• Creating a Target Table, 105
• Troubleshooting Targets, 106
Working with Targets Overview

Before you create a mapping, you must define targets in the repository. Use the Target Designer to import
and design target definitions or to create and maintain target definitions. Target definitions include properties
such as column names and data types.
Creating Target Definitions

You can create the following types of target definitions in the Target Designer:
• Relational. Create a relational target for a particular database platform. Create a relational target
definition when you want to use an external loader to the target database.
• Flat file. Create fixed-width and delimited flat file target definitions.
• XML file. Create an XML target definition to output data to an XML file.
You can create target definitions in the following ways:
• Import the definition for an existing target. Import the target definition from a relational target or a flat
file. The Target Designer uses a Flat File Wizard to import flat files.
• Create a target definition based on a source definition. Drag a source definition into the Target
Designer to make a target definition.
• Create a target definition based on a transformation or mapplet. Drag a transformation into the Target
Designer to make a target definition.
• Manually create a target definition. Create a target definition in the Target Designer.
89
• Design several related target definitions. Create several related target definitions at the same time.
You can create the overall relationship, called a schema, and the target definitions, through wizards in the
Designer. The Cubes and Dimensions Wizards follow common principles of data warehouse design to
simplify the process of designing related targets.
Maintaining Targets and Target Definitions

In addition to creating target definitions, you can complete the following tasks in the Target Designer:
• Reimport target definitions. When the target structure changes significantly, you can reimport the target
definition to make sure it is correct.
• Edit target definitions. Edit target definitions to add comments or key relationships, or update them to
reflect changed target definitions.
• Create relational tables in the target database. If the target tables do not exist in the target database,
you can generate and execute the necessary SQL code to create the target table that matches the target
definition.
• Preview relational and flat file target data. You can preview the data of relational and flat file target
definitions in the Designer.
• Compare target definitions. You can compare two target definitions to identify differences between
them.
Oracle Targets
You can import Oracle targets that use basic compression and OLTP compression. You can also manually
create target definitions for Oracle targets that use basic compression and OLTP compression.
Target Code Pages

You can create targets with multibyte character sets. Target code pages must be a superset of source code
pages when you run a session.
Special Character Handling in Target Definitions

You can import, create, and edit target definitions with table and field names containing special characters,
such as the slash (/) character through the Designer. When you import, create, or edit a target definition
using the Target Designer, the Designer retains special characters in table and field names when saving the
target definition to the repository.
However, when you add a target definition with special characters to a mapping, the Designer either retains
or replaces the character. Also, when you generate the target update override in target instance in the Target
Designer, the Designer uses quotation marks around table and column names with some special characters.
The Designer handles special characters differently for relational and non-relational targets.
90 Chapter 4: Working with Targets

The following table describes how the Designer handles special characters in relational targets:
Special Character Target Designer Behavior Mapping Designer Behavior
@#$_ Retains the character in the target Retains the character in the target
definition table name. instance table name.
Retains the character in the target Retains the character in the target
definition column names. instance column names.
Does not use quotation marks around
the table or column names in the
target update override.
/+-=~`!%^&*()[]{}'; Retains the character in the target Replaces the character in the target
?,<>\| <space> definition table name. instance table name with the
Retains the character in the target underscore character.
definition column names. Retains the character in the target
instance column names.
Delimits table and column names
including special characters with
quotation marks in the target update
override.
.":\t\r\n The Designer does not recognize The Designer does not recognize
these characters in relational target these characters in relational target
table and column names. table and column names.
The following table describes how the Designer handles special characters in non-relational targets:
Special Character Target Designer Behavior Mapping Designer Behavior
@#$_ Retains the character in the target Retains the character in the target
definition table name. instance table name.
Retains the character in the target Retains the character in the target
definition column names. instance column names.
Note: You cannot use the @ Note: You cannot use the @
character as the first character in a character as the first character in a
table or column name. table or column name.
/ Retains the character in the target Replaces the character in the target
definition table name. instance table name with the
Retains the character in the target underscore character.
definition column names. Retains the character in the target
instance column names.
.+-=~`!%^&*()[]{}'" The Designer does not recognize The Designer does not recognize
;:?,<>\| these characters in non-relational these characters in non-relational
\t\r\n <space> target table and column names. target table and column names.
Some databases require special configuration or commands to allow table and field names containing special
characters. For more information, see the database documentation.
Working with Targets Overview 91

Importing a Target Definition
You can import the following target definitions:
• Flat file. The Target Designer uses the Flat File Wizard to import a target definition from a flat file that
matches the structure of the flat file.
• Relational table. You can import a relational table to create a target definition that matches the structure
of the relational table.
• XML file. You can import an XML target definition from an XML, DTD, or XML schema file.
To import a relational target definition, you need to configure connectivity between the target database and
the PowerCenter Client.
Use a target definition in a mapping after you have added it to the repository.
Relational Target Definitions

When you import a target definition from a relational table, the Designer imports the following target details:
• Target name. The name of the target.

• Database location. You specify the database location when you import a relational source. You can
specify a different location when you edit the target definition in the Target Designer and when you
configure a session.
• Column names. The names of the columns.
• Datatypes. The Designer imports the native datatype for each column.
• Key constraints. The constraints in the target definition can be critical, since they may prevent you from
moving data into the target if the Integration Service violates a constraint during a workflow. For example,
if a column contains the NOT NULL constraint and you do not map data to this column, the Integration
Service cannot insert new records into the target table.
• Key relationships. You can customize the Target Designer to create primary key-foreign key
relationships. Click Tools > Options and select the Format tab. Select Import Primary and Foreign Keys.
You can also create logical relationships in the repository. Key relationships do not have to exist in the
database.
When you import target definitions, the Designer does not import the target indexes. You can change this
default setting in powrmart.ini. You can find powrmart.ini in the root directory of the PowerCenter Client
installation.
To import target definition indexes, add the following text to powrmart.ini [Main] section:
ImportIndexes=Yes
Note: Because views can include columns from more than one table, the Integration Service might encounter
database errors when trying to insert, update, or delete data. If you import a target view, make sure that it is a
view of a single table.
Connectivity for Relational Targets

To import a relational target definition, you must be able to connect to the database from the client machine
using a properly configured ODBC data source or gateway. You may also require read permission on the
database object.

When you create an ODBC data source, you must also specify the driver that the ODBC driver manager
sends database calls to. The following table shows the recommended ODBC drivers to use with each
database:
Database ODBC Driver Requires Database

Client Software
IBM DB2 IBM ODBC driver Yes
Informix DataDirect ODBC Wire Protocol driver No
Microsoft Access Microsoft Access driver Yes
Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel driver Yes
Microsoft SQL Server Microsoft SQL Server ODBC driver No
Oracle DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver No
Sybase ASE DataDirect 32-bit closed ODBC driver No
Teradata Teradata ODBC driver n/a
When you use a third-party ODBC data source to import a target definition, the Designer displays a message
indicating that the third-party driver is not listed in powermart.ini. The Designer attempts to import target
definition metadata using a driver that is shipped with PowerCenter. If the third-party provides a driver to
import metadata, configure powrmart.ini.
Configuring a Third-Party ODBC Data Source

To import a target definition with an ODBC driver that is not included in the powrmart.ini, configure the
powrmart.ini.
To configure powrmart.ini for a third-party ODBC data source:
1. Copy the driver to the following directory:

2. Locate and open powrmart.ini in the following directory:
3. Add an entry into the file under the ODBCDLL section that includes the name of the ODBC data source
and the driver.
For example, if Vendor A provided a driver named vendoraodbc.dll, enter the following under the
ODBCDLL heading:
Vendor A=vendoraodbc.dll
4. Save and close powrmart.ini.
5. Restart the PowerCenter Client and import the target definition.
Importing Relational Target Definitions

To create a relational target definition, use the Target Designer to import target metadata.
Importing a Target Definition 93

To import a relational target definition:
1. In the Target Designer, click Targets > Import from Database.

2. Select the ODBC data source used to connect to the target database.
If you need to create or modify an ODBC data source first, click the Browse button to open the ODBC
Administrator. After creating or modifying the ODBC source, continue with the following steps.
3. Enter the user name and password needed to open a connection to the database, and click Connect.
If you are not the owner of the table you want to use as a target, specify the owner name.
4. Drill down through the list of database objects to view the available tables as targets.
5. Select the relational table or tables to import the definitions into the repository.
You can hold down the Shift key to select a block of tables, or hold down the Ctrl key to make non-
contiguous selections. You can also use the Select All and Select None buttons to select or clear all
available targets.
6. Click OK.
The selected target definitions now appear in the Navigator under the Targets icon.
Creating a Target Definition from a Source Definition

When you want to create a target definition that closely matches a source definition, you can use the source
definition to create the target definition. You can also use a shortcut to a source definition to create the target
definition. You can drag the following source definitions into the Target Designer to create target definitions:
• Relational sources
• Flat file sources
• COBOL sources
• XML sources
After you create the matching target definition, you can add or edit target properties and change the target
type. When you create a relational target definition, you can generate the target table in the target database.
Creating a Target Definition from a Relational Source

When you drag a relational source definition into the Target Designer workspace, the Designer creates a
relational target definition that matches the source definition.
You can edit the definition to change information, such as the description, columns, data types, and target
type.
Creating a Target Definition from a Flat File Source

When you drag a flat file source definition into the Target Designer workspace, the Target Designer creates a
flat file target definition by default that matches the source definition.
When you create a flat file target definition from a flat file source definition, the Designer uses the flat file
source definition code page.
You can edit the definition to change information, such as the description, columns, datatypes, and target
type.

Creating a Normalized Target from a COBOL Source
To create a target based on normalized COBOL sources, you first need to analyze the COBOL structure
using the Source Analyzer.
When you drag a normalized COBOL source definition into the Target Designer workspace, the Target
Designer creates relational target definitions based on the following rules:
• The number of tables that appears is one more than the number of OCCURS statements in the COBOL
file.
• The target table name defaults to the record name.
• The generated key name for each table is GK_target_table_name.
• The number of generated key names is the number of OCCURS statements minus the number of primary
keys.
The following figure shows a sample COBOL source definition with five OCCURS statements:
When you drag the source into the Target Designer workspace, the Designer creates six target definitions.
Steps to Create a Target Definition from a Source Definition

Use the following procedure to create a target definition from a source definition.
To create a target definition based on a source definition:
1. With the Target Designer tool active, drag the source definition you want to use into the workspace. For
XML sources, select the option to create relational targets or XML targets and click OK.
The target definition appears.
2. To edit the target definition, double-click the title bar.
3. Enter a target name and select the target type. Add or edit columns or target properties, and then click
OK.
You can now use the target definition in a mapping. You can also create a target tables in the target
database based on relational target definitions.
Creating a Target Definition from a Source Definition 95

Creating a Target Definition from a Transformation
To create a relational target definition that closely matches a transformation in the repository, you can create
the target from the transformation. Drag a transformation from the Navigator to the Target Designer, or create
a target from a transformation in the Mapping Designer workspace.
Create target definitions from the following types of transformations:
• Single-group transformations. Create a single target definition from a transformation with one output
group.
• Multiple-group transformations. Create multiple target definitions from a transformation with multiple
output groups.
• Normalizer transformations. Create a target definition from a source qualifier or pipeline Normalizer
transformation.
• Mapplets. Create one or more target definitions from a mapplet instance in a mapping.
When you create a target definition from a transformation, the target database type is the same as the
repository database by default. After you create the target definition in the repository, you can edit it. For
example, you might want to change the target type.
If you need to create a target definition that contains columns from more than one transformation, you can
copy the ports from each transformation to a transformation such as an Expression or Joiner. You can create
the target definition from that transformation.
When you create a relational target definition, you must generate and execute the SQL to create the table in
the target database.
Creating a Target from a Transformation with One Output Group

When you create a target from a transformation with one output group, the Designer creates one target. All
the output ports become input ports in the target. The name of the target is the same as the transformation
name.
Creating a Target from a Transformation with Multiple Output

Groups
When you create targets from a transformation with more than one output group, the Designer creates one
target for each output group in the transformation. When the transformation is a plug-in or Custom
transformation, the Designer retains the primary key-foreign key relationships between the groups in the
target definitions.
The following figure shows a transformation with multiple output groups:

The Employees XML Parser transformation has five output groups, from X_emp_EMPLOYEES to
X_emp_PHONE. Each output group represents different types of employee information. DataInput is the
input group.
When you create a target from this transformation, the Designer creates a separate target for each output
group. Each target has the corresponding group name from the transformation group, as shown in the
following figure:
Creating a Target from a Normalizer Transformation

You can create a target from a source qualifier or pipeline Normalizer transformation. When you create a
target from a Normalizer transformation, the Designer creates one target and includes all the columns from
the Normalizer. It does not create separate targets to represent the record hierarchies or multiple-occurring
fields in the Normalizer transformation.
Creating a Target Definition from a Transformation 97

The following figure shows a Normalizer transformation in a mapping with a COBOL source definition:
The Normalizer transformation, Norm_Company_Sales, represents the hierarchical data structure of the
Company_Sales COBOL source definition. When you create a target from the Norm_Company_Sales
transformation, the Designer flattens the hierarchies in the transformation into one target. The target includes
the generated keys from the Normalizer transformation and the generated column ID (GCID) for the multiple-
occurring records, DETAIL_DATA and SUPPLIER_INFO.
Creating a Target from a Mapplet

You can create a target from a mapplet that is under a mapping Transformation Instances node. When you
drag the mapplet instance to the Target Designer, the Designer creates a target for each output group in the
mapplet.
Note: You cannot create a target when you drag a transformation instance from a mapplet to the Target
Designer.
Transformation and Target Datatypes

The Designer creates the target datatypes based on the best match between the transformation datatypes
and the datatypes for the repository database.
The following table describes the transformation datatypes and the corresponding datatypes for each
database:
Transformation IBM DB2 Microsoft Oracle Sybase Teradata Informix

Datatype SQL ASE
Server
bigint bigint bigint number(19,0 bigint bigint int8

)
binary char for bit binary raw binary byte/varbyte byte

data
date/time timestamp datetime timestamp datetime timestamp datetime year

to fraction
decimal decimal decimal number(p,s) decimal decimal decimal(p,s)
double float float number float float float(p)

Transformation IBM DB2 Microsoft Oracle Sybase Teradata Informix
Datatype SQL ASE
Server
integer integer int number(p,s) int integer integer
nstring vargraphic nvarchar nvarchar2 nvarchar n/a nvarchar
ntext long ntext nclob nvarchar n/a n/a

vargraphic
real float real number real n/a smallfloat
small integer smallint smallint smallint smallint smallint smallint
string varchar varchar varchar2 varchar varchar varchar(m,r)
text long text long text n/a text

varchar
Steps to Create a Target

You can create a target by dragging one or more transformations from the Navigator to the Target Designer
or you can create a target from a transformation instance in the Mapping Designer.
Steps to Create a Target in the Target Designer

You can create one or more targets in the Target Designer by selecting transformations in the Navigator and
dragging them to the Target Designer workspace.
When you create a target from a transformation in a different folder, the Designer copies the transformation
to the target folder and creates the target from the transformation. When you create a target from a
transformation in a shared folder, the Designer creates a shortcut to the transformation in the target folder
before it creates the transformation.
The following table describes the objects you can use to create a target in the Target Designer:
Object Navigator Location
Transformation Transformations node
Transformation Instance Mappings node
Mapplet Transformation Instances node for a mapping
To create a target definition in the Target Designer:
1. Open the Target Designer.

2. Drag a transformation from the Transformations node or the Transformation Instances node in the
Navigator to the workspace.
The target definition appears.
The Designer adds the new target to the Navigator and the Target Designer workspace. When you use
version control in the repository, the new target is checked out by default.
Creating a Target Definition from a Transformation 99

If the new target name conflicts with an existing target name, the Designer prompts you to rename the new
target or replace the existing target definition.
Steps to Create a Target in the Mapping Designer

You can create a target from a transformation instance in the Mapping Designer. When you create a target in
the Mapping Designer, you create a target instance in the mapping. The Target Designer displays the target
definition.
To create a target definition in the Mapping Designer:
1. Open a mapping in the Mapping Designer.

2. Right-click a transformation instance in the mapping.
3. Click Create and Add Target.
If the repository contains a target definition with the same name, you must create the target in the Target
Designer instead of the Mapping Designer.
If there are no name conflicts, the Designer adds the new target to the Navigator and to the Mapping
Designer workspace. You can link the transformation ports to the target.
Manually Creating a Target Definition

You can manually create a target definition rather than importing it or creating it from a source definition.
To manually create a target definition:
1. In the Target Designer, click Targets > Create.

2. Enter a name for the target and select the target type.
If you create a relational definition, follow database-specific naming conventions.
3. Click Create.
An empty definition appears in the workspace. It may be covered by the dialog box. The new target
definition also appears within the Navigator window.
4. If you want to create another target definition, enter a new target name and target type and click Create.
Repeat this step for each target you want to create.
5. Click Done when you finish creating target definitions.
6. Configure the target definition.
The new target definition is saved to the repository. You can now use the target definition in a mapping.
You can also create a target table in the target database based on relational target definitions.
Note: You cannot manually create a target definition for XML files.
Maintaining Relational Target Definitions

You can maintain relational target definitions in the following ways:
• Reimport the target definition. Reimport a target definition rather than edit it if the target changes
significantly.

• Define primary key-foreign key relationships. Define primary key-foreign key relationships between
relational target tables.
• Edit the target definition. Edit a target definition to add comments or key relationships, or update it to
reflect a changed target.
After you create a relational target definition, you can edit it using the following target definition tabs:
• Table tab. Edit properties such as constraints for relational targets and flat file properties for flat file
targets.
• Columns tab. Edit column information such as datatype and precision.
• Indexes tab. Add index information for relational target definitions.
• Metadata Extensions tab. Extend the metadata stored in the repository by associating information with
repository objects, such as target definitions.
When you change a target definition, the Designer propagates the changes to any mapping using that target.
Some changes to target definitions can invalidate mappings.
The following table describes how you can impact mappings when you edit target definitions:
Modification Result
Add a column. Mapping not invalidated.
Change a column datatype. Mapping may be invalidated. If the column is connected to an input port that
uses a datatype that is incompatible with the new one (for example, Decimal
to Date), the mapping is invalid.
Change a column name. Mapping may be invalidated. If you change the column name for a column
you just added, the mapping remains valid. If you change the column name
for an existing column, the mapping is invalidated.
Delete a column. Mapping may be invalidated if the mapping uses values from the deleted
column.
Change the target definition type. Mapping not invalidated.
When you add a new column to a target in the Target Designer, all mappings using the target definition
remain valid. However, when you add a new column and change some of its properties, the Designer
invalidates mappings using the target definition.
You can change the following properties for a newly added target column without invalidating a mapping:
• Name
• Datatype
• Format
If the changes invalidate the mapping, validate the mapping and any session using the mapping. You can
validate objects from the Query Results or View Dependencies window or from the Repository Navigator. You
can validate multiple objects from these locations without opening them in the workspace. If you cannot
validate the mapping or session from one of these locations, open the object in the workspace and edit it.
Maintaining Relational Target Definitions 101

Reimporting a Relational Target Definition
If a target table changes, such as when you change a column datatype, you can edit the definition or you can
reimport the target definition. When you reimport the target, you can either replace the existing target
definition or rename the new target definition to avoid a naming conflict with the existing target definition.
To reimport a target definition:
1. In the Target Designer, follow the same steps to import the target definition, and select the target to
import.
The Designer notifies you that a target definition with that name already exists in the repository. If you
have multiple tables to import and replace, select Apply To All Tables.
2. Click Rename, Replace, Skip, or Compare.
3. If you click Rename, enter the name of the target definition and click OK.
4. If you have a relational target definition and click Replace, specify whether you want to retain primary
key-foreign key information and target descriptions.
The following table describes the options available in the Table Exists dialog box when reimporting and
replacing a relational target definition:
Option Description
Apply to all Tables Select this option to apply rename, replace, or skip all tables in the folder.
Retain User-Defined Select this option to keep the primary key-foreign key relationships in the target
PK-FK Relationships definition being replaced. This option is disabled when the target definition is non-
relational.
Retain User-Defined Select this option to retain the target description and column and port descriptions
Descriptions of the target definition being replaced.
Creating a Primary Key-Foreign Key Relationship

To create a relationship between two relational tables, choose the Link Column mode from the Layout menu.
Drag from the Foreign Key column of one table to the Primary Key column of another table. The Designer
may prompt you to remove the existing link to the default primary key table.
Editing Table Options

You can edit the following options on the Table tab of the target definition:
• Business names. Add a more descriptive name to the table using the Rename button.
• Constraints. SQL statements for table-level referential integrity constraints. Applies to relational targets
only.
• Creation options. SQL statements for table storage options. Applies to relational targets only.
• Description. Add a comment or link to business documentation. These are displayed in Repository
Manager for the target table. Adding comments or business documentation links to targets is an easy way
to document the purpose of a target. You can add or modify comments to any existing target.
You can enter up to 2,000 bytes/K in the description, where K is the maximum number of bytes a
character contains in the selected repository code page. For example, if the repository code page is a
Japanese code page where K=2, each description and comment field can contain up to 1,000 characters.

• Keywords. Keep track of target definitions with key words. As development and maintenance work
continues, the number of targets increases. While all of these targets may appear in the same folder, they
may all serve different purposes. Keywords can help you find related targets. Keywords can include
developer names, mappings, or the associated schema.
Use keywords to perform searches in the Repository Manager.
• Database type. Define the target type, either a relational database or a flat file. You can change a
relational target definition to a flat file target definition and vice versa. When you change the target
definition type, you lose some metadata when you save the changes to the repository.
When you change the target definition type from relational to flat file, you lose indexes information,
constraints information, and creation options information. The Workflow Manager invalidates all sessions
using the target.
When you change the target definition type from flat file to relational, you lose all flat file property
information. If you change the target definition back to a flat file, the Designer uses default values for the
flat file properties. The Workflow Manager invalidates all sessions using the target.
Note: If you change the target type from flat file to relational, the Workflow Manager invalidates all
sessions that use the target. However, you can change a target type from relational to flat file without
invalidating sessions that use the target.
• Flat file information. When the database type is flat file, you can define the flat file properties by clicking
the Advanced button.
To add options to a relational target definition:
1. In the Target Designer, double-click the title bar of the target definition.
The Edit Tables dialog box appears.
2. Click the Rename button to edit the target name and the business name.
3. To change the target type, choose a different database in the Database Type field.
To change the target type to a flat file target, choose flat file.
4. Edit the following properties for relational target definitions:
• To add a constraint, type the SQL statement in the Constraints field.
• To add a creation option, type the SQL statement in the Creation Options field.
5. To add a description, type a description in the Description field.
6. To add keywords, click Edit Keywords.
The Edit Keywords dialog box appears.
7. Use the buttons to create and move keywords.
8. Click OK.
Editing Columns
You can edit the following information in the Columns tab of the target definition:
• Column name. The column names in the target. When editing a relational target definition, edit the
column name if you are manually creating the relational target definition or if the actual target column
name changed.
• Datatype. The datatypes that display in the target definition depend on the target type of the target
definition.
• Precision and scale. When designing or importing relational targets, consider the precision and scale of
values in each column. Precision is the maximum number of significant digits for numeric datatypes, or the
Maintaining Relational Target Definitions 103

maximum number of characters for string datatypes. Precision includes scale. Scale is the maximum
number of digits after the decimal point for numeric values. Therefore, the value 11.47 has a precision of 4
and a scale of 2. The string Informatica has a precision (or length) of 11.
All datatypes for relational targets have a maximum precision. For example, the Integer datatype has a
maximum precision of 10 digits. Some numeric datatypes have a similar limit on the scale or do not allow
you to set the scale beyond 0. Integers, for example, have a scale of 0, since by definition they never
include decimal values.
You can change the precision and scale for some datatypes to values that differ from the values defined
in the database. However, changing the precision or scale can cause numeric overflow on numeric
columns, truncation on character columns, or insertion of zeroes on datetime columns when the
Integration Service writes to the target column.
• Not null. Choose whether you want to allow null data in the target.
• Key type. Select Primary, Foreign, Primary-Foreign, or Not a Key. Applies to relational targets only.
• Business name. Optionally, you can add business names to each target column.
To edit the columns of a relational target definition:
1. In the Target Designer, double-click the title bar of a target definition.

2. Select the Columns tab.
3. Configure the options of the target definition as described above.
4. If you are creating a target definition and you want to add columns, select a column and click Add.
5. Enter the name, datatype, and other characteristics of the column.
Repeat these steps for each column you want to add to the table.
6. If you want to move a column, use the Up and Down buttons, or drag it within the scrolling list.
7. Click OK.
Defining Indexes
Since indexes speed queries against tables, adding indexes to the target database is an important part of
target table design. You can add index information to relational target definitions. Queries to the data
warehouse determine which columns you should index. If you define indexes, select the option to create
indexes when you create target tables.
To create indexes for a target table:
1. In the Target Designer, double-click the title bar of a relational target definition.
2. Select the Indexes tab.
3. To add an index, click the Add button in the Indexes section.
4. Enter a name for the index and press Enter.
5. To add a column to the index, click the Add button in the Columns section. Select a column name and
click OK.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each column you want to assign.
7. Click OK.
Important: When you generate and execute the DDL to create the target table, choose to create an index.

Creating a Target Table
After you add a relational target definition to the repository, you can instruct the Designer to generate and
execute the SQL code to create the target in a relational database. You cannot create a table in a relational
database from an XML target definition or a flat file target definition.
The Designer generates the SQL script using characters in the UCS-2.
If the target already exists in that database, you can drop it and re-create it. The Designer writes the SQL
code to an .SQL text file, so you can review and edit the DDL commands by opening this file.
To generate and execute the SQL code:
1. In the Target Designer, select the relational target definition you want to create in the database. If you
want to create multiple tables, select all relevant table definitions.
2. Click Targets > Generate/Execute SQL.
Click Connect and select the database where the target table should be created. Click OK to make the
connection.
Enter a file name and location for the SQL script you are about to generate and any options you want to
include in the SQL DDL code. This text file exists on the local file system, not in the repository.
Depending on the Generation options you select, the SQL script will contain all of the CREATE and
DROP commands that match the selections. For example, if you created a target definition with primary
keys, choose to generate the SQL with primary keys.
3. Click Generate SQL File if you want to create the SQL script, or Generate and Execute if you want to
create the file, and then immediately run it.
When you click Generate SQL file, the SQL generated for the selected table definitions is stored in the
file you selected. If the file already exists, a dialog box appears prompting you to overwrite the existing
file. The progress of copying the generated SQL file appears in the Output window in the Designer.
After the file has been generated, you can click Edit SQL File, which opens a text editor so you can
modify the SQL statements. When the Designer generates the SQL file for the target database, it
encloses all table and field names containing the slash character in double quotes.
You can click Execute SQL File to create the tables. When you click Generate and Execute, the SQL
generated for the selected table definitions is stored in the file you selected and immediately executed.
Note: As long as the Designer is open, it locks the SQL file you last opened and modified. If you want to
unlock the file so that you can view it in a different application, open a different SQL file in the Designer,
or exit the Designer.
4. Click Close.
When you close this dialog box, the Designer maintains an open connection to the target database. If
you reopen the dialog box, you do not need to reconnect to the target database.
SQL DDL Commands in the Designer

When the Designer generates the SQL code, it uses generic SQL, not the platform-specific version of the
DDL code. The Designer passes these instructions to the ODBC Driver Manager, which converts the
standard version of SQL into platform-specific commands. Do not try to run these SQL files through a
different utility or use the syntax as an example of the native DDL syntax.
Creating a Target Table 105

Dropping and Re-creating Indexes
After you insert significant amounts of data into a target, you normally need to drop and re-create indexes on
that table to optimize query speed. You can drop and re-create indexes by either of the following methods:
• Using pre- and post-session SQL commands. The preferred method for dropping and re-creating
indexes is to define a pre-session SQL statement in the Pre SQL property that drops indexes before
loading data to the target. Use the Post SQL property to re-create the indexes after loading data to the
target. Define pre- and post-session SQL for relational targets in the mapping target properties or on the
Mappings tab in the session properties.
• Using the Designer. The same dialog box you use to generate and execute DDL code for table creation
can drop and re-create indexes. Every time you run a workflow that modifies the target table, launch the
Designer and use this feature when you use this method.
• Stored procedures. You can also use stored procedures to drop and re-create indexes.
Re-creating Targets
If you modify a relational target definition, use the Designer to drop and re-create the corresponding target
table.
Note: When you drop a target table, the Designer deletes the table from the database. If you want to keep
the target data, back it up before you drop the table.
To re-create the target table:
1. In the Target Designer, modify the relational target definition and select it.
2. Click Targets > Generate/Execute SQL.
In the dialog box, connect to the appropriate target database. Select the DROP options checked for the
table and any indexes on the table.
3. Click Generate and Execute.
The Designer drops and re-creates the table, including any indexes assigned to it.
Troubleshooting Targets
When I modified a target definition and used the Designer to run the SQL DDL code, I lost all the data in
the target table.
When you modify a target definition, the Designer can drop and re-create the table. It cannot issue an ALTER
TABLE command to change or add columns. If you need to modify the table, back up the data in a temporary
table before you drop and re-create the table. Alternatively, you can issue the ALTER TABLE command, but
be careful to match the target definition now stored in the repository.
When I connect to a database to import target definitions, I do not see the tables, views, or synonyms I
want to import.
Make sure you entered the correct owner name when connecting to the database. By default, the owner
name the Designer uses to identify sources and targets for import is the same as the database user name
you used to connect to the database. You may need to enter a different owner name to see the targets you
want to import.

Instead of showing me a target when I drag it into a workspace, the Designer prompts me to copy it or
make a shortcut.
Each workbook represents metadata from a single folder. To edit metadata from a different folder, move the
focus in the Navigator window to the second folder and click Open. The Designer then opens another
workbook, representing metadata from the second folder.
When I open a target definition appearing in a mapping, I cannot edit it.

Create mappings in the Mapping Designer. Create and modify source and target definitions in the Source
Analyzer and Target Designer. The Designer divides the process of adding source definitions, target
definitions, and mappings into separate modes of the Designer, to help you keep these processes distinct. To
modify a target definition, switch to the Target Designer.
When I try to run a workflow that includes targets I have designed, the session log tells me that one or
more target tables do not exist.
When you are designing a target, you are adding a target definition to the repository. To actually create the
target table, run the necessary SQL DDL code in the database where you want the target to appear.
I imported a target from a DB2 database and received an SQL0954C error message from the DB2
operating system.
If the value of the DB2 system variable APPLHEAPSZ is too small when you use the Designer to import
targets from a DB2 database, the Designer reports an error accessing the repository. The Designer status
bar shows the following message:
SQL Error:[IBM][CLI Driver][DB2]SQL0954C: Not enough storage is available in the
application heap to process the statement.
If you receive this error, increase the value of the APPLHEAPSZ variable for the DB2 operating system.
APPLHEAPSZ is the application heap size, in 4KB pages, for each process using the database.
Troubleshooting Targets 107

CHAPTER 5
Mappings
• Mappings Overview, 108

• Working with Mappings, 110
• Connecting Mapping Objects , 115
• Linking Ports, 116
• Propagating Port Attributes, 119
• Working with Sources in a Mapping, 124
• Working with Relational Sources in a Mapping, 125
• Working with Transformations in a Mapping, 126
• Working with Mapplets in a Mapping, 126
• Working with Targets in a Mapping, 126
• Creating Target Files by Transaction, 128
• Working with Relational Targets in a Mapping, 130
• Validating a Mapping, 134
• Using the Workflow Generation Wizard, 137
• Troubleshooting Mappings, 138
Mappings Overview
A mapping is a set of source and target definitions linked by transformation objects that define the rules for
data transformation. Mappings represent the data flow between sources and targets. When the Integration
Service runs a session, it uses the instructions configured in the mapping to read, transform, and write data.
Every mapping must contain the following components:
• Source definition. Describes the characteristics of a source table or file.

• Transformation. Modifies data before writing it to targets. Use different transformation objects to perform
different functions.
• Target definition. Defines the target table or file.
• Links. Connect sources, targets, and transformations so the Integration Service can move the data as it
transforms it.
A mapping can also contain one or more mapplets. A mapplet is a set of transformations that you build in the
Mapplet Designer and can use in multiple mappings.
108
When you add an object to a mapping, you configure the properties according to the way you want the
Integration Service to transform the data. You also connect the mapping objects according to the way you
want the Integration Service to move the data. You connect the objects through ports.
The Mapping Designer displays objects in three different views:
• Iconized. Shows an icon of the object with the object name.

• Normal. Shows the columns in the ports tab and the input and output port indicators. You can connect
objects that are in the normal view.
• Edit. Shows the object properties. You can switch between the different tabs and configure the object in
this view.
Object Dependency
Some objects in a mapping are also stored as independent objects in the repository:
• Sources
• Targets
• Reusable transformations
• Mapplets
The mapping is dependent on these objects. When this metadata changes, the Designer and other
PowerCenter Client applications track the effects of these changes on mappings. In these cases, you may
find that mappings become invalid even though you do not edit the mapping. When a mapping becomes
invalid, the Integration Service cannot run it properly, and the Workflow Manager invalidates the session.
The only objects in a mapping that are not stored as independent repository objects are the non-reusable
transformations that you build within the mapping. These non-reusable transformations are stored within the
mapping only.
Developing a Mapping
Use the following steps as a guideline when you develop a mapping:
1. Verify that all source, target, and reusable objects are created. Create source and target definitions.
If you want to use mapplets, you must create them also. You can create reusable transformations in the
Transformation Developer, or you can create them while you develop a mapping.
2. Create the mapping. Create a mapping by dragging a source, target, mapplet, or reusable
transformation into the Mapping Designer workspace, or you can click Mappings > Create from the
menu.
3. Add sources and targets. Add sources and targets to the mapping.
4. Add transformations and transformation logic. Add transformations to the mapping and build
transformation logic into the transformation properties.
5. Connect the mapping. Connect the mapping objects to create a flow of data from sources to targets,
through mapplets and transformations that add, remove, or modify data along this flow.
6. Validate the mapping. Validate the mapping to identify connection or transformation errors.
7. Save the mapping. When you save the mapping, the Designer validates it, identifying any errors. The
Designer displays validation messages in the Output window. A mapping with errors is invalid, and you
cannot run a session against it until you validate it.
PowerCenter also provides a tool that you can use to create a template for a PowerCenter mapping and
generate multiple mappings from the template. Mapping Architect for Visio provides an Informatica stencil for
the Microsoft Office Visio software that contains shapes representing PowerCenter mapping objects. You can
use the mapping object shapes to draw the mapping template on the Visio drawing window.
Mappings Overview 109

Working with Mappings
You can complete the following tasks with mappings:
• Create a mapping. When you create a mapping, you save the mapping name in the repository. You can
then develop and save the mapping.
• Open a mapping. You can open one mapping at a time in a folder.
• Copy a mapping. You can copy a mapping within the same folder or to another folder.
• Copy a mapping segment. You can copy segments of mappings and mapplets when you want to reuse a
portion of the mapping logic.
• Copy objects in a mapping. You can copy one or more objects in a mapping and paste them into
another mapping or mapplet in the same folder.
• Export a mapping. You can export a mapping to an XML file.
• Import a mapping. You can import a mapping from an XML file that you exported in the Designer.
• Edit a mapping. You can add, modify, or delete objects in a mapping.
• Save a mapping. When you save a mapping in the repository, the Designer performs mapping validation.
• Debug a mapping. Run the Debugger in the Mapping Designer to test mapping logic.
• Delete a mapping. Delete a mapping from the repository if you do not want to use it again.
• View link paths to a port. You can view link paths to a port in a mapping. You can view the forward path,
the backward path, or both.
• View source column dependencies. You can view from which source columns a target column receives
data.
• Connect objects in a mapping. You can connect objects in a mapping to define the flow of data from
sources to targets.
• Link ports. You can connect mapping objects by linking ports manually or automatically by name or
position.
• Propagate port attributes. You can propagate port attributes in a mapping. You can propagate attributes
forward, backward, or in both directions.
Creating a Mapping
The first step in the process of moving data between sources and targets is to create a mapping in the
Mapping Designer.
To create a mapping:
1. Open the Mapping Designer.

2. Click Mappings > Create, or drag a repository object into the workspace.
3. Enter a name for the new mapping and click OK.
The naming convention for mappings is m_MappingName, such as m_ResearchProjects.
Opening a Mapping
To open a mapping, drag it from the Navigator into the Mapping Designer workspace. If you have a mapping
in the same folder already open, the Designer prompts you to close it before continuing. Click OK to close the
current mapping and open the other one.
110 Chapter 5: Mappings

You can open one mapping at a time in a folder. If you open more than one folder at a time, you can open a
mapping in each folder.
Tip: To open a mapping, you can also right-click a mapping in the Navigator and choose Open.
Copying a Mapping
You can copy mappings with the Designer:
• Within a folder
• To a folder in the same repository
• To another repository
The Designer provides a Copy Wizard that lets you copy objects in the repository. When you copy a mapping,
the Copy Wizard creates a copy of each component in the mapping, if the component does not already exist.
If any of the mapping components already exist, the Copy Wizard prompts you to rename, replace, or reuse
those components. However, if the object is a shortcut, or if the destination folder already contains a shortcut
with the same name, you cannot replace the object. You can only rename or reuse the object. If a mapping
contains sources with primary key-foreign key relationships to sources not used in the mapping, the Copy
Wizard prompts you to copy the related source.
Copying Mapping Segments

You can copy segments of mappings and mapplets when you want to reuse a portion of the mapping logic. A
segment consists of one or more objects in a mapping or mapplet. A segment can include a source, target,
transformation, mapplet, or shortcut. To copy mapping segments, select and copy the segments from the
mapping designer and paste them into a target mapping or an empty mapping or mapplet workspace. You
can copy segments across folders or repositories.
To copy a segment of a mapping or mapplet:
1. Open a mapping or mapplet.

2. Select a segment by highlighting each object you want to copy.
You can select multiple objects. You can also select segments by dragging the pointer in a rectangle
around objects in the workspace.
3. Click Edit > Copy or press Ctrl+C to copy the segment to the clipboard.
4. Open a target mapping or mapplet. You can also paste the segment into an empty workspace.
5. Click Edit > Paste or press Ctrl+V.
The Designer prompts you to rename, reuse, or replace objects with conflicts.
Using the Copy As Command

If you make changes to a mapping, but you do not want to overwrite the original mapping, you can make a
copy of the changed mapping by clicking Mappings > Copy As. When you use Copy As, the copy of the
mapping contains the changes and the original mapping does not reflect these changes.
You can only use Copy As within the same folder. When you use Copy As, the mapping must be open in the
workspace.
To use the Copy As command to copy a mapping:
1. Open a mapping in the Mapping Designer workspace.

2. Click Mappings > Copy As.
Working with Mappings 111

3. Enter the new mapping name.
4. Click OK.
You cannot use Copy As to copy shortcuts.
Copying Mapping Objects

The Designer lets you copy one or more objects in a mapping. You can paste the objects you copy into any
other mapping or mapplet in the same folder. You might want to copy objects from a mapping and paste them
into another mapping or mapplet to reuse transformation logic you created.
Exporting and Importing a Mapping

You export a mapping to an XML file and import a mapping from an XML file through the Designer. You might
want to use the export and import feature to copy a mapping to the same repository, a connected repository,
or a repository to which you cannot connect.
Editing a Mapping
After you create a mapping, you can edit it by adding, modifying, or deleting objects. Objects include source
definitions, target definitions, mapplets, and transformations. Before the Designer deletes objects in the
mapping, it displays the list of objects to delete. The Designer displays a validation message in the Output
window when you save a mapping.
To see what sessions or shortcuts may be affected by changes you make to a mapping, select the mapping
in the Navigator, right-click, and select View Dependencies. Or, click Mappings > View Dependencies.
Reverting to a Previously Saved Mapping

While editing a mapping, you can revert to a previously-saved mapping, undoing changes you have entered
since the last save. To do this, click Edit > Revert to Saved. When you click Yes, the Designer removes all
changes entered since the last time you saved the mapping.
Renaming and Adding Comments to a Mapping

You can rename, add comments, or specify links to business documentation for a mapping at any time.
Adding comments or business documentation links is an easy way to document the purpose of a mapping.
The Repository Manager and MX views include these comments to help you analyze the metadata.
To rename or add comments to a mapping:
1. Open a mapping in the Mapping Designer and click Mappings > Edit.
2. In the Edit Mapping dialog box, enter a new name for the mapping.
3. Add a description of the mapping in the comments box.
You can enter up to 2,000 characters.
4. Click OK.

Invalidating Sessions
When you edit and save a mapping, some changes cause the session to be invalid even though the mapping
remains valid. The Integration Service does not run invalid sessions. If you edit a mapping, the Designer
invalidates sessions when you perform the following actions:
• Add or remove sources or targets.

• Remove mapplets or transformations.
• Replace a source, target, mapplet, or transformation when importing or copying objects.
• Add or remove Source Qualifiers or COBOL Normalizers, or change the list of associated sources for
these transformations.
• Add or remove a Joiner or Update Strategy transformation.
• Add or remove transformations from a mapplet in the mapping.
• Change the database type for a source or target.
Debugging a Mapping
You can debug a valid mapping to gain troubleshooting information about data and error conditions. To
debug a mapping, you configure and run the Debugger from within the Mapping Designer. When you run the
Debugger, it pauses at breakpoints and you can view and edit transformation output data.
Deleting a Mapping
You may delete mappings that you no longer use. When you delete a mapping, you do not delete any
sources, targets, mapplets, or reusable transformations defined outside the mapping.
Note: If you enable version control, a deleted mapping remains checked out until you check it in. To check in
a deleted mapping, click Versioning > Find Checkouts. Select the deleted mapping and click Tools > Check
In.
You can delete a mapping from the Navigator window, or you can delete the mapping currently displayed in
the Mapping Designer workspace.
• To delete a mapping from the Navigator window, select the mapping and press the Delete key, or click
Edit > Delete.
• To delete a mapping currently displayed in the Mapping Designer workspace, click Mappings > Delete.
Viewing Link Paths to a Port

When editing a mapping, you may want to view the forward and backward link paths to a particular port. Link
paths allow you to see the flow of data from a column in a source, through ports in transformations, to a port
in the target.
To view link paths, highlight a port and right-click it. Select the Select Link Path option. You can choose to
view either the forward path, backward path, or both. The Designer displays all the connectors in the link path
you select.
When displaying both link paths, the Designer traces the flow of data from one column in the source, in and
out of each transformation, and into a single port in the target. For unconnected transformations, the
Designer does not display a link path. For connected Lookup transformations, the Designer shows each
output port dependent upon the input ports involved in the lookup condition. For Custom transformations, the
Designer shows that an output port depends on all input ports by default. However, if you define port
relationships in a Custom transformation, the Designer shows the dependent ports you define.
Working with Mappings 113

Note: You can configure the color the Designer uses to display connectors in a link path. When configuring
the format options, choose the Link Selection option.
Viewing Source Column Dependencies

When editing a mapping, you can view source column dependencies for a target column. Viewing source
column dependencies lets you see from which source columns a target column receives data.
To view column dependencies, right-click a target column in a mapping and choose Show Field
Dependencies. The Designer displays the Field Dependencies dialog box which lists all source columns
connected to the target column.
When you define a port expression that performs a calculation using multiple source columns, and then
connect that port to a target column, the Field Dependencies dialog box lists all source columns you use in
the expression.
For example, you have the following mapping:
Define the following expression in the Q3_sales port in the Aggregator transformation:
LAST(sales, quarter = 3)
Right-click the Q3_sales target column and choose Show Dependencies.
The following figure shows the Field Dependencies dialog box that appears:

Connecting Mapping Objects
After you add and configure source, target, and transformation objects in a mapping, complete the mapping
by connecting the mapping objects. You connect mapping objects through the ports. Data passes into and
out of a transformation through the following ports:
• Input ports. Receive data.

• Output ports. Pass data.
• Input/output ports. Receive data and pass it unchanged.
Every source instance, target instance, mapplet, and transformation contains a collection of ports. Each port
represents a column of data:
• Sources provide data, so they contain only output ports.

• Targets receive data, so they contain only input ports.
• Mapplets contain only input ports and output ports.
• Transformations contain a mix of input, output, and input/output ports, depending on the transformation
and its application.
To connect ports, you drag between ports in different mapping objects. The Designer validates the
connection and creates the connection only when the connection meets link validation and concatenation
requirements.
You can leave ports unconnected. The Integration Service ignores unconnected ports.
Options for Linking Ports

When you link transformations, you can link with one of the following options:
• One to one. Link one transformation or output group to one transformation, input group, or target only.
• One to many.
- Link one port to multiple transformations, input groups, or targets.
- Link multiple ports in one transformation or output group to multiple transformations, input groups, or
targets.
• Many to one. Link many transformations to one transformation, input group, or target.
Linking One to Many

When you want to use the same data for different purposes, you can link the port providing that data to
multiple ports in the mapping. For example, salary information might be used to calculate the average salary
in a department through the Aggregator transformation, while the same information might appear in an
Expression transformation configured to calculate monthly pay of each employee.
Linking Many to One

Frequently, you need to combine data from multiple transformations into a single transformation or target. For
example, you might need to combine data from multiple Aggregator and Expression transformations into a
single fact table.
Connecting Mapping Objects 115

Rules and Guidelines for Connecting Mapping Objects
Use the following rules and guidelines when you connect mapping objects:
• If the Designer detects an error when you try to link ports between two mapping objects, it displays a
symbol indicating that you cannot link the ports.
• Follow logic of data flow in the mapping. You can link the following types of ports:
- The receiving port must be an input or input/output port.
- The originating port must be an output or input/output port.
- You cannot link input ports to input ports or output ports to output ports.
• You must link at least one port of an input group to an upstream transformation.
• You must link at least one port of an output group to a downstream transformation.
• You can link ports from one active transformation or one output group of an active transformation to an
input group of another transformation.
• You cannot connect an active transformation and a passive transformation to the same downstream
transformation or transformation input group.
• You cannot connect more than one active transformation to the same downstream transformation or
transformation input group.
• You can connect any number of passive transformations to the same downstream transformation,
transformation input group, or target.
• You can link ports from two output groups in the same transformation to one Joiner transformation
configured for sorted data if the data from both output groups is sorted.
• You can only link ports with compatible datatypes. The Designer verifies that it can map between the two
datatypes before linking them. The Integration Service cannot transform data between ports with
incompatible datatypes. While the datatypes do not have to be identical, they do have to be compatible,
such as Char and Varchar.
• You must connect a source definition to a source qualifier only. You then link the source qualifier to
targets or other transformations.
• You can link columns to a target definition in a mapping, but you cannot copy columns into a target
definition in a mapping. Use the Target Designer to add columns to a target definition.
• The Designer marks some mappings invalid if the mapping violates data flow validation.
Linking Ports
You can manually link ports, or you can automatically link ports between transformations. When you link
ports automatically, you can link by position or by name. When you link ports automatically by name, you can
specify a prefix or suffix by which to link the ports. Use prefixes or suffixes to indicate where ports occur in a
mapping. For example, a mapping includes a port in the Source Qualifier called Name and a corresponding
port in a Filter transformation called FilName. ‘Fil’ is the prefix you specify when you automatically link ports
between the Source Qualifier and Filter transformation.
Manually Linking Ports

To link ports manually, click Layout > Link Columns. When you drag from one port to another, the Designer
creates a connection. When you drag a port into an empty port, the Designer copies the port and creates a
connection.

You can also link multiple ports at the same time. Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select a range of ports to link to
another transformation. The Designer links the ports, beginning with the top pair. It links all ports that meet
the validation requirements.
Linking Ports by Position

When you link by position, the Designer links the first output port to the first input port, the second output port
to the second input port, and so forth. Use this option when you create transformations with related ports in
the same order. Use the following options to link by position:
• Autolink dialog box. To automatically link ports using the Autolink dialog box, click Layout > Autolink.
• Autolink command. To link ports by selecting the ports in the workspace, click Layout > Autolink by
Position.
Linking Ports using the Autolink Dialog Box

To link ports by position using the Autolink dialog box:
1. Click Layout > Autolink.

2. Select the transformations and targets.
You can select multiple transformations in the To Transformations list to link one transformation to
multiple transformations. For objects that contain multiple input groups such as Custom transformations
or XML targets, select the group name from the To Transformation list.
You can also select the transformations in the workspace in the order you want to link them. Then, in the
Autolink dialog box, select each From Transformation and the Designer selects the To Transformation
based on the order in which you selected it in the workspace. Click Apply and then select the next From
Transformation and click Apply.
3. Select Position.
4. Click OK.
The Designer links the first output port to the first input port, the second output port to the second input
port, and so forth.
Linking Ports Using the Autolink by Position Command

To link ports by position using the Autolink by Position command:
1. Click Layout > Autolink by Position.

2. Select the mapping object that you want to link by position and drag the selected ports to another
mapping object.
The Designer selects all of the ports in an object. To select only specific ports, use the Autolink dialog
box.
3. The Designer links the first output port to the first input port, the second output port to the second input
port, and so forth.
4. When you finish linking ports, click Layout > Link Columns.
Linking Ports by Name

You can link ports by name in the Designer. The Designer adds links between input and output ports that
have the same name. Linking by name is not case sensitive. Link by name when you use the same port
names across transformations. The Designer can link ports based on prefixes and suffixes that you define.
Linking Ports 117

Link by name and prefix or suffix when you use prefixes or suffixes in port names to distinguish where they
occur in the mapping or mapplet. Use the following options to link by name:
• Autolink dialog box. To automatically link ports by name, link ports by name and prefix, and link ports by
name and suffix using the Autolink dialog box, click Layout > Autolink.
• Autolink command. To link objects by selecting the ports in the workspace, click Layout > Autolink by
Name.
Linking Ports by Name using the Autolink Dialog Box

To link ports by name using the Autolink dialog box:

multiple transformations. For objects that contain multiple input groups such as Custom transformations
or XML targets, select the group name from the To Transformation list.
3. Select Name.
4. Click OK.
Linking Ports by Name and Prefix/Suffix using the Autolink Dialog Box
To link ports by name and prefix or suffix using the Autolink dialog box:

multiple transformations. For objects that contain input groups such as Custom transformations or XML
targets, select the group name from the To Transformation list.
3. Select Name.
4. Click More to view the options for entering prefixes and suffixes.
5. In From Transformation, enter the prefix or suffix used in the ports from which you are linking.
6. In To Transformation, enter the prefix or suffix used in the ports to which you are linking.
In this example, the Designer links ports in SQ_CUSTOMERS to ports in FIL_STATE where the port
name in FIL_STATE is either the same as SQ_CUSTOMERS, or is the same and is preceded by the
prefix “F_”.
7. Click OK.
Linking Ports by Name Using the Autolink by Name Command

To link ports by name using the Autolink by Name command:
1. Click Layout > Autolink by Name.

2. Select the mapping object that you want to link by name and drag the selected ports to another mapping
object.
The Designer selects all of the ports in an object. To select only specific ports, use the Autolink dialog
box.
3. The Designer adds links between input and output ports that have the same name, regardless of name
case.
4. When you are finished linking ports, click Layout > Link Columns.

Propagating Port Attributes
When you edit a port name in a transformation, by default, the Designer propagates references to that port in
the expressions, conditions, and other ports in that transformation. You can also propagate changed
attributes throughout the mapping.
The Designer propagates ports, expressions, and conditions based on the following factors:
• The direction that you propagate. You can propagate changes forward, backward, or in both directions.
• The attributes you choose to propagate. You can propagate port name, datatype, precision, scale, and
description.
• The type of dependencies. You can propagate changes to dependencies along a link path or to implicit
dependencies within a transformation.
Understanding Dependency Types

When you propagate port attributes, the Designer can update the following dependencies:
• Link path dependencies. A link path dependency is a dependency between a propagated port and the
ports in its link path. When you propagate link path dependencies, the Designer also performs default
updates to references in expressions and conditions that depend on ports in the link path.
• Implicit dependencies. An implicit dependency is a dependency within a transformation between two
ports based on an expression or condition.
For example, when you change the datatype of a port that is used in a lookup condition, the Designer
propagates the datatype change to the other port dependent on the condition.
Propagating Dependencies in a Link Path

When you propagate dependencies in a link path, the Designer updates all the input and input/output ports in
its forward link path and all the output and input/output ports in its backward link path. The Designer performs
the following updates:
• Updates the port name, datatype, precision, scale, and description for all ports in the link path of the
propagated port.
• Updates all expressions or conditions that reference the propagated port with the changed port name.
• Updates the associated port property in a dynamic Lookup transformation if the associated port name
changes.
• Updates the port name of Custom transformation port dependencies.
Note: When you propagate a port name, the Designer appends “1” to the port name if a port with the same
name exists in the transformation.
Propagating Port Attributes 119

Example
In the following mapping, the QTY port in the Joiner transformation links to the QTY port in the Aggregator
transformation. The Aggregator transformation references the QTY port in the expressions for
TOTAL_QUANTITY and TOTAL_REVENUE:
You make the following changes to the QTY port in the Joiner transformation:
• You change the port name QTY to QUANTITY.

• You change the datatype from Decimal to Integer.
When you propagate forward the attributes, the Designer updates the following dependencies in the
Aggregator transformation:
• The Designer updates QTY port name to QUANTITY.

• The Designer updates the reference to QTY port name in the expressions for the TOTAL_QUANTITY and
TOTAL_REVENUE ports change to QUANTITY.
• The Designer updates the datatype of QTY port name to Integer.
Propagating Implicit Dependencies

You can propagate datatype, precision, scale, and description to ports with implicit dependencies. When you
click Options in the Propagate Ports dialog box, you can choose to parse conditions and expressions to
identify the implicit dependencies of the propagated port. All ports with implicit dependencies are output or
input/output ports.
When you include conditions the Designer updates the following dependencies:
• Link path dependencies

• Output ports used in the same lookup condition as the propagated port
• Associated ports in dynamic Lookup transformations that are associated with the propagated port
• Output ports used by a Custom transformation to define a port relationship with one or more input or input/
output ports
• Master ports used in the same join condition as the detail port
When you include expressions, the Designer updates the following dependencies:
• Link path dependencies

• Output ports containing an expression that uses the propagated port

The Designer does not propagate to implicit dependencies within the same transformation. You must
propagate the changed attributes from another transformation. For example, when you change the datatype
of a port that is used in a lookup condition and propagate that change from the Lookup transformation, the
Designer does not propagate the change to the other port dependent on the condition in the same Lookup
transformation.
Example
You have the following mapping:
The MANUFACTURER_ID port in the Aggregator transformation links to the IN_MANUFACTURER_ID port in
the Lookup transformation. The Lookup transformation uses the following lookup condition:
MANUFACTURER_ID = IN_MANUFACTURER_ID
You change the datatype of the MANUFACTURER_ID port from integer to decimal in the Aggregator
transformation. You choose to parse conditions to infer dependencies, and then propagate the datatype
change. The Designer performs the following tasks:
• Updates link path dependencies. The Designer updates the ports in the link path, changing the datatype
of the IN_MANUFACTURER_ID port in the Lookup transformation to decimal.
• Identifies dependent ports. The Designer parses the lookup condition and identifies the
MANUFACTURER_ID port in the Lookup transformation as a dependent port.
• Updates implicit dependencies. The Designer changes the datatype of the MANUFACTURER_ID port in
the Lookup transformation to decimal.
Propagated Attributes by Transformation

The following table describes the dependencies and attributes the Designer propagates for each
transformation:
Transformation Dependency Propagated Attribute
Aggregator - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
- Expression - Port name
- Implicit dependencies - Datatype, precision, scale
Application Source - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Qualifier

Custom - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
- Port dependency - Port name
- Implicit dependencies - Datatype, precision, scale
Expression - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
- Implicit dependencies - Datatype, precision, scale, description
External Procedure - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Filter - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
- Condition - Port name
Input - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Joiner - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Lookup - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
- Associated ports (dynamic - Port name
Lookup) - Datatype, precision, scale, description
- Implicit dependencies
Normalizer in the - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Pipeline
Normalizer Source - n/a - none

Qualifier
Output - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Rank - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Router - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
SDK Source Qualifier - n/a - none
Sequence Generator - n/a - none
Sorter - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Source Qualifier - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
SQL - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Stored Procedure - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description

Transaction Control - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
Union - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
- Implicit dependencies - Datatype, precision, and scale, description
Update Strategy - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
XML Generator - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
XML Parser - Ports in link path - Port name, datatype, precision, scale, description
XML Source Qualifier - n/a - none
The Designer does not propagate changes to the following mapping objects:
• Unconnected transformations
• Reusable transformations
• Mapplets
• Source and target instances
• SDK Source Qualifier
Rules and Guidelines for Propagating Ports and Attributes

Use the following rules and guidelines when you propagate port attributes:
• The Designer does not propagate to implicit dependencies within the same transformation.
• When you propagate a port description, the Designer overwrites the description for the port in the other
transformations in the mapping.
• When you propagate backward along the link path, verify that the change does not cause the Integration
Service to fail the session. For example, if you propagate changes to a source qualifier, the Integration
Service might generate invalid SQL when it runs the session. If you change the port name “CUST_ID” to
“CUSTOMER_ID,” the Integration Service might generate SQL to select the wrong column name if the
source table uses “CUST_ID.”
• When you propagate port attributes, verify that the change does not cause the Designer to invalidate the
mapping. For example, when you change the datatype of a port from integer to string and propagate the
datatype to other transformations, the Designer invalidates the mapping if a calculation uses one of the
changed ports. Validate the mapping after you propagate ports. If the Designer invalidates the mapping,
click Edit > Revert to Saved to revert to the last saved version of the mapping.
• When you propagate multiple ports, and an expression or condition depends on more than one
propagated port, the Designer does not propagate attributes to implicit dependencies if the attributes do
not match.
For example, you have the following expression in an Expression transformation:
Item_desc_out = Substr(ITEM_NAME, 0, 6) || Substr(ITEM_DESC, 0, 6)
The precision of Item_desc_out is 12, ITEM_NAME is 10, and ITEM_DESC is 10. You change the
precision of ITEM_DESC to 15. You select parse expressions to infer dependencies and propagate the

port attributes of ITEM_NAME and ITEM_DESC. The Designer does not update the precision of the
Item_desc_out port in the Expression transformation since the ITEM_NAME and ITEM_DESC ports have
different precisions.
Steps to Propagate Port Attributes

Complete the following steps to propagate port attributes:
1. Open a mapping in the Mapping Designer, and select one or more ports to propagate.
2. Click Mappings > Propagate Attributes, and choose Propagate Attributes. Or, right-click the port and
choose Propagate Attributes.
The Designer displays the Propagate Port Attributes dialog box.
After you open the Propagate Port Attributes dialog box, you can select another port and propagate its
attributes.
3. Select the direction and attributes you want to propagate.
4. Optionally, to infer dependencies, click Options.
The following table describes the options on the Propagate Port Attributes dialog box:
Option Description
Preview Displays the links to the affected ports in green and the unaffected ports in red.
Propagate Propagates the port attributes according to the options you specify in the dialog
box.
Direction Instructs the Designer to propagate attributes forward, backward, or in both

directions.
Attributes to Propagate Specifies the attributes that you want to propagate. The attributes include name,
datatype, precision, scale, and description.
Options Select to read conditions or expressions and propagate attributes to implicit

dependencies. The Designer disables these options when you propagate the
port name. These options are clear by default. When you select one of these
options and click Preview, the Designer highlights the link paths to the
dependent ports.
5. Click Preview to view the affected ports.

The Designer displays the links to the affected ports in green and the unaffected ports in red.
6. Click Propagate.
When you propagate port attributes, the Output window displays the propagated attributes and the
affected ports.
7. Click Close.
Working with Sources in a Mapping

When you create a mapping, you must add one or more source definitions to it. When you drag a source into
the Mapping Designer workspace, you add an instance of the source definition to the mapping.

For relational sources, you can edit the source definition and override the default source table name.
Every mapping requires at least one of the following source qualifiers that determines how the Integration
Service reads the source data:
• Source Qualifier transformation. Represents data read from relational and flat file sources.
• Normalizer transformation. Represents data read from COBOL sources.
• Application Source Qualifier transformation. Represents data read from application sources.
• Application Multi-Group Source Qualifier transformation. Represents data read from multi-group
application sources.
• XML Source Qualifier transformation. Represents data read from XML sources.
You can let the Designer create the source qualifier by default. Each time you drag a source instance into a
mapping, the Designer adds a source qualifier and connects it to the source. Use the automatic source
qualifier creation when you want to create one source qualifier for each source in the mapping. You can
disable the automatic creation when you want to join data from different relational sources. You can then
manually create and connect it to the source.
When you edit the source in the Source Analyzer, all instances of the source in mappings inherit the
changes. Some changes might invalidate the mappings using the source.
However, you specify some properties for every source instance in a mapping. Double-click the source
instance in the Mapping Designer and click the Properties tab. For relational sources, you can specify the
table owner name. For flat file sources, you can specify the default datetime format, thousands separator,
and decimal separator.
Note: When you add a source definition with some special characters in the table name to a mapping, the
Designer replaces the character with an underscore in the source instance name for the mapping.
Working with Relational Sources in a Mapping

When you add a relational source to a mapping, you can view the table owner name and override the source
table name. You can view this information on the Properties tab of a relational source instance in the
Mapping Designer.
The table owner name displays the owner name of the source table in the database. For some databases,
such as DB2, tables can have different owners. You can override the table owner name for each source
instance in the session properties.
You can override the source table name for relational source instances on the Properties tab of the source
instance. Override the source table name when you use a single mapping to read data from different source
tables. Enter a table name in the source table name. You can also enter a parameter or variable. You can
use mapping parameters, mapping variables, session parameters, workflow variables, or worklet variables in
the source table name. For example, you can use a session parameter, $ParamSrcTable, as the source table
name, and set $ParamSrcTable to the source table name in the parameter file.
Note: If you override the source table name on the Properties tab of the source instance, and you override
the source table name using an SQL query, the Integration Service uses the source table name defined in the
SQL query.
To override a source table name:
1. In the Designer, open the Mapping Designer tool.

2. Double-click the title bar of a relational source instance in the mapping.
Working with Relational Sources in a Mapping 125

3. On the Properties tab, enter the source table name. You can also enter a parameter or variable in the
Source Table Name field.
If you use a user-defined mapping parameter, mapping variable, workflow variable, or worklet variable,
you must declare the parameter or variable.
4. Click OK.
5. If you use a parameter or variable for the source table name, define the parameter or variable in the
appropriate section of the parameter file.
Working with Transformations in a Mapping

A transformation is a repository object that generates, modifies, or passes data. You configure logic in a
transformation that the Integration Service uses to transform data. The Designer provides a set of
transformations that perform specific functions. For example, an Aggregator transformation performs
calculations on groups of data.
You can create transformations to use once in a mapping, or you can create reusable transformations to use
in multiple mappings. When you add a reusable transformation to a mapping, you add an instance of the
transformation. When you edit the reusable transformation in the Transformation Developer, all instances of
the transformation in mappings inherit the changes. Some changes might invalidate the mappings using the
reusable transformation.
Working with Mapplets in a Mapping

You can build mapplets in the Mapplet Designer when you want to use a standardized set of transformation
logic in several mappings. When you use a mapplet in a mapping, the Designer creates an instance of the
mapplet. The mapplet instance displays only the ports from the Input and Output transformations. These
transformations display as groups. You can enter comments for the instance of the mapplet in the mapping,
but you cannot edit other mapplet properties.
You can expand the mapplet in the Mapping Designer by selecting it and clicking Mappings > Expand from
the menu. This expands the mapplet within the mapping for view. You can open or iconize all the
transformations in the mapplet and mapping, but you cannot edit any of the properties.
When you edit the mapplet in the Mapplet Designer, all instances of the mapplet in mappings inherit the
changes. Some changes might invalidate the mappings using the mapplet.
Working with Targets in a Mapping

When you create a mapping, you must add one or more target definitions to it. When you drag a target
definition into the Mapping Designer workspace, you add an instance of the target definition.
When you add targets to a mapping, you can include different types of targets. You can include targets of the
same database type, but different database connections. You can also include both relational and flat file
targets in the same mapping.

When you edit the target in the Target Designer, all instances of the target in mappings inherit the changes.
Some changes might invalidate the mappings using the target.
Note: When you add a target definition with some special characters in the table name to a mapping, the
Designer replaces the character with an underscore in the target instance name for the mapping.
You can configure properties for relational, file, and XML targets in a mapping.
Configuring Relational Targets in a Mapping

For relational targets, you can configure the following properties within a mapping:
• Reject truncated and overflow data. Select this option in the target instance Properties tab when you
want the Integration Service to write truncated data to the reject file.
• Update override. Override the default UPDATE statement using the SQL Editor in the target instance
Properties tab.
• Table name prefix. Specify the owner of the target tables in the target instance Properties tab.
• Pre- and post-session SQL. Enter pre-session SQL commands for a target instance in a mapping to
execute commands against the target database before the Integration Service reads the source. Enter
post-session SQL commands to execute commands against the target database after the Integration
Service writes to the target.
• Target table name. You can override the default target table name.
Related Topics:
• “Working with Relational Targets in a Mapping” on page 130
Configuring Flat File Targets in a Mapping

For flat file targets, you can configure the following properties within a mapping:
• Datetime format. Define the default datetime format to use for datetime values.
• Thousands separator. Define the default thousands separator to use for numeric values.
• Decimal separator. Define the default decimal separator to use for numeric values.
Related Topics:
• “Defining Default Datetime and Numeric Formats” on page 85
Configuring XML Targets in a Mapping

For XML targets, you can change the root element. However, if you change the root, you affect the target
XML structure and you can invalidate the mapping.
Setting the Target Load Order

You can configure the target load order for a mapping containing any type of target definition. In the
Designer, you can set the order in which the Integration Service sends rows to targets in different target load
order groups in a mapping. A target load order group is the collection of source qualifiers, transformations,
and targets linked together in a mapping. You can set the target load order if you want to maintain referential
integrity when inserting, deleting, or updating tables that have the primary key and foreign key constraints.
The Integration Service reads sources in a target load order group concurrently, and it processes target load
order groups sequentially.
Working with Targets in a Mapping 127

To specify the order in which the Integration Service sends data to targets, create one source qualifier for
each target within a mapping. To set the target load order, you then determine in which order the Integration
Service reads each source in the mapping.
The following figure shows two target load order groups in one mapping:
In this mapping, the first target load order group includes ITEMS, SQ_ITEMS, and T_ITEMS. The second
target load order group includes all other objects in the mapping, including the TOTAL_ORDERS target. The
Integration Service processes the first target load order group, and then the second target load order group.
When it processes the second target load order group, it reads data from both sources at the same time.
To set the target load order:
1. Create a mapping that contains multiple target load order groups.

2. Click Mappings > Target Load Plan.
The Target Load Plan dialog box lists all Source Qualifier transformations in the mapping and the targets
that receive data from each source qualifier.
3. Select a source qualifier from the list.
4. Click the Up and Down buttons to move the source qualifier within the load order.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for other source qualifiers you want to reorder.
6. Click OK.
Creating Target Files by Transaction

You can generate a separate output file each time the Integration Service starts a new transaction. You can
dynamically name each target flat file.
To generate a separate output file for each transaction, add a FileName port to the flat file target definition.
When you connect the FileName port in the mapping, the Integration Service creates a separate target file at
each commit. The Integration Service names the output file based on the FileName port value from the first
row in each transaction. By default, the Integration Service writes output files to $PMTargetFileDir.
Configuring the Target

You add the FileName column to a flat file target definition in the Target Designer.

To add a FileName column:
1. Open the flat file target definition in the Target Designer.

3. Click Add FileName Column.
The Designer creates a string port called FileName. You can change the port precision.
Configuring the Mapping

You can generate output files from source-based or user-defined commits. You can use a source-based
commit to commit data to a target file based on the number of rows from a source. For example, you might
want to create a separate output file for each 1,000 rows of data. You can configure a user-defined commit
when the mapping contains an effective transaction generator. For example, you might want to create a
separate output file for each city.
In a mapping, connect the target FileName port to a transformation port that will contain a unique value at the
start of each transaction. You can create an expression in the transformation to generate unique file names
and pass them to the FileName port.
Running the Session

When you configure a FileName port, the Integration Service overrides the Output Filename session attribute
with the value in the FileName column. If the FileName column value is NULL for a row, the row is an error
and the Integration Service does not process it. If the FileName column is NULL after a transaction boundary,
the Integration Service names the output file with the default output file name.
The FileName column must contain a unique value for each transaction. If the FileName column value does
not change between transactions, the Integration Service overwrites the flat file target.
If you do not connect the FileName port in the mapping, the Integration Service generates one target file and
uses the output file name configured in the session.
Rules and Guidelines for Creating Target Files by Transaction

Use the following rules and guidelines when you create FileName columns:
• You can use a FileName column with flat file targets.

• You can add one FileName column to the flat file target definition.
• You can use a FileName column with data from real-time sources.
• A session fails if you use a FileName column with merge files, file lists, or FTP targets.
• If you pass the same file name to targets in multiple partitions, you might get unexpected results.
• When a transformation drops incoming transaction boundaries and does not generate commits, the
Integration Service writes all rows into the same output file. The output file name is the initial value of the
FileName port.
Example
A source contains orders for several cities. You want to write orders to separate output files based on the
city.
Creating Target Files by Transaction 129

The following figure shows a mapping to process the orders:
In addition to a source and Source Qualifier, the mapping has the following objects:
• Sorter transformation. Sorts the source data by city.

• Expression transformation. Determines when a new city appears in a row and passes an integer to the
New City port of the Transaction Control transformation. Passes 0 by default and passes 1 when the row
contains a new city.
• Transaction Control transformation. Evaluates the New City value from the Expression transformation.
When New City is 1, the Transaction Control transformation commits all orders in the transaction to the
target. The Transaction Control transformation passes the city and order number to the flat file target. It
also passes the city to the FileName column in the target.
• Flat file target. Writes a new flat file for each transaction. The Integration Service names each target with
the value of FileName.
The Integration Services passes a transaction for each city to the target. For this example, the data contains
the following cities and order numbers:
Brisbane, 100
San Francisco, 101
San Francisco, 104
San Francisco, 105
San Francisco,107
Tiburon, 102
Tiburon, 106
Tiburon, 102
The Integration Service generates the following output files:

Brisbane
San Francisco
Tiburon
Working with Relational Targets in a Mapping

When you add a relational target to a mapping, you can configure the following properties:
• Reject truncated and overflow data. Select this option in the target instance Properties tab when you
want the Integration Service to write truncated data to the reject file.
• Update override. Override the default UPDATE statement using the SQL Editor in the target instance
Properties tab.
• Table name prefix. Specify the owner of the target tables in the target instance Properties tab.
• Pre- and post-session SQL. You can enter pre-session SQL commands for a target instance in a
mapping to execute commands against the target database before the Integration Service reads the
source. Enter post-session SQL commands to execute commands against the target database after the
Integration Service writes to the target.

• Target table name. You can override the default target table name.
Note: You cannot configure these properties in the Target Designer.
Rejecting Truncated and Overflow Data

The Designer lets you convert data by passing it from port to port. Sometimes a conversion causes a numeric
overflow (numeric data) or truncation (on character columns). For example, passing data from a Decimal (28,
2) to a Decimal (19, 2) port causes a numeric overflow. Likewise, if you pass data from a String(28) port to a
String(10) port, the Integration Service truncates the strings to 10 characters. When a conversion causes an
overflow, the Integration Service, by default, skips the row. The Integration Service does not write the data to
the reject file. For strings, the Integration Service truncates the string and passes it to the next
transformation.
The Designer provides an option to let you include all truncated and overflow data between the last
transformation and target in the session reject file. If you select Reject Truncated/Overflow Rows, the
Integration Service sends all truncated rows and any overflow rows to the session reject file or to the row
error logs, depending on how you configure the session.
Configuring the Target Update Override

By default, the Integration Service updates target tables based on key values. However, you can override the
default UPDATE statement for each target in a mapping. You might want to update the target based on non-
key columns.
When the Integration Service executes SQL against a source, target, or lookup database, it searches the
reserved words file stored in the Integration Service installation directory. It encloses matching reserved
words in quotes. If you use target update override, you must manually put all reserved words in quotes.
For a mapping without an Update Strategy transformation or a Custom transformation with the update
strategy property enabled, configure the session to mark source rows as update. The Target Update option
only affects source rows marked as update. The Integration Service processes all rows marked as insert,
delete, or reject normally. When you configure the session, mark source rows as data-driven. The Target
Update Override only affects source rows marked as update by the Update Strategy or Custom
transformation.
For example, a mapping passes the total sales for each salesperson to the T_SALES table.
The Designer generates the following default UPDATE statement for the target T_SALES:
UPDATE T_SALES SET EMP_NAME = :TU.EMP_NAME, DATE_SHIPPED = :TU.DATE_SHIPPED,
TOTAL_SALES = :TU.TOTAL_SALES WHERE EMP_ID = :TU.EMP_ID
Because the target ports must match the target column names, the update statement includes the
keyword:TU to specify the ports in the target transformation. If you modify the UPDATE portion of the
statement, be sure to use :TU to specify ports.
Overriding the WHERE Clause

You can override the WHERE clause to include non-key columns. For example, you might want to update
records for employees named Mike Smith only. To do this, you edit the WHERE clause as follows:
UPDATE T_SALES SET DATE_SHIPPED = :TU.DATE_SHIPPED,
TOTAL_SALES = :TU.TOTAL_SALES WHERE :TU.EMP_NAME = EMP_NAME and
EMP_NAME = 'MIKE SMITH'
Working with Relational Targets in a Mapping 131

Rules and Guidelines for Configuring the Target Update Override
Use the following rules and guidelines when you enter target update queries:
• If you use target update override, you must manually put all database reserved words in quotes.
• You cannot override the default UPDATE statement if the target column name contains any of the
following characters:
' , ( ) < > = + - * / \ t \ n \ 0 <space>
• You can use parameters and variables in the target update query. Use any parameter or variable type that
you can define in the parameter file. You can enter a parameter or variable within the UPDATE statement,
or you can use a parameter or variable as the update query. For example, you can enter a session
parameter, $ParamMyOverride, as the update query, and set $ParamMyOverride to the UPDATE
statement in a parameter file.
• When you save a mapping, the Designer verifies that you have referenced valid port names. It does not
validate the SQL.
• If you update an individual row in the target table more than once, the database only has data from the
last update. If the mapping does not define an order for the result data, different runs of the mapping on
identical input data may result in different data in the target table.
• A WHERE clause that does not contain any column references updates all rows in the target table, or no
rows in the target table, depending on the WHERE clause and the data from the mapping. For example,
the following query sets the EMP_NAME to “MIKE SMITH” for all rows in the target table if any row of the
transformation has EMP_ID > 100:
UPDATE T_SALES set EMP_NAME = 'MIKE SMITH' WHERE :TU.EMP_ID > 100
• If the WHERE clause contains no port references, the mapping updates the same set of rows for each row
of the mapping. For example, the following query updates all employees with EMP_ID > 100 to have the
EMP_NAME from the last row in the mapping:
UPDATE T_SALES set EMP_NAME = :TU.EMP_NAME WHERE EMP_ID > 100
• If the mapping includes an Update Strategy or Custom transformation, the Target Update statement only
affects records marked for update.
• If you use the Target Update option, configure the session to mark all source records as update.
Steps to Enter a Target Update Statement

Use the following procedure to create an update statement:
1. Double-click the title bar of a target instance.

2. Click Properties.
3. Click the Open button in the Update Override field.
The SQL Editor displays.
4. Select Generate SQL.
The default UPDATE statement appears.
5. Modify the update statement.
You can override the WHERE clause to include non-key columns.
Enclose all reserved words in quotes.
6. Click OK.
The Designer validates the SQL when you save the mapping.

Configuring the Table Name Prefix
The table name prefix is the owner of the target table. For some databases, such as DB2, target tables in a
session can have different owners. If the database user specified in the database connection is not the owner
of the target tables in a session, specify the table owner for each target instance. A session can fail if the
database user is not the owner and you do not specify the table owner name.
You can specify the table owner name in the target instance or in the session properties. When you enter the
table owner name in the session properties, you override the transformation properties.
Note: When you specify the table owner name and you set the sqlid for a DB2 database in the connection
environment SQL, the Integration Service uses table owner name in the target instance. To use the table
owner name specified in the SET sqlid statement, do not enter a name in the target name prefix.
To specify a target owner name at the target instance level:
1. In the Designer, open the Mapping Designer tool.

2. Double-click the title bar of a relational target instance in the mapping.
3. On the Properties tab, enter the table owner name or prefix in the Value field for Table Name Prefix.
4. Click OK.
Adding Pre- and Post-Session SQL Commands

You can enter pre- and post-session SQL commands on the Properties tab of the target instance in a
mapping. You might want to run pre- and post-session SQL on the target to drop indexes before a session
runs, and recreate them when the session completes.
The Integration Service runs pre-session SQL commands against the target database before it reads the
source. It runs post-session SQL commands against the target database after it writes to the target.
You can override the SQL commands on the Mappings tab of the session properties. You can also configure
the Integration Service to stop or continue when it encounters errors executing pre- or post-session SQL
commands.
Rules and Guidelines for Adding Pre- and Post-Session SQL Commands
Use the following rules and guidelines when you enter pre- and post-session SQL commands in the target
instance:
• Use any command that is valid for the database type. However, the Integration Service does not allow
nested comments, even though the database might.
• You can use parameters and variables in the in the target pre- and post-session SQL commands. For
example, you can enter a parameter or variable within the command. Or, you can use a session
parameter, $ParamMyCommand, as the SQL command, and set $ParamMyCommand to the SQL
statement in a parameter file.
• Use a semicolon (;) to separate multiple statements. The Integration Service issues a commit after each
statement.
• The Integration Service ignores semicolons within /* ...*/.
• If you need to use a semicolon outside of comments, you can escape it with a backslash (\).
• The Designer does not validate the SQL.
Note: You can also enter pre- and post-session SQL commands on the Properties tab of the Source Qualifier
transformation.
Working with Relational Targets in a Mapping 133

Overriding the Target Table Name
You can override the target table name in the target instance of a mapping. Override the target table name
when you use a single mapping to load data to different target tables. Enter a table name in the target table
name. You can also enter a parameter or variable. You can use mapping parameters, mapping variables,
session parameters, workflow variables, or worklet variables in the target table name. For example, you can
use a session parameter, $ParamTgtTable, as the target table name, and set $ParamTgtTable to the target
table name in the parameter file.
To override a target table name:
1. In the Designer, open the Mapping Designer.

2. Double-click the title bar of a relational target instance in the mapping.
3. On the Properties tab, enter the target table name. Or, enter a parameter or variable name in the Target
Table Name field.
If you use a user-defined mapping parameter, mapping variable, workflow variable, or worklet variable,
you must declare the parameter or variable.
4. Click OK.
5. If you use a parameter or variable for the target table name, define the parameter or variable in the
appropriate section of the parameter file.
Validating a Mapping
When you develop a mapping, you must configure it so the Integration Service can read and process the
entire mapping. The Designer marks a mapping invalid when it detects errors that will prevent the Integration
Service from running sessions associated with the mapping.
The Designer marks a mapping valid for the following reasons:
• Connection validation. Required ports are connected and that all connections are valid.
• Expression validation. All expressions are valid.
• Object validation. The independent object definition matches the instance in the mapping.
• Data flow validation. The data must be able to flow from the sources to the targets without hanging at
blocking transformations.
Connection Validation
The Designer performs connection validation each time you connect ports in a mapping and each time you
validate or save a mapping. When you connect ports, the Designer verifies that you make valid connections.
When you save or validate a mapping, the Designer verifies that the connections are valid and that all
required ports are connected. When you save or validate a mapping, the Designer makes the following
connection validations:
• At least one source and one target must be connected.

• Source qualifiers must be mapped to a target.
• Mapplets must be connected. At least one mapplet input port and output port is connected to the
mapping. If the mapplet includes a source qualifier that uses an SQL override, the Designer prompts you
to connect all mapplet output ports to the mapping.

• Datatypes between ports must be compatible. If you change a port datatype to one that is incompatible
with the port it is connected to, the Designer generates an error and invalidates the mapping. For
example, you have two Date/Time ports connected, and you change one port to a Decimal. The Designer
invalidates the mapping. You can however, change the datatype if it remains compatible with the
connected ports, such as Char and Varchar.
Related Topics:
• “Connecting Mapping Objects ” on page 115
Expression Validation
You can validate an expression in a transformation while you are developing a mapping. If you did not correct
the errors, the Designer writes the error messages in the Output window when you save or validate the
mapping.
If you delete input ports used in an expression, the Designer marks the mapping as invalid.
Object Validation
When you validate or save a mapping, the Designer verifies that the definitions of the independent objects,
such as sources or mapplets, match the instance in the mapping. If any object changes while you configure
the mapping, the mapping might contain errors.
If any object changes while you are not configuring the mapping, the Designer and other PowerCenter Client
applications track the effects of these changes on the mappings. The Repository Manager displays the status
of mappings, so you can see if a mapping is valid or not. If you notice that a mapping is invalid, you can open
the mapping and validate it to see the error messages in the Output window.
Data Flow Validation

When you validate or save a mapping, the Designer verifies that the data can flow from all sources in a target
load order group to the targets without the Integration Service blocking all sources.
Mappings that include blocking transformations might hang at runtime with any of the following mapping
configurations:
• You connect one source pipeline to multiple input groups of the blocking transformation.
• You connect the sources and transformations in a target load order group in such a way that multiple
blocking transformations could possibly block all source pipelines. Depending on the source data used in
a session, a blocking transformation might block data from one source while it waits for a row from a
different source.
When you save or validate a mapping with one of these configurations, the Designer marks the mapping
invalid. When the Designer marks a mapping invalid because the mapping violates data flow validation, you
must configure the mapping differently, or use a non-blocking transformation where possible.
The following figure shows mappings that are invalid because one source provides data for multiple input
groups of a blocking transformation:
Validating a Mapping 135

To make the mappings valid, use a non-blocking transformation for MGT1 or create two instances of the
same source and connect them to the blocking transformation.
The following figure shows two similar mappings, one which is valid, one which is invalid:
Mapping A contains two multigroup transformations that block data, MGT1 and MGT2. If you could run this
session, MGT1 might block data from S1 while waiting for a row from S2. And MGT2 might block data from
S2 while waiting for a row from S1. The blocking transformations would block both source pipelines and the
session would hang. Therefore, the Designer marks the mapping invalid.
Mapping B contains one multigroup transformation that blocks data, MGT1. Blocking transformations can
never block all input groups, so MGT1 might block either S1 or S2, but never both. MGT2 is not a blocking
transformation, so it will never block data. Therefore, this session will not hang at runtime due to blocking.
The Designer marks the mapping valid.
Steps to Validate a Mapping

You can validate a mapping while you are working on it through the Designer. Also, when you click
Repository > Save, the Designer validates all mappings since the last time you saved. When you validate or
save a mapping the results of the validation appear in the Output window. The Repository Manager also
displays whether a mapping is valid.
To validate a mapping, check out and open the mapping, and click Mappings > Validate.
If the Output window is not open, click View > Output Window. Review any errors to determine how to fix the
mapping.
Validating Multiple Mappings

You can validate multiple mappings without fetching them into the workspace. To validate multiple mappings
you must select and validate the mappings from either a query results view or a view object dependencies
list.

Note: If you use the Repository Manager, you can select and validate multiple mappings from the Navigator.
You can save and optionally check in mappings that change from invalid to valid status as a result of the
validation.
To validate multiple mappings:
1. Select mappings from either a query or a view dependencies list.

2. Right-click one of the selected mappings and choose Validate.
The Validate Objects dialog box displays.
3. Choose whether to save objects and check in objects that you validate.
Using the Workflow Generation Wizard

Use the Workflow Generation Wizard to generate sessions and workflows from a mapping. The mapping can
use relational or flat file sources and targets.
Launch the Workflow Generation Wizard from one of the following locations, based on what you want to
generate:
• Menu options. Use the Workflow Generation Wizard to create one workflow and session for one
mapping.
• Import Mapping Template Wizard. Use the Workflow Generation Wizard to create workflows and
sessions for multiple mappings.
Before you use the Workflow Generation Wizard, verify that the mapping is valid, and that the Integration
Service and connection objects have been created. Verify that the mapping uses relational or flat file sources
and targets.
The Workflow Generation Wizard allows you to complete the following steps:
1. Specify the type of session or workflow you want to generate.

2. Specify the Integration Service, connection settings, and workflow and session name prefixes. The
values you specify in the second step apply to all sessions and workflows you configure.
3. Change the workflow name, session name, and Integration Service. You can also configure connection
settings. The values you specify in the third step apply to the workflow and session you configure
The last page of the wizard displays a list of workflows or sessions that were generated and the status of the
workflows and sessions.
Note: Use connection variables in a session that the Workflow Generation Wizard creates, edit the session
properties in the Workflow Manager after the Workflow Generation Wizard creates the session in the
repository.
Workflow Generation Wizard Steps

The options that appear in the wizard depend on the type of workflow or session you generate and the
method you use to launch the Workflow Generation Wizard.
Using the Workflow Generation Wizard 137

To use the Workflow Generation Wizard:
1. Open a mapping in the Mapping Designer workspace and select the mapping. Then, select Mappings >
Generate Workflows.
You can also launch the Workflow Generation Wizard from the Import Mapping Template Wizard.
2. Select the type of workflow or session you want to generate:
• Reusable Session
• Workflow with Reusable Session
• Workflow with Non-Reusable Session
3. Click Next.
4. Specify the Integration Service, connection settings, and the workflow and session name prefix.
5. To change a connection object, click in the connection object field. Click the open button to open the
Connection Browser and specify a connection object.
To change the filename for a flat file, edit the file name in the connection object field.
6. Click Next.
7. Change the workflow name, session name, or Integration Service.
8. Click the configure button to configure connection settings.
The Workflow Settings dialog displays the following tabs:
Tabs Description
Connections Configure source, target, and transformation connection information.
Properties Configure source and target session properties.
Reader/Writer Configure readers and writers for the source and target instances in the mapping.
9. Click Next.
10. Review the status and click Finish.
Troubleshooting Mappings
When I save a mapping, the Designer indicates that it contains errors.
When you save a mapping, the Designer checks it for errors, such as targets that do not receive data from
any sources. While you can save an invalid mapping, you cannot run a session using it.
The Designer does not allow me to connect two ports in a mapping.

The Designer performs validation when you connect ports. You cannot connect an input port to an input port,
or two ports with incompatible datatypes. Check the error message displayed when the Designer prevented
you from making the connection.
I cannot connect multiple sources to one target.

This is not allowed. These are possible workarounds:
1. All targets are reusable. You can add the same target to the mapping multiple times. Then, connect each
source qualifier to each target.
2. Join the sources in a Source Qualifier transformation. Then, remove the WHERE clause from the SQL
query.
3. Join the sources in a Joiner transformation.
When I click and drag to create a connection between ports, the Designer copies the port instead.
Change the mode in which you are working by clicking Layout > Link Columns. Now, when you drag between
columns, the Designer tries to link them instead of copying the selected port.
When I validate a mapping, I cannot see the results of the test.

Make sure that you have the Output window open when you validate the mapping. Click View > Output
Window to see the results of the validation.
I entered a custom query, but it is not working when I run the workflow.
Be sure to test this setting for the source qualifier before you run the workflow. Return to the source qualifier
and open the dialog box in which you entered the custom query. You can connect to a database and click the
Validate button to test the SQL. The Designer shows you any errors exist that in the SQL you entered.
Review the session logs if you need more information.
Troubleshooting Mappings 139

CHAPTER 6
Mapplets
• Mapplets Overview, 140

• Understanding Mapplet Input and Output , 141
• Using the Mapplet Designer, 143
• Using Mapplets in Mappings, 145
• Rules and Guidelines for Mapplets, 147
• Tips for Mapplets, 148
Mapplets Overview
A mapplet is a reusable object that you create in the Mapplet Designer. It contains a set of transformations
and lets you reuse the transformation logic in multiple mappings.
For example, if you have several fact tables that require a series of dimension keys, you can create a
mapplet containing a series of Lookup transformations to find each dimension key. You can then use the
mapplet in each fact table mapping, rather than recreate the same lookup logic in each mapping.
When you use a mapplet in a mapping, you use an instance of the mapplet. Like a reusable transformation,
any change made to the mapplet is inherited by all instances of the mapplet.
Mapplets help simplify mappings in the following ways:
• Include source definitions. Use multiple source definitions and source qualifiers to provide source data
for a mapping.
• Accept data from sources in a mapping. If you want the mapplet to receive data from the mapping, use
an Input transformation to receive source data.
• Include multiple transformations. A mapplet can contain as many transformations as you need.
• Pass data to multiple transformations. You can create a mapplet to feed data to multiple
transformations. Each Output transformation in a mapplet represents one output group in a mapplet.
• Contain unused ports. You do not have to connect all mapplet input and output ports in a mapping.
140
Understanding Mapplet Input and Output
To use a mapplet in a mapping, you must configure it for input and output. In addition to transformation logic
that you configure, a mapplet has the following components:
• Mapplet input. You can pass data into a mapplet using source definitions or Input transformations or
both. When you use an Input transformation, you connect it to the source pipeline in the mapping.
• Mapplet output. Each mapplet must contain one or more Output transformations to pass data from the
mapplet into the mapping.
• Mapplet ports. Mapplet ports display only in the Mapping Designer. Mapplet ports consist of input ports
from Input transformations and output ports from Output transformations. If a mapplet uses source
definitions rather than Input transformations for input, it does not contain any input ports in the mapping.
Mapplet Input
Mapplet input can originate from a source definition and/or from an Input transformation in the mapplet. You
can create multiple pipelines in a mapplet. Use multiple source definitions and source qualifiers or Input
transformations. You can also use a combination of source definitions and Input transformations.
Using Source Definitions for Mapplet Input

Use one or more source definitions in a mapplet to provide source data. When you use the mapplet in a
mapping, it is the first object in the mapping pipeline and contains no input ports.
Using Input Transformations for Mapplet Input

Use an Input transformation in a mapplet when you want the mapplet to receive input from a source in a
mapping. When you use the mapplet in a mapping, the Input transformation provides input ports so you can
pass data through the mapplet. Each port in the Input transformation connected to another transformation in
the mapplet becomes a mapplet input port. Input transformations can receive data from a single active
source. Unconnected ports do not display in the Mapping Designer.
You can connect an Input transformation to multiple transformations in a mapplet. However, you cannot
connect a single port in the Input transformation to multiple transformations in the mapplet.
Mapplet Output
Use an Output transformation in a mapplet to pass data through the mapplet into a mapping. A mapplet must
contain at least one Output transformation with at least one connected port in the mapplet. Each connected
port in an Output transformation displays as a mapplet output port in a mapping. Each Output transformation
in a mapplet displays as an output group in a mapping. An output group can pass data to multiple pipelines in
a mapping.
Viewing Mapplet Input and Output

Mapplets and mapplet ports display differently in the Mapplet Designer and the Mapping Designer.
Understanding Mapplet Input and Output 141

The following figure shows a mapplet with both an Input transformation and an Output transformation:
When you use the mapplet in a mapping, the mapplet object displays only the ports from the Input and
Output transformations. These are referred to as the mapplet input and mapplet output ports.
The following figure shows the same mapplet in the Mapping Designer:
The mapplet displays the input ports from the Input transformation. The output ports from the CODES_MAP0
Output transformation appear below the input ports.
You can expand the mapplet in the Mapping Designer by selecting it and clicking Mappings > Expand. This
expands the mapplet within the mapping for view. Transformation icons within an expanded mapplet display
as shaded.
You can open or iconize all the transformations in the mapplet and mapping. You cannot edit any of the
properties, navigate to other folders, or save the repository while the mapplet is expanded.
The following figure shows an expanded mapplet in the Mapping Designer:
142 Chapter 6: Mapplets

In an expanded mapping, you do not see the Input and Output transformations.
Using the Mapplet Designer

After you create a mapplet, you can validate or edit the mapplet in the Mapplet Designer. You can also use
the Designer to copy mapplets, export and import mapplets, view links between ports in a mapplet, create
shortcuts to mapplets, and delete mapplets from the repository.
To create and configure a mapplet in the Mapplet Designer, complete the following steps:
1. Create a mapplet. Click Mapplets > Create from the menu in the Mapplet Designer. The recommended
naming convention for mapplets is mplt_MappletName.
2. Create mapplet transformation logic. Create and link transformations in the same manner as in a
mapping.
3. Create mapplet ports.
Creating a Mapplet
A mapplet can be active or passive depending on the transformations in the mapplet. Active mapplets contain
one or more active transformations. Passive mapplets contain only passive transformations. When you use a
mapplet in a mapping, all transformation rules apply to the mapplet depending on the mapplet type. For
example, as with an active transformation, you cannot concatenate data from an active mapplet with a
different pipeline.
Use the following rules and guidelines when you add transformations to a mapplet:
• If you use a Sequence Generator transformation, you must use a reusable Sequence Generator
transformation.
• If you use a Stored Procedure transformation, you must configure the Stored Procedure Type to be
Normal.
• You cannot include PowerMart 3.5-style LOOKUP functions in a mapplet.
• You cannot include the following objects in a mapplet:
- Normalizer transformations
- COBOL sources
- XML Source Qualifier transformations
- XML sources
- Target definitions
- Other mapplets
Although reusable transformations and shortcuts in a mapplet can be used, to protect the validity of the
mapplet, use a copy of a transformation instead. Reusable transformations and shortcuts inherit changes to
their original transformations. This might invalidate the mapplet and the mappings that use the mapplet.
Validating Mapplets
The Designer validates a mapplet when you save it. You can also validate a mapplet using the Mapplets >
Validate menu command. When you validate a mapplet, the Designer writes all relevant messages about the
mapplet in the Output window.
Using the Mapplet Designer 143

The Designer validates the mapplet pipeline in the same way it validates a mapping. The Designer also
performs the following checks specific to mapplets:
• The mapplet can contain Input transformations and source definitions with at least one port connected to
a transformation in the mapplet.
• The mapplet contains at least one Output transformation with at least one port connected to a
transformation in the mapplet.
Editing Mapplets
You can edit a mapplet in the Mapplet Designer. The Designer validates the changes when you save the
mapplet. When you save changes to a mapplet, all instances of the mapplet and all shortcuts to the mapplet
inherit the changes. These changes might invalidate mappings that use the mapplet.
To see what mappings or shortcuts may be affected by changes you make to a mapplet, select the mapplet in
the Navigator, right-click, and select Dependencies. Or, click Mapplets > Dependencies from the menu.
You can make the following changes to a mapplet without affecting the validity of existing mappings and
sessions:
• Add input or output ports.

• Change port names or comments.
• Change Input or Output transformation names or comments.
• Change transformation names, comments, or properties.
• Change port default values for transformations in the mapplet.
• Add or remove transformations in the mapplet, providing you do not change the mapplet type from active
to passive or from passive to active.
Use the following rules and guidelines when you edit a mapplet that is used by mappings:
• Do not delete a port from the mapplet. The Designer deletes mapplet ports in the mapping when you
delete links to an Input or Output transformation or when you delete ports connected to an Input or Output
transformation.
• Do not change the datatype, precision, or scale of a mapplet port. The datatype, precision, and scale
of a mapplet port is defined by the transformation port to which it is connected in the mapplet. Therefore, if
you edit a mapplet to change the datatype, precision, or scale of a port connected to a port in an Input or
Output transformation, you change the mapplet port.
• Do not change the mapplet type. If you remove all active transformations from an active mapplet, the
mapplet becomes passive. If you add an active transformation to a passive mapplet, the mapplet becomes
active.
Mapplets and Mappings

The following mappings tasks can also be performed on mapplets:
• Set tracing level. You can set the tracing level on individual transformations within a mapplet in the same
manner as in a mapping.
• Copy mapplet. You can copy a mapplet from one folder to another as you would any other repository
object. After you copy the mapplet, it appears in the Mapplets node of the new folder.
If you make changes to a mapplet, but you do not want to overwrite the original mapplet, you can make a
copy of the mapplet by clicking Mapplets > Copy As.

• Export and import mapplets. You can export a mapplet to an XML file or import a mapplet from an XML
file through the Designer. You might want to use the export and import feature to copy a mapplet to
another repository.
• Delete mapplets. When you delete a mapplet, you delete all instances of the mapplet. This invalidates
each mapping containing an instance of the mapplet or a shortcut to the mapplet.
• Compare mapplets. You can compare two mapplets to find differences between them. For example, if
you have mapplets with the same name in different folders, you can compare them to see if they differ.
• Compare instances within a mapplet. You can compare instances in a mapplet to see if they contain
similar attributes. For example, you can compare a source instance with another source instance, or a
transformation with another transformation. You compare instances within a mapplet in the same way you
compare instances within a mapping.
• Create shortcuts to mapplets. You can create a shortcut to a mapplet if the mapplet is in a shared
folder. When you use a shortcut to a mapplet in a mapping, the shortcut inherits any changes you might
make to the mapplet. However, these changes might not appear until the Integration Service runs the
workflow using the shortcut. Therefore, only use a shortcut to a mapplet when you do not expect to edit
the mapplet.
• Add a description. You can add a description to the mapplet in the Mapplet Designer in the same
manner as in a mapping. You can also add a description to the mapplet instance in a mapping. When you
add a description, you can also create links to documentation files. The links must be a valid URL or file
path to reference the business documentation.
• View links to a port. You can view links to a port in a mapplet in the same way you would view links to a
port in a mapping. You can view the forward path, the backward path, or both paths.
• Propagate port attributes. You can propagate port attributes in a mapplet in the same way you would
propagate port attributes in a mapping. You can propagate attributes forward, backward, or in both
directions.
Using Mapplets in Mappings

In a mapping, a mapplet has input and output ports that you can connect to other transformations in the
mapping. You do not have to connect all mapplet ports in a mapping. However, if the mapplet contains an
SQL override, you must connect all mapplet output ports in the mapping.
Like a reusable transformation, when you drag a mapplet into a mapping, the Designer creates an instance of
the mapplet. You can enter comments for the instance of the mapplet in the mapping. You cannot otherwise
edit the mapplet in the Mapping Designer.
If you edit the mapplet in the Mapplet Designer, each instance of the mapplet inherits the changes.
The PowerCenter Repository Reports has a Mapplets list report that you use to view all mappings using a
particular mapplet.
To use a mapplet, complete the following steps:
1. Drag the mapplet into the mapping.

2. If the mapplet contains input ports, connect at least one mapplet input port to a transformation in the
mapping.
3. Connect at least one mapplet output port to a transformation in the mapping.
Using Mapplets in Mappings 145

Creating and Configuring Mapplet Ports
After creating transformation logic for a mapplet, you can create mapplet ports. Use an Input transformation
to define mapplet input ports if the mapplet contains no source definitions. Use an Output transformation to
create a group of output ports. Only connected ports in an Input or Output transformation become mapplet
input or output ports in a mapping. Unconnected ports do not display when you use the mapplet in a
mapping.
You can create a mapplet port in the following ways:
• Manually create ports in the Input/Output transformation. You can create port names in Input and
Output transformations. You can also enter a description for each port name. The port has no defined
datatype, precision, or scale until you connect it to a transformation in the mapplet.
• Drag a port from another transformation. You can create an input or output port by dragging a port
from another transformation into the Input or Output transformation. The new port inherits the port name,
description, datatype, and scale of the original port. You can edit the new port name and description in the
transformation. If you change a port connection, the Designer updates the Input or Output transformation
port to match the attributes of the new connection.
You can view the datatype, precision, and scale of available mapplet ports when you use the mapplet in a
mapping.
Connecting to Mapplet Input Ports

When using a mapplet with input ports in a mapping, you connect the mapplet input ports to the mapping
pipeline. You can pass data into a mapplet only when it originates from a single active transformation.
For example, in the following figure, the mapplet mpltLookupAndCompare accepts data from two Expression
transformations because data from both transformations originate from a single source qualifier. The Source
Qualifier SQ_CUSTOMERS is the active transformation providing mapplet source data:
Connecting to Mapplet Output Groups

Each Output transformation displays as an output group when you use a mapplet in a mapping. Connect the
mapplet output ports to the mapping pipeline. Use Autolink to connect the ports.

Use the following rules and guidelines when you connect mapplet output ports in the mapping:
• When a mapplet contains a source qualifier that has an override for the default SQL query, you must
connect all of the source qualifier output ports to the next transformation within the mapplet.
• If the mapplet contains more than one source qualifier, use a Joiner transformation to join the output into
one pipeline.
• If the mapplet contains only one source qualifier, you must connect the mapplet output ports to separate
pipelines. You cannot use a Joiner transformation to join the output.
If you need to join the pipelines, you can create two mappings to perform this task:
- Use the mapplet in the first mapping and write data in each pipeline to separate targets.
- Use the targets as sources in the second mapping to join data, then perform any additional
transformation necessary.
Viewing the Mapplet

When you use a mapplet in a mapping, the Designer displays the mapplet object, which contains only the
input and output ports of the mapplet. However, you can expand the mapplet by clicking Mappings > Expand
from the menu.
When the Designer expands the mapplet, it displays the entire mapping with the mapplet transformations. It
does not display the Input and Output transformations. You can view the mapping in this expanded form, but
you cannot edit it. To continue designing the mapping, click Mappings > Unexpand.
Setting the Target Load Plan

When you use a mapplet in a mapping, the Mapping Designer lets you set the target load plan for sources
within the mapplet.
Pipeline Partitioning
If you have the partitioning option, you can increase the number of partitions in a pipeline to improve session
performance. Increasing the number of partitions allows the Integration Service to create multiple
connections to sources and process partitions of source data concurrently.
When you create a session, the Workflow Manager validates each pipeline in the mapping for partitioning.
You can specify multiple partitions in a pipeline if the Integration Service can maintain data consistency when
it processes the partitioned data.
Some partitioning restrictions apply to mapplets.
Rules and Guidelines for Mapplets

The following list summarizes the rules and guidelines that appear throughout this chapter:
• You can connect an Input transformation to multiple transformations in a mapplet. However, you cannot
connect a single port in the Input transformation to multiple transformations in the mapplet.
• An Input transformation must receive data from a single active source.
• A mapplet must contain at least one Input transformation or source definition with at least one port
connected to a transformation in the mapplet.
Rules and Guidelines for Mapplets 147

• A mapplet must contain at least one Output transformation with at least one port connected to another
transformation in the mapping.
• When a mapplet contains a source qualifier that has an override for the default SQL query, you must
connect all of the source qualifier output ports to the next transformation within the mapplet.
• If the mapplet contains more than one source qualifier, use a Joiner transformation to join the output into
one pipeline. If the mapplet contains only one source qualifier, you must connect the mapplet output ports
to separate pipelines. You cannot use a Joiner transformation to join the output.
• When you edit a mapplet, you might invalidate mappings if you change the mapplet type from passive to
active.
• If you delete ports in the mapplet when the mapplet is used in a mapping, you can invalidate the mapping.
• Do not change the datatype, precision, or scale of a mapplet port when the mapplet is used by a mapping.
• If you use a Sequence Generator transformation, you must use a reusable Sequence Generator
transformation.
• If you use a Stored Procedure transformation, you must configure the Stored Procedure Type to be
Normal.
• You cannot include PowerMart 3.5-style LOOKUP functions in a mapplet.
• You cannot include the following objects in a mapplet:
- Normalizer transformations
- Cobol sources
- XML Source Qualifier transformations
- XML sources
- Target definitions
- Pre- and post- session stored procedures
- Other mapplets
Tips for Mapplets

Enter comments for Input and Output transformations.
In a mapping, you can view comments associated with an Input or Output transformation by holding the
pointer over the transformation name in the mapplet. You can clarify the use of a mapplet and its ports by
creating descriptive comments or instructions in the Description field of Input and Output transformations.
You can even include links to business documentation.
Create an Output transformation for each output group you need.

You can pass data from each mapplet output group to a different mapping pipeline. Create an Output
transformation for each output group you need.
To create mapplets from existing mappings, copy the objects from the mapping into the Mapplet
Designer.
Configure Sequence Generator caches appropriately.

You can include a reusable Sequence Generator transformation in a mapplet. If you use the mapplet in
several mappings and each mapping expends a large number of values in a session, you might want to
configure the cache size for reusable Sequence Generator to limit the number of unused values.
To keep existing mappings valid when you edit a mapplet used in a mapping:
• Do not delete connected ports in an Input or Output transformation.
• Do not change the datatype, precision, or scale of connected ports in an Input or Output transformation.
• Do not change a passive mapplet to an active mapplet or an active mapplet to a passive mapplet.
Tips for Mapplets 149

CHAPTER 7
Mapping Parameters and

Variables
• Mapping Parameters and Variables Overview, 150

• Mapping Parameters, 154
• Mapping Variables, 156
• Defining Expression Strings in Parameter Files, 162
• Tips for Mapping Parameters and Variables, 162
• Troubleshooting Mapping Parameters and Variables, 163
Mapping Parameters and Variables Overview

In the Designer, use mapping parameters and variables to make mappings more flexible. Mapping
parameters and variables represent values in mappings and mapplets.
If you declare mapping parameters and variables in a mapping, you can reuse a mapping by altering the
parameter or variable values of the mapping in the session. Reuse a mapping to reduce the overhead of
creating multiple mappings when only certain attributes of a mapping need to be changed.
When you use a mapping parameter or variable in a mapping, you first declare the mapping parameter or
variable for use in each mapplet or mapping. Then, you define a value for the mapping parameter or variable
before you run the session.
You can declare mapping parameters with the same name for use in a mapplet and a mapping. If the
mapping parameter in a mapplet does not have a value, the parameter takes the value of the mapping
parameter with the same name in the mapping.
Use mapping parameters and variables in a mapping to incrementally extract data. Use mapping parameters
or variables in the source filter of a Source Qualifier transformation to determine the beginning time stamp
and end time stamp for incrementally extracting data.
For example, you can create a user-defined mapping variable $$LastUpdateDateTime to save the time stamp
of the last row that the Integration Service read in the previous session. In the source filter, use $
$LastUpdateDateTime for the beginning time stamp and the built-in variable $$$SessStartTime for the end
150
time stamp. Use the following filter to incrementally extract data based on the SALES.sales_datetime column
in the source:
SALES.sales_datetime > TO_DATE (‘$$LastUpdateDateTime’) AND SALES.sales_datetime <
TO_DATE (‘$$$SessStartTime’)
Mapping Parameters
A mapping parameter represents a constant value that you can define before running a session. A mapping
parameter retains the same value throughout the entire session.
When you use a mapping parameter, you declare and use the parameter in a mapping or mapplet. Then
define the value of the parameter in a parameter file. The Integration Service evaluates all references to the
parameter to that value.
For example, you want to use the same session to extract transaction records for each of the customers
individually. Instead of creating a separate mapping for each customer account, you can create a mapping
parameter to represent a single customer account. Then use the parameter in a source filter to extract only
data for that customer account. Before running the session, you enter the value of the parameter in the
parameter file.
To reuse the same mapping to extract records for other customer accounts, you can enter a new value for
the parameter in the parameter file and run the session. Or, you can create a parameter file for each
customer account and start the session with a different parameter file each time using pmcmd. By using a
parameter file, you reduce the overhead of creating multiple mappings and sessions to extract transaction
records for different customer accounts.
When you want to use the same value for a mapping parameter each time you run the session, use the same
parameter file for each session run. When you want to change the value of a mapping parameter between
sessions you can perform one of the following tasks:
• Update the parameter file between sessions.

• Create a different parameter file and configure the session to use the new file.
• Remove the parameter file from the session properties. The Integration Service uses the parameter value
in the pre-session variable assignment. If there is no pre-session variable assignment, the Integration
Service uses the configured initial value of the parameter in the mapping.
Mapping Variables
Unlike a mapping parameter, a mapping variable represents a value that can change through the session.
The Integration Service saves the value of a mapping variable to the repository at the end of each successful
session run and uses that value the next time you run the session.
When you use a mapping variable, you declare the variable in the mapping or mapplet, and then use a
variable function in the mapping to change the value of the variable. At the beginning of a session, the
Integration Service evaluates references to a variable to determine the start value. At the end of a successful
session, the Integration Service saves the final value of the variable to the repository. The next time you run
the session, the Integration Service evaluates references to the variable to the saved value. To override the
saved value, define the start value of the variable in a parameter file or assign a value in the pre-session
variable assignment in the session properties.
Use mapping variables to perform incremental reads of a source. For example, the customer accounts in the
mapping parameter example above are numbered from 001 to 065, incremented by one. Instead of creating a
mapping parameter, you can create a mapping variable with an initial value of 001. In the mapping, use a
variable function to increase the variable value by one. The first time the Integration Service runs the session,
it extracts the records for customer account 001. At the end of the session, it increments the variable by one
and saves that value to the repository. The next time the Integration Service runs the session, it extracts the
Mapping Parameters and Variables Overview 151

data for the next customer account, 002. It also increments the variable value so the next session extracts
and looks up data for customer account 003.
Using Mapping Parameters and Variables

You can create mapping parameters and variables in the Mapping Designer or Mapplet Designer. Once
created, mapping parameters and variables appear on the Variables tab of the Expression Editor. Use them
in any expression in the mapplet or mapping. The Designer validates mapping parameters and variables in
the Expression Editor of mapplets and mappings.
Use mapping parameters and variables in a source qualifier in a mapplet or mapping. When you use mapping
parameters and variables in a Source Qualifier transformation, the Designer expands them before passing
the query to the source database for validation. This allows the source database to validate the query.
When you create a reusable transformation in the Transformation Developer, use any mapping parameter or
variable. Since a reusable transformation is not contained within any mapplet or mapping, the Designer
validates the usage of any mapping parameter or variable in the expressions of reusable transformation.
When you use the reusable transformation in a mapplet or mapping, the Designer validates the expression
again. If the parameter or variable is not defined in the mapplet or mapping, or if it is used incorrectly in the
reusable transformation, the Designer logs an error when you validate the mapplet or mapping.
When the Designer validates a mapping variable in a reusable transformation, it treats the variable as an
Integer datatype.
You cannot use mapping parameters and variables interchangeably between a mapplet and a mapping.
Mapping parameters and variables declared for a mapping cannot be used within a mapplet. Similarly, you
cannot use a mapping parameter or variable declared for a mapplet in a mapping.
Initial and Default Values

When you declare a mapping parameter or variable in a mapping or a mapplet, you can enter an initial value.
The Integration Service uses the configured initial value for a mapping parameter when the parameter is not
defined in the parameter file. Similarly, the Integration Service uses the configured initial value for a mapping
variable when the variable value is not defined in the parameter file, and there is no saved variable value in
the repository.
When the Integration Service needs an initial value, and you did not declare an initial value for the parameter
or variable, the Integration Service uses a default value based on the datatype of the parameter or variable.
The following table lists the default values the Integration Service uses for different types of data:
Data Default Value
String Empty string.
Numeric 0
Datetime 1/1/1753 A.D. or 1/1/1 when the Integration Service is configured for compatibility with 4.0.
For example, you create a new mapping using an Integer mapping variable, $$MiscellaneousExpenses. You
do not configure an initial value for the variable or define it in a parameter file. The first time you run a
session with the mapping, the Integration Service uses the default value for numeric datatypes, 0.
Or, if you create a mapping parameter $$MiscellaneousCosts to represent additional expenses that might
become relevant in the future, but do not currently exist in source data. You configure the parameter for a
152 Chapter 7: Mapping Parameters and Variables

Decimal datatype. Since you want $$MiscellaneousCosts to evaluate to 0 when you do not have additional
expenses, you set the initial value to 0.
As long as you do not define the parameter value in the parameter file, the Integration Service replaces $
$MiscellaneousCosts with 0. When you want to include miscellaneous expenses in mapping calculations, set
$$MiscellaneousCosts to that value in the parameter file.
Using String Parameters and Variables

When you enter mapping parameters and variables of a string datatype in a Source Qualifier transformation,
use a string identifier appropriate for the source database. When the Integration Service expands a
parameter or variable in a Source Qualifier transformation, the Integration Service replaces it with its start
value, and then passes the expanded query to the source database. Most databases require single quotation
marks around string values.
When you enter string parameters or variables using the PowerCenter transformation language, do not use
additional quotes. The Integration Service recognizes mapping parameter and variable naming syntax in the
PowerCenter transformation language. For example, you might use a parameter named $$State in the filter
for a Source Qualifier transformation to extract rows for a particular state:
STATE = ‘$$State’
During the session, the Integration Service replaces the parameter with a string. If $$State is defined as MD
in the parameter file, the Integration Service replaces the parameter as follows:
STATE = ‘MD’
You can perform a similar filter in the Filter transformation using the PowerCenter transformation language as
follows:
STATE = $$State
If you enclose the parameter in single quotes in the Filter transformation, the Integration Service reads it as
the string literal “$$State” instead of replacing the parameter with “MD.”
Using Datetime Parameters and Variables

When you use a datetime parameter or variable in the Source Qualifier transformation, you might need to
change the date format to the format used in the source.
Code Page Relaxation

You can configure the Integration Service to relax code page validation when you run the Integration Service
in Unicode data movement mode. However, you might get unexpected results in the following situations:
• The mapping variable value that the Integration Service saves in the repository is not compatible with the
repository code page.
For example, the repository uses the ISO 8859-1 Latin1 code page and you configure the Integration
Service to relax code page validation. If the mapping variable value contains Japanese character data,
such as JapanEUC, the saved mapping variable value in the repository could be incorrect. There could be
data loss converting from the JapanEUC code page to the Latin1 code page. Make sure the saved
mapping variable value is two-way compatible with the repository code page.
To ensure the Integration Service can write all metadata to the repository, use 7-bit ASCII characters for
all repository metadata or use UTF-8 for the repository.
Mapping Parameters and Variables Overview 153

• The parameter file contains characters that are not compatible with the Integration Service code page.
The Integration Service interprets the data in the parameter file using the Integration Service code page.
For example, the Integration Service uses the ISO 8859-1 Latin1 code page and you configure the
Integration Service to relax code page validation. If you create a parameter file and use Greek character
data, such as ISO 8859-7, the value the Integration Service reads from the file could be incorrect. There
could be data loss converting from the ISO 8859-7 code page to the Latin1 code page. Make sure the
characters in the parameter file are a subset of the Integration Service code page.
Mapping Parameters
In the Designer, you can create a mapping parameter in a mapplet or mapping. After you create a parameter,
it appears in the Expression Editor. You can then use the parameter in any expression in the mapplet or
mapping. You can also use parameters in a source qualifier filter, user-defined join, or extract override, and
in the Expression Editor of reusable transformations.
Before you run a session, define the mapping parameter value in a parameter file for the session. Use any
constant value. During the session, the Integration Service evaluates all references to the parameter to the
specified value. If the parameter is not defined in the parameter file, the Integration Service uses the user-
defined initial value for the parameter. If the initial value is not defined, the Integration Service uses a default
value based on the datatype of the mapping parameter.
You can change the value of a mapping parameter between sessions by editing the parameter file or by
changing the parameter file used by the session.
You might use a mapping parameter instead of a database lookup. For example, you want to perform
calculations using monthly gross earnings. Instead of using a Lookup transformation to connect to a database
table for that information, you can create a gross earnings mapping parameter and update its value in the
parameter file each month to reflect current earnings.
You might also use a mapping parameter in conjunction with a session parameter to reuse a mapping and
session. For example, you have transactional data from different states stored in the same table in different
databases, and you want to perform the same calculations on all data, while changing the state sales tax
accordingly. Instead of creating a separate mapping and session for each state, you can create one mapping
with a sales tax mapping parameter and a session using a source database connection session parameter.
You can then create a different parameter file for each state. Before running the session, you can change the
parameter file the Integration Service uses by entering a different parameter file name from pmcmd or by
editing the session in the Workflow Manager.
To use a mapping parameter, complete the following steps:
1. Create a mapping parameter.

2. Use the mapping parameter.
3. Define the parameter value.
Step 1. Create a Mapping Parameter

You can create mapping parameters for any mapping or mapplet. You can declare as many mapping
parameters as you need. Once declared, use the parameter in the mapping or mapplet.

To create a mapping parameter:
1. In the Mapping Designer, click Mappings > Parameters and Variables. Or, in the Mapplet Designer, click
Mapplet > Parameters and Variables.
3. Enter the following information and click OK:
Field Description
Name Parameter name. Name parameters $$ParameterName. The syntax for the
parameter name must be $$ followed by any alphanumeric or underscore
characters.
Type Variable or parameter. Select Parameter.
Datatype Datatype of the parameter. Select a valid transformation datatype. Use any datatype
except Binary or Raw.
Precision or Scale Precision and scale of the parameter.
Aggregation Use for variables.
IsExprVar Determines how the Integration Service expands the parameter in an expression
string. If true, the Integration Service expands the parameter before parsing the
expression. If false, the Integration Service expands the parameter after parsing the
expression. Default is false.
Note: If you set this field to true, you must set the parameter datatype to String, or
the Integration Service fails the session.
Initial Value Initial value of the parameter. If you do not set a value for the parameter in the
parameter file, the Integration Service uses this value for the parameter during
sessions. If this value is also undefined, the Integration Service uses a default value
based on the datatype of the mapping variable.
Use any of the following formats for initial values for Date/Time parameters:
- MM/DD/RR
- MM/DD/RR HH24:MI:SS
- MM/DD/YYYY
- MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS.US
Description Description associated with the parameter.
Step 2. Use a Mapping Parameter

After you create a parameter, use it in the Expression Editor of any transformation in a mapping or mapplet.
You can also use it in Source Qualifier transformations and reusable transformations.
In a Source Qualifier transformation, mapping parameters appear on the Variables tab in the SQL Editor. Use
the following rules and guidelines when you use mapping parameters in a Source Qualifier transformation:
• Enclose string parameters in string identifiers appropriate to the source system.

• When necessary, change the format of the datetime parameter to match the format in the source.
You can also use mapping parameters in the Expression Editor. When using mapping parameters in the
Expression Editor, do not enclose string parameters in string identifiers. The Integration Service handles
parameters just like any other port identifiers.
Mapping Parameters 155

Use mapping parameters in reusable transformations.
You can also use mapping parameters in transformation overrides in the session properties in the Workflow
Manager. You can override properties such as a filter or user-defined join in a Source Qualifier
transformation.
Step 3. Define a Parameter Value

Before you run a session, define values for mapping parameters in the parameter file. When you do not
define a parameter in the parameter file, the Integration Service gets the parameter value from another place.
The Integration Service looks for the value in the following order:
1. Value in parameter file

2. Value in pre-session variable assignment
3. Initial value saved in the repository
4. Datatype default value
Mapping Variables
In the Designer, you can create mapping variables in a mapping or mapplet. After you create a mapping
variable, it appears in the Expression Editor. You can then use it in any expression in the mapping or
mapplet. You can also use mapping variables in a source qualifier filter, user-defined join, or extract override,
and in the Expression Editor of reusable transformations.
Unlike mapping parameters, mapping variables are values that can change between sessions. The
Integration Service saves the latest value of a mapping variable to the repository at the end of each
successful session. During the next session run, it evaluates all references to the mapping variable to the
saved value. You can override a saved value with the parameter file. You can also clear all saved values for
the session in the Workflow Manager.
You might use a mapping variable to perform an incremental read of the source. For example, you have a
source table containing timestamped transactions and you want to evaluate the transactions on a daily basis.
Instead of manually entering a session override to filter source data each time you run the session, you can
create a mapping variable, $$IncludeDateTime. In the source qualifier, create a filter to read only rows whose
transaction date equals $$IncludeDateTime, such as:
TIMESTAMP = $$IncludeDateTime
In the mapping, use a variable function to set the variable value to increment one day each time the session
runs. If you set the initial value of $$IncludeDateTime to 8/1/2004, the first time the Integration Service runs
the session, it reads only rows dated 8/1/2004. During the session, the Integration Service sets $
$IncludeDateTime to 8/2/2004. It saves 8/2/2004 to the repository at the end of the session. The next time it
runs the session, it reads only rows from August 2, 2004.
Variable Values
The Integration Service holds two different values for a mapping variable during a session run:
• Start value of a mapping variable

• Current value of a mapping variable

The current value of a mapping variable changes as the session progresses. To use the current value of a
mapping variable within the mapping or in another transformation, create the following expression with the
SETVARIABLE function:
SETVARIABLE($$MAPVAR,NULL)
At the end of a successful session, the Integration Service saves the final current value of a mapping variable
to the repository.
Start Value
The start value is the value of the variable at the start of the session. The start value could be a value defined
in the parameter file for the variable, a value assigned in the pre-session variable assignment, a value saved
in the repository from the previous run of the session, a user defined initial value for the variable, or the
default value based on the variable datatype. The Integration Service looks for the start value in the following
order:
1. Value in parameter file

2. Value in pre-session variable assignment
3. Value saved in the repository
4. Initial value
5. Datatype default value
For example, you create a mapping variable in a mapping or mapplet and enter an initial value, but you do
not define a value for the variable in a parameter file. The first time the Integration Service runs the session,
it evaluates the start value of the variable to the configured initial value. The next time the session runs, the
Integration Service evaluates the start value of the variable to the value saved in the repository. If you want to
override the value saved in the repository before running a session, you need to define a value for the
variable in a parameter file. When you define a mapping variable in the parameter file, the Integration Service
uses this value instead of the value saved in the repository or the configured initial value for the variable.
When you use a mapping variable ('$$MAPVAR') in an expression, the expression always returns the start
value of the mapping variable. If the start value of MAPVAR is 0, then $$MAPVAR returns 0.
Current Value
The current value is the value of the variable as the session progresses. When a session starts, the current
value of a variable is the same as the start value. As the session progresses, the Integration Service
calculates the current value using a variable function that you set for the variable. Unlike the start value of a
mapping variable, the current value can change as the Integration Service evaluates the current value of a
variable as each row passes through the mapping. The final current value for a variable is saved to the
repository at the end of a successful session. When a session fails to complete, the Integration Service does
not update the value of the variable in the repository. The Integration Service states the value saved to the
repository for each mapping variable in the session log.
Variable Datatype and Aggregation Type

When you declare a mapping variable in a mapping, you need to configure the datatype and aggregation type
for the variable.
The datatype you choose for a mapping variable allows the Integration Service to pick an appropriate default
value for the mapping variable. The default is used as the start value of a mapping variable when there is no
value defined for a variable in the parameter file, in the repository, and there is no user defined initial value.
Mapping Variables 157

The Integration Service uses the aggregate type of a mapping variable to determine the final current value of
the mapping variable. When you have a pipeline with multiple partitions, the Integration Service combines the
variable value from each partition and saves the final current variable value into the repository.
You can create a variable with the following aggregation types:
• Count
• Max
• Min
You can configure a mapping variable for a Count aggregation type when it is an Integer or Small Integer.
You can configure mapping variables of any datatype for Max or Min aggregation types.
To keep the variable value consistent throughout the session run, the Designer limits the variable functions
you use with a variable based on aggregation type. For example, use the SetMaxVariable function for a
variable with a Max aggregation type, but not with a variable with a Min aggregation type.
The following table describes the available variable functions and the aggregation types and datatypes you
use with each function:
Variable Function Valid Aggregation Valid Datatype

Types
SetVariable Max or Min All transformation datatypes except binary datatype.
SetMaxVariable Max only All transformation datatypes except binary datatype.
SetMinVariable Min only All transformation datatypes except binary datatype.
SetCountVariable Count only Integer and small integer datatypes only.
For multiple target load order groups, the mapping variable value in a target load order group depends on the
variable aggregation type and the variable value in the previous target load order group. After every target
load order group runs, the Integration Service calculates the mapping variable values to use in the next target
load order group based on the variable aggregation type.
For example, a session contains two target load order groups. You have set Max as the aggregation type of
the mapping variable.
When the first target load order group runs, you have set the following different values using the SetVariable
function for the mapping variable, $$MAPVAR:
1. SetVariable($$MAPVAR,20)
At the end of the first target load order group run, the Integration Service calculates the Max of all the four
values of $$MAPVAR. As the Max of the four values is 60, so the Integration Service uses 60 as the initial
value of the mapping variable, $$MAPVAR, in the next target load order group.

Variable Functions
Variable functions determine how the Integration Service calculates the current value of a mapping variable
in a pipeline. Use variable functions in an expression to set the value of a mapping variable for the next
session run. The transformation language provides the following variable functions to use in a mapping:
• SetMaxVariable. Sets the variable to the maximum value of a group of values. It ignores rows marked for
update, delete, or reject. To use the SetMaxVariable with a mapping variable, the aggregation type of the
mapping variable must be set to Max.
• SetMinVariable. Sets the variable to the minimum value of a group of values. It ignores rows marked for
update, delete, or reject. To use the SetMinVariable with a mapping variable, the aggregation type of the
mapping variable must be set to Min.
• SetCountVariable. Increments the variable value by one. In other words, it adds one to the variable value
when a row is marked for insertion, and subtracts one when the row is marked for deletion. It ignores rows
marked for update or reject. To use the SetCountVariable with a mapping variable, the aggregation type of
the mapping variable must be set to Count.
• SetVariable. Sets the variable to the configured value. At the end of a session, it compares the final
current value of the variable to the start value of the variable. Based on the aggregate type of the variable,
it saves a final value to the repository. To use the SetVariable function with a mapping variable, the
aggregation type of the mapping variable must be set to Max or Min. The SetVariable function ignores
rows marked for delete or reject.
Use variable functions only once for each mapping variable in a pipeline. The Integration Service processes
variable functions as it encounters them in the mapping. The order in which the Integration Service
encounters variable functions in the mapping may not be the same for every session run. This may cause
inconsistent results when you use the same variable function multiple times in a mapping.
The Integration Service does not save the final current value of a mapping variable to the repository when
any of the following conditions are true:
• The session fails to complete.

• The session is configured for a test load.
• The session is a debug session.
• The session runs in debug mode and is configured to discard session output.
Mapping Variables in Mapplets

When you declare a mapping variable for a mapplet and use the mapplet multiple times within the same
mapping, the same mapping variable value is shared across all mapplet instances.
Using Mapping Variables

To use mapping variables, complete the following steps:
1. Create a mapping variable.

2. Use the variable and set the variable value.
3. Override or clear the variable value.
Step 1. Create a Mapping Variable

You can create a mapping variable for any mapping or mapplet. You can create as many variables as you
need. Once created, use the variable in the mapping or mapplet.

To create a mapping variable:
1. In the Mapping Designer, click Mappings > Parameters and Variables. Or, in the Mapplet Designer, click
Mapplet > Parameters and Variables.
3. Specify the variable information.
The following table describes the options on the Declare Parameters and Variables dialog box:
Field Required/ Description

Optional
Name Required Variable name. Name variables $$VariableName. The syntax for
the variable name must be $$ followed by any alphanumeric or
underscore characters.
Type Required Variable or parameter. Select Variable.
Datatype Required Datatype of the variable. Select a valid transformation datatype.

Use any datatype except Binary. The datatype you select can
affect the Aggregation type you can select. For example, when
you create a String variable, you cannot configure it with a Count
aggregation type.
Precision or Scale Required Precision and scale of the variable.
Aggregation Required Aggregation type of the variable. Determines the type of

calculation you can perform with the variable.
- Set the aggregation to Count if you want to use the mapping
variable to count number of rows read from source.
- Set the aggregation to Max if you want to use the mapping variable
to determine a maximum value from a group of values.
- Set the aggregation to Min if you want to use the mapping variable
to determine a minimum value from a group of values.
IsExprVar Required Determines how the Integration Service expands the variable in
an expression string. If true, the Integration Service expands the
variable before parsing the expression. If false, the Integration
Service expands the variable after parsing the expression. Default
is false.
Note: If you set this field to true, you must set the variable
datatype to String, or the Integration Service fails the session.

Field Required/ Description
Optional
Initial Value Optional Initial value of the variable. The Integration Service uses this
value for the variable when the variable value is not saved in the
repository or defined in the parameter file. If this value is also
undefined, the Integration Service uses a default value based on
the datatype of the mapping variable.
Use any of the following formats for initial values for datetime
variables:
- MM/DD/RR
- MM/DD/RR HH24:MI:SS
- MM/DD/YYYY
- MM/DD/YYYY HH24:MI:SS.US
Description Optional Description associated with the variable.
4. Click OK.
Step 2. Set a Mapping Variable Value

After you declare a variable, use it in any expression in the mapping or mapplet. You can also use a mapping
variable in a Source Qualifier transformation or reusable transformation.
In a Source Qualifier transformation, mapping variables appear on the Variables tab in the SQL Editor. When
using mapping variables in a Source Qualifier transformation follow these rules:
• Enclose string variables in string identifiers, such as single quotation marks, to indicate the variable is a
string.
• When necessary, change the format of the datetime variable to match the format in the source. The
Integration Service converts dates from the PowerCenter default date format to the default date format of
the source system.
In other transformations in a mapplet or mapping, mapping variables appear in the Expression Editor. When
you write expressions that use mapping variables, you do not need string identifiers for string variables.
Use mapping variables in reusable transformations. When you validate the expression, the Designer treats
the variable as an Integer datatype.
You can also use mapping variables in transformation overrides in the session properties. You can override
properties such as a filter or user-defined join in a Source Qualifier transformation.
When you use a mapping variable, you have to determine how to set the value of the mapping variable. Use
a variable function to set a variable value. Use a variable function in any of the following transformations:
• Expression
• Filter
• Router
• Update Strategy
Step 3. Override or Clear Saved Values

After a session completes successfully, the Integration Service saves the final value of each variable in the
repository. When you do not want to use that value the next time you run the session, you can override the
value in the parameter file or the pre-session variable assignment in the session properties.

When you do not want to use any of the variable values saved for a session, you can clear all saved values.
You can clear variable values for a session using the Workflow Manager. After you clear variables values
from the repository, the Integration Service runs the session as if for the first time.
Defining Expression Strings in Parameter Files

The Integration Service expands mapping parameters and variables when you run a session. If you use a
mapping parameter or variable in an expression, the Integration Service expands the parameter or variable
after it parses the expression. You might want the Integration Service to expand a parameter or variable
before it parses the expression when you create expressions to represent business rules that change
frequently. Define the expressions in a parameter file so you do not have to change the mappings every time
the business rules change.
For example, you create an expression that generates a color name based on an ID string as follows:
IIF(color=‘A0587’,‘white’)
The next month, you modify the expression as follows:

IIF(color=‘A0587’,‘white’,IIF(color=‘A0588’,‘off white’))
Instead of updating the mappings that use this expression every time the business rule changes, you can
define the expression in a parameter file and update the file when the expression changes.
To define an expression in a parameter file, set up the mapping and workflow as follows:
1. Create a mapping parameter or variable to store the color name expression. For example, create a
mapping parameter, $$ExpColor.
2. For mapping parameter $$ExpColor, set the IsExprVar property to true. You must also set the datatype
for the parameter to String or the Integration Service fails the session.
3. In the Expression transformation, set the output port to the following expression:
$$ExpColor
4. Configure the session or workflow to use a parameter file.
5. In the parameter file, set $$ExpColor to the correct expression. For example:
$$ExpColor=IIF(color=‘A0587’,‘white’)
Because IsExprVar for mapping parameter $$ExpColor is set to true, the Integration Service expands the
parameter before it parses the expression. Rows with color ID “A0587” return the string “white.” If IsExprVar
is set to false, the Integration Service expands the parameter after it parses the expression. Therefore, all
rows return the string “IIF(color=‘A0587’,‘white’).”
When the color name expression changes, you can update the value of the mapping parameter in the
parameter file. You do not need to modify the mapping.
Tips for Mapping Parameters and Variables

Enter initial values for mapping parameters and variables.

When you know a logical default value for a mapping parameter or variable, use it as the initial value when
you create the parameter or variable. This allows the Integration Service to use the default value instead of a
datatype-based default value.
Enclose string and datetime parameters and variables in quotes in the SQL Editor.
When you use a string parameter or variable in a Source Qualifier transformation, enclose it in string
identifiers recognized by the source system, such as single quotation marks.
Save all parameter files in one of the process variable directories.

If you keep all parameter files in one of the process variable directories, such as $SourceFileDir, use the
process variable in the session property sheet. If you need to move the source and parameter files at a later
date, you can update all sessions by changing the process variable to point to the new directory.
Create separate parameter files for reusable sets of parameters.

When you plan to rotate through sets of parameters for a session, create a parameter file for each set of
parameters. Use pmcmd to start the session and specify the name of the parameter file you want to use, or
edit the session to use a different parameter file.
Troubleshooting Mapping Parameters and Variables

I created a mapping variable for a mapping, but each time I run the session, the value of the variable
stays the same.
You might not have included a variable function in the mapping. To change the value of a variable from
session to session, use a variable function.
Or, you might have configured a value for the variable in the parameter file. When you define a value for a
mapping variable in the parameter file, the Integration Service uses that value for the variable. See the
session log to determine what start value the Integration Service uses for each variable.
In the parameter file, I configured values for parameters in a mapplet, but they are not being used in the
session.
Mapping parameter and variable values in mapplets must be preceded by the mapplet name in the parameter
file, as follows:
mappletname.parameter=value
mappletname.variable=value
I cannot find the variable functions in the Expression Editor of the Rank or Aggregator transformation.
You cannot use variable functions in the Rank or Aggregator transformation. Use a different transformation
for variable functions.
Troubleshooting Mapping Parameters and Variables 163

CHAPTER 8
Working with User-Defined

Functions
• Working with User-Defined Functions Overview, 164

• Creating User-Defined Functions, 164
• Managing User-Defined Functions, 166
• Creating Expressions with User-Defined Functions, 168
Working with User-Defined Functions Overview

User-defined functions extend the PowerCenter transformation language. You can create and manage user-
defined functions with the PowerCenter transformation language in the Designer. You can add them to
expressions in the Designer or Workflow Manger to reuse expression logic and build complex expressions.
User-defined functions are available to other users in a repository.
Example
You want to remove leading and trailing spaces from last names. You can create a user-defined function
named RemoveSpaces to perform the LTRIM and RTRIM functions. When you configure the user-defined
function, you enter the following expression:
LTRIM( RTRIM( name))
After you create the function, you can create the following expression in an Expression transformation to
remove leading and trailing spaces from last names:
:UDF.REMOVESPACES(LAST_NAME)
The user-defined function name is prefaced by :UDF. The port name is LAST_NAME. It is the argument of
the expression.
Creating User-Defined Functions

You create user-defined functions in the Designer.
164
The following table shows the properties you configure when you create a user-defined function:
Property Description
Name Name of the function. The name must begin with a letter and can contain letters, numbers, and
the following special characters:
_@$#
The name cannot exceed 80 characters and cannot contain spaces.
Type Public if the function is callable from any expression. Private if the function is only callable from
another user-defined function.
Description Description of the function.
Return Type Datatype of the values the function returns. The Designer determines the datatype when you
create a valid function.
Arguments Arguments you want to include in the function. Specify the argument name, transformation
datatype, precision, and scale to determines the datatype, precision, and scale of the function
input values.
Expression Expression that defines the function. Configure syntax in the Expression Editor. Use the
arguments you configured for the function. You can also use transformation language functions,
custom functions, or other user-defined functions. Follow the PowerCenter transformation
language rules and guidelines.
Note: If you enter the syntax in the Expression window, validate the function from the Tools
menu.
Configuring the Function Type

You can place user-defined functions in other user-defined functions. You can also configure a user-defined
function to be callable from expressions. Callable means that you can place user-defined functions in an
expression.
Select one of the following options when you configure a user-defined function:
• Public. Callable from any user-defined function, transformation expression, link condition expression, or
task expression.
• Private. Callable from another user-defined function. Create a private function when you want the function
to be part of a more complex function. The simple function may not be usable independently of the
complex function.
After you create a public user-defined function, you cannot change the function type to private.
Although you can place a user-defined function in another user-defined function, a function cannot refer to
itself. For example, the user-defined function RemoveSpaces includes a user-defined function
TrimLeadingandTrailingSpaces. TrimLeadingandTrailingSpaces cannot include RemoveSpaces. Otherwise,
RemoveSpaces is invalid.
Configuring Public Functions that Contain Private Functions

When you include ports as arguments in a private user-defined function, you must also include the ports as
arguments in any public function that contains the private function. Use the same datatype and precision for
the arguments in the private and public function.
Creating User-Defined Functions 165

For example, you define a function to modify order IDs to include ‘INFA’ and the customer ID. You first create
the following private function called ConcatCust that concatenates ‘INFA’ with the port CUST_ID:
CONCAT (‘INFA’, CUST_ID)
After you create the private function, you create a public function called ConcatOrder that contains
ConcatCust:
CONCAT (:UDF.CONCATCUST( CUST_ID), ORDER_ID)
When you add ConcatCust to ConcatOrder, you add the argument CUST_ID with the same datatype and
precision to the public function.
Note: If you enter a user-defined function when you manually define the public function syntax, you must
prefix the user-defined function with :UDF.
Steps to Create a User-Defined Function

Use the following procedure to create a user-defined function:
1. Click Tools > User-Defined Functions > New.

The Edit User-Defined Function dialog box appears.
2. Enter a function name.
3. Select a function type.
4. Optionally, enter a description of the user-defined function.
You can enter up to 2,000 characters.
5. Create arguments for the user-defined function.
When you create arguments, configure the argument name, transformation datatype, precision, and
scale.
6. Click Launch Editor to create an expression that contains the arguments you defined in step 5.
7. Click OK.
The Designer assigns the datatype of the data the expression returns.
8. Click OK.
Managing User-Defined Functions

You can perform the following tasks to manage user-defined functions:
• Edit a user-defined function.

• Validate a user-defined function.
• View properties of a user-defined function.
• View user-defined function dependencies.
• Export a user-defined function.
• Manage versioning for a user-defined function.
166 Chapter 8: Working with User-Defined Functions

The following table describes the user-defined function management tasks and lists where you can perform
each task:
Task Area to Perform the Task
Edit a user-defined function - Click Tools > User-Defined Functions.

- Right-click a user-defined function.
Validate a user-defined function - Click Tools > User-Defined Functions.

- Right-click a user-defined function in the Navigator, Query Results window, or
View History window.
Delete a user-defined function - Click Tools > User-Defined Functions.
View properties of a user- - Click Tools > User-Defined Functions.

defined function - Right-click a user-defined function.
View user-defined function - Click Tools > User-Defined Functions.

dependencies - Right-click a user-defined function.
Export a user-defined function - Click Tools > User-Defined Functions.

- Right-click a user-defined function.
Manage versioning for the user- - Click Tools > User-Defined Functions.
defined function - Right-click a user-defined function.
Editing User-Defined Functions

You can edit a user-defined function to change the function properties. The changes propagate to all user-
defined functions and expressions that use the function.
Use the following rules and guidelines when you edit a user-defined function:
• If you change the user-defined function name, the Designer does not propagate the name change to
expressions within the object. Mappings and workflows that use an expression with the user-defined
function may be invalid.
• If you change the expression of a user-defined function, the Designer may change the datatype of the
values the function returns when used in an expression.
• You cannot change a user-defined function from public to private.
• If a user-defined function is invalid, mappings and workflows that use the user-defined function may also
be invalid. Validate the mappings or workflows.
Deleting User-Defined Functions

When you delete a user-defined function, the Repository Service deletes the function from other user-defined
functions and expressions that use it. As a result, these user-defined functions and expressions may be
invalid. Mappings and workflows that use the user-defined function or an expression with the user-defined
function may also be invalid. Validate the mappings or workflows.
Exporting User-Defined Functions

You can export a user-defined function to XML. You can then import it into other repositories or repository
folders.
Managing User-Defined Functions 167

If you export a mapping or workflow with a user-defined function, the PowerCenter Client exports the user-
defined function.
Validating User-Defined Functions

You can validate a user-defined function from the following areas:
• Expression Editor when you create or edit a user-defined function

• Tools menu
• Query Results window
• View History window
When you validate a user-defined function, the PowerCenter Client does not validate other user-defined
functions and expressions that use the function. If a user-defined function is invalid, any user-defined function
and expression that uses the function is also invalid. Similarly, mappings and workflows that use the user-
defined function are invalid.
Copying and Deploying User-Defined Functions

When you copy an object that contains a user-defined function, the Copy Wizard also copies the user-defined
function.
When you deploy a static deployment group that contains user-defined functions, the Copy Wizard also
copies the functions. When you deploy a dynamic deployment group that contains user-defined functions, the
Copy Wizard does not deploy the functions that are not included in an expression.
Creating Expressions with User-Defined Functions

You can add a user-defined function to an expression. If you enter a user-defined function when you
manually create an expression, you must prefix the user-defined function with :UDF. When you create an
expression with the Expression Editor, valid user-defined functions display on the User-Defined Functions
tab. Use user-defined functions as you would any other function.
If you create a user-defined function, which is only usable in the Designer, the function only displays in the
Designer.
When you select a user-defined function, the Expression Editor shows the function syntax in the following
format:
<return datatype> <function name> (<argument 1> as <datatype>,
<argument N> as <datatype>)
For example:
NSTRING RemoveSpaces(NAMES as string)
When you add the function to the Formula window, the function includes the prefix :UDF, as in the following
example:
:UDF.RemoveSpaces( )
When you validate the expression, PowerCenter does not validate the user-defined function. It only validates
the expression.
168 Chapter 8: Working with User-Defined Functions

CHAPTER 9
Using the Debugger

• Using the Debugger Overview, 169

• Creating Breakpoints, 171
• Configuring the Debugger, 177
• Running the Debugger, 180
• Monitoring the Debugger, 183
• Modifying Data, 189
• Evaluating Expressions, 189
• Copying Breakpoint Information and Configuration, 191
• Troubleshooting the Debugger, 191
Using the Debugger Overview

You can debug a valid mapping to gain troubleshooting information about data and error conditions. To
debug a mapping, you configure and run the Debugger from within the Mapping Designer. The Debugger
uses a session to run the mapping on the Integration Service. When you run the Debugger, it pauses at
breakpoints and you can view and edit transformation output data.
You might want to run the Debugger in the following situations:
• Before you run a session. After you save a mapping, you can run some initial tests with a debug session
before you create and configure a session in the Workflow Manager.
• After you run a session. If a session fails or if you receive unexpected results in the target, you can run
the Debugger against the session. You might also want to run the Debugger against a session if you want
to debug the mapping using the configured session properties.
Debugger Session Types

You can select three different debugger session types when you configure the Debugger. The Debugger runs
a workflow for each session type. You can choose from the following Debugger session types when you
configure the Debugger:
• Use an existing non-reusable session. The Debugger uses existing source, target, and session
configuration properties. When you run the Debugger, the Integration Service runs the non-reusable
session and the existing workflow. The Debugger does not suspend on error.
169
• Use an existing reusable session. The Debugger uses existing source, target, and session configuration
properties. When you run the Debugger, the Integration Service runs a debug instance of the reusable
session and creates and runs a debug workflow for the session.
• Create a debug session instance. You can configure source, target, and session configuration
properties through the Debugger Wizard. When you run the Debugger, the Integration Service runs a
debug instance of the debug workflow and creates and runs a debug workflow for the session.
Debug Process
To debug a mapping, complete the following steps:
1. Create breakpoints. Create breakpoints in a mapping where you want the Integration Service to
evaluate data and error conditions.
2. Configure the Debugger. Use the Debugger Wizard to configure the Debugger for the mapping. Select
the session type the Integration Service uses when it runs the Debugger. When you create a debug
session, you configure a subset of session properties within the Debugger Wizard, such as source and
target location. You can also choose to load or discard target data.
3. Run the Debugger. Run the Debugger from within the Mapping Designer. When you run the Debugger,
the Designer connects to the Integration Service. The Integration Service initializes the Debugger and
runs the debugging session and workflow. The Integration Service reads the breakpoints and pauses the
Debugger when the breakpoints evaluate to true.
4. Monitor the Debugger. While you run the Debugger, you can monitor the target data, transformation
and mapplet output data, the debug log, and the session log. When you run the Debugger, the Designer
displays the following windows:
• Debug log. View messages from the Debugger.
• Target window. View target data.
• Instance window. View transformation data.
5. Modify data and breakpoints. When the Debugger pauses, you can modify data and see the effect on
transformations, mapplets, and targets as the data moves through the pipeline. You can also modify
breakpoint information.
The Designer saves mapping breakpoint and Debugger information in the workspace files. You can copy
breakpoint information and the Debugger configuration to another mapping. If you want to run the Debugger
from another PowerCenter Client machine, you can copy the breakpoint information and the Debugger
configuration to the other PowerCenter Client machine.
170 Chapter 9: Using the Debugger

The following figure shows the windows in the Mapping Designer that appears when you run the Debugger:
1. Debugger log.
2. Session log.
3. Instance window.
4. Target window.
Creating Breakpoints
Before you run the Debugger, use the Breakpoint Editor in the Mapping Designer to create breakpoint
conditions in a mapping. You can create data or error breakpoints for transformations or for global conditions.
When you run the Debugger, the Integration Service pauses the Debugger when a breakpoint evaluates to
true. You can review and modify transformation data, and then continue the session.
Note: You cannot create breakpoints for mapplet Input and Output transformations.
Creating Breakpoints 171

A breakpoint can consist of an instance name, a breakpoint type, and a condition. When you enter
breakpoints, set breakpoint parameters in the following order:
1. Select the instance name. Choose to create a global breakpoint or a breakpoint against a single
transformation within the mapping or mapplet.
2. Select the breakpoint type. Choose to evaluate error or data conditions. You can also choose the
number of rows to skip for the breakpoint type.
3. Enter the condition. Enter data conditions for global or transformation data breakpoints. You cannot
enter conditions for error breakpoints.
After you set the instance name, breakpoint type, and optional data condition, you can view each parameter
in the Breakpoints section of the Breakpoint Editor:
• Instance name. From the Instance Name parameter.

• Breakpoint enabled flag. Enable in the View Breakpoints section.
• Breakpoint number. The Designer assigns a number based on the quantity of breakpoints you create in
the mapping. These numbers are sequential. If you remove a breakpoint, the Designer renumbers them
when you close and reopen the Breakpoint Editor.
• Breakpoint type. From the Breakpoint Type section.
• Number of rows to skip. From the Breakpoint Type section.
• Data condition. From the Condition section.
The following figure shows the parameters in the Breakpoints section:
For the Lookup transformation, LKP_Store, the check indicates the breakpoint is enabled. “#2” is the
sequential breakpoint number, “Data” indicates the breakpoint type, “0” indicates the number of breakpoint
rows to skip, and “STORE_ID=[2641]” is the data condition.
Selecting the Instance Name

When you select the instance name, you can create a breakpoint for an individual transformation, or you can
create a global breakpoint:
• Transformation instance. Select a transformation from a mapping or mapplet to configure a breakpoint

condition that the Integration Service evaluates when it processes that transformation. The naming
convention for transformations within mapplets is MappletName.TransformationName.

• Global instance. Select Global to configure a breakpoint condition that the Integration Service evaluates
when it processes each transformation in the mapping.
Creating Error Breakpoints

When you create an error breakpoint, the Debugger pauses when the Integration Service encounters error
conditions such as a transformation error or calls to the ERROR function.
You also set the number of errors to skip for each breakpoint before the Debugger pauses:
• If you want the Debugger to pause at every error, set the number of errors to zero.
• If you want the Debugger to pause after a specified number of errors, set the number of errors greater
than zero. For example, if you set the number of errors to five, the Debugger skips five errors and pauses
at every sixth error.
Evaluating Error Breakpoints

The Integration Service uses the following rules to evaluate error breakpoints:
• The Integration Service encounters a null input value, and the port contains a user-defined default value
of ERROR ( ).
• The Integration Service encounters an output transformation error, and the port contains the system
default value of ERROR ( ). The following errors are considered transformation errors:
- Data conversion errors, such as passing a string to date
- Expression evaluation errors, such as dividing by zero
- Calls to the ERROR function in an expression

• The Integration Service encounters a null input value or transformation output error, and the port contains
a user-defined default value of ABORT ( ).
• The Integration Service encounters a fatal error.
• If the Integration Service encounters an error when it processes a transformation, it evaluates error
breakpoints for that transformation and global error breakpoints. If any error breakpoint evaluates to true,
the Debugger pauses and does not evaluate data breakpoints.
Note: When the Integration Service encounters a fatal error or an ABORT, the Debugger breaks even if it has
not reached the configured number of errors to skip.
Creating Data Breakpoints

When you create a data breakpoint, the Debugger pauses when the data breakpoint evaluates to true. You
can set the number of rows to skip or a data condition or both. You have the following options when you set
data breakpoints:
• If you want the Debugger to pause at every row, set the number of rows to zero and do not set a data
condition.
• If you want the Debugger to pause after a specified number of rows passes through the transformation,
set the number of rows greater than zero. For example, if you set the number of rows to three, the
Debugger skips three rows of data and pauses every fourth row.
• If you want the Debugger to pause each time the data meets a data condition, enter the data condition
and set the number of rows set to zero.

• If you want the Debugger to pause at designated intervals when a row meets the data condition, you can
enter the data condition and set the number of rows greater than zero. For example, if you set the number
of rows to three, the Debugger skips three breakpoint rows that meet the condition and pauses at every
fourth row.
The following table summarizes the options when you set data breakpoint types and conditions:
Number of Data Debugger Behavior

Rows Condition
0 No Pauses at every row.
>0 No Pauses after every n times the number of rows passes through the
transformation.
0 Yes Pauses each time the row meets the data condition.
>0 Yes Pauses after every n times the row meets the data condition.
Entering the Data Breakpoint Condition

When you create a data condition, you enter a global parameter or a parameter for a single transformation.
You have different options depending on the selected instance and the type of condition you create.
Use the following syntax when you evaluate a transformation against a port or constant value:
<port> <operator> <type> <value>
Use the following syntax when you check for null and default values, either globally or in a transformation:
<port> <operator>
For a single transformation, you can enter multiple conditions within one breakpoint if you want the Debugger
to pause when all the conditions are true. You can also enter multiple breakpoints for a single transformation
if you want the Debugger to pause when at least one condition is true.
The following figure shows multiple conditions within a single breakpoint:
In this example, the Debugger pauses when both conditions are true.

The following figure shows multiple breakpoints within a single transformation:
In this example, the Debugger pauses when either condition is true.
The following table describes the condition parameters for transformation and global data breakpoints:
Parameter Transformation Options Global Options
Port Choose port name, <<ROW-ID>>, <<ROW- <ANY-PORT>. You can evaluate this condition
TYPE>>, or <<ANY-PORT>>. against each port in each transformation and
mapplet.
Operator <, <=, =, >, >=, !=, ISNULL, ISDEFAULT. ISNULL, ISDEFAULT.
Type Constant, Port. Evaluate against a constant Not available.

value or another port in the transformation.
Value Enter the value or select the port name. Not available.
Entering a Transformation Data Condition

When you enter a transformation data condition, you can select a specific port in the transformation, or you
can select from the following port parameters:
• Row type. Insert, update, delete, reject, or filtered.

• Row ID. Row number passing through the transformation.
• Any port. When you choose <<ANY-PORT>>, you can enter a condition that the Integration Service
evaluates for every port in the transformation. Use the ISNULL or ISDEFAULT operator to test for null or
error default values.
Note: For best results with port-to-port comparison, use ports that have the same datatype. When you
compare ports that have different datatypes, the Integration Service converts the datatype of the upstream
port to the datatype of the downstream port before it compares the ports, which might result in an invalid
comparison.

Entering a Global Data Condition
When you enter a global data condition, enter a condition that the Integration Service evaluates null and error
default values in every port in every transformation. You can choose <ANY-PORT> <ISNULL> or <ANY-
PORT> <ISDEFAULT>.
Using ISNULL and ISDEFAULT

You can create ISNULL and ISDEFAULT conditions in transformation and global data breakpoints. When you
use the ISNULL or ISDEFAULT operator, you cannot use the type or value in the condition.
When you create an ISNULL condition, the Debugger pauses when the Integration Service encounters a null
input value, and the port contains the system default value.
When you create an ISDEFAULT condition, the Debugger pauses in the following circumstances:
• The Integration Service encounters an output transformation error, and the port contains a user-defined
default value of a constant value or constant expression.
• The Integration Service encounters a null input value, and the port contains a user-defined default value
of a constant value or constant expression.
Steps to Enter Breakpoints

Complete the following steps to enter breakpoints:
1. In a mapping, open the Breakpoint Editor in one of the following ways:

• Press Alt+F9.
• Click Mappings > Debugger > Edit Breakpoints.
• Right-click a transformation or mapplet and choose Edit Breakpoint.
Note: You can right-click any portion of an iconized transformation or mapplet. If the transformation or
mapplet is in normal view, right-click the title bar.
2. Select the instance name in the Instance Name section.
3. Click Add to add a new breakpoint.
If you select <<ALL INSTANCES>> and click Add, the Designer prompts you to choose a specific
transformation or a global instance.
You can click OK to create an unconditional data breakpoint.
4. Select the Breakpoint Type.
5. If you select a data breakpoint type, you can enter the condition. Enter multiple conditions if you want the
Integration Service to evaluate multiple conditions.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each breakpoint.
7. Click OK.
Editing a Breakpoint
You might want to review breakpoints before or during a Debugger session. You can edit, disable, or remove
breakpoints within the Breakpoint Editor.

To edit breakpoints:
1. In a mapping, open the Breakpoint Editor in one of the following ways:

• Press Alt+F9.
• Click Mappings > Debugger > Edit Breakpoints.
• Right-click a transformation and choose Edit Breakpoint.
Note: You can right-click over any portion of an iconized transformation or mapplet. If the transformation
is in normal view, right-click over the title bar.
2. Select an instance name in the Instance Name section.
Tip: Select <<ALL INSTANCES>> in the Instance Name list to view all breakpoints for a mapping.
3. Select a breakpoint in the Breakpoints section.
4. Change the condition or breakpoint type.
5. Clear the check box by a breakpoint to disable it. You can enable the breakpoint again by selecting the
check box.
6. Create a new breakpoint using the instructions above for creating breakpoints.
7. Click the Remove button to remove a selected breakpoint.
8. Click the Remove All button to remove all breakpoints for the selected instance. If you want to remove all
breakpoints in the mapping, select <<ALL INSTANCES>>.
Configuring the Debugger

In addition to setting breakpoints, you must also configure the Debugger. Use the Debugger Wizard in the
Mapping Designer to configure the Debugger against a saved mapping. When you configure the Debugger,
enter parameters such as the Integration Service, source and target type, and memory parameters. You must
enable debugging in the Integration Service configuration before you use it to run the Debugger.
The Debugger Wizard has the following pages:
1. Introduction. This page gives you an overview of the wizard. You do not configure any properties on
this page.
2. Integration Service and session type. Choose the Integration Service to run the session. You can also
choose to run the Debugger against an existing non-reusable session, an existing reusable session, or
create a debug session instance. When you run the Debugger against an existing session, the
Integration Service runs the session in debug mode. When you create a debug session, you configure a
subset of session properties within the Debugger Wizard, such as source and target location.
3. Session information. If you run the Debugger against an existing session, select the session name. If
you create a debug session, configure session parameters.
4. Session configuration. If you create a debug session, set the session configuration.
5. Target options. Choose to load or discard target data.
Step 1. Debugger Introduction

The first page of the Debugger Wizard provides an overview of the wizard.
Configuring the Debugger 177

Step 2. Select Integration Service and Session Type
On the second page, you can select the following options:
• Integration Service to run the session. The list displays all Integration Services associated with the
repository. Choose an Integration Service that has debugging enabled.
• Run the Debugger against an existing non-reusable session, an existing reusable session, or create a
debug session instance. If you want to debug a mapping that uses session properties, such as
incremental aggregation, FTP, or pre- or post-session commands, you must run an existing session in
debug mode.
When you click Next, the Designer tests the connection to the Integration Service and verifies that debugging
is enabled for the Integration Service. If the connection fails, the Designer prompts you to select another
Integration Service.
Step 3. Select Session Information

The page that the wizard displays for session information depends on whether you choose to run a debug
session or an existing session in debug mode.
Running an Existing Session in Debug Mode

If you choose to run an existing session in debug mode, the Debugger Wizard displays a list of all sessions in
the current folder that use the mapping. Select the session you want to use.
You cannot run the Debugger against a session configured with multiple partitions or a session configured to
run on a grid. You must either change the properties of the session or choose to create a debug session for
the mapping.
Running a Debug Session

If you choose to run a debug session, you can specify some session parameters. The Debugger uses default
session parameters for all other parameters that you cannot configure with a debug session. The Debugger
Wizard displays a session page that contains the following tabs:
• Connections. Select source and target connection information.

For relational sources and targets, you can select a database connection that is configured in the
Workflow Manager. For relational targets, you can choose to truncate the target tables.
For file sources and targets, you can override the file name. The default locations are $SourceFileDir and
$TargetFileDir. To override the default location for a source or target file, use the Session Parameters tab.
Do not enter the direct path in the file name field.
• Properties. Configure source and target properties.
• Reader/Writer. Configure readers and writers for the source and target instances in the mapping.
When you run a debug session, the Integration Service uses default session properties for all properties that
you do not configure in the Debugger Wizard.
You can select source and target connections for each source and target instance in the debug session on
the Connections tab.
You can choose the source reader type and target writer type for each source and target instance in the
debug session on the Reader/Writer tab.
The Properties tab displays different source and target properties depending on the type of reader or writer
you select on the Reader/Writer tab. The Integration Service uses default values for all session properties
you do not configure on the Properties tab.

You can configure session properties for the Debug session.
Step 4. Set Session Configuration

When you set the debug session configuration, you configure information such as the location of files, row
type, and memory.
The following table describes the session parameters for a debug session:
Session Parameter Description
Row Type Insert, Delete, Update, or Driven. The default row type for session using an Update
Strategy is Update.
DTM Buffer Size Default memory allocation is 12 MB. You might want to increase this to 24 MB if you run
a session with large amounts of character data against an Integration Service
configured to run in Unicode mode.
Parameter File Name and location of the parameter file if the mapping uses any mapping parameters
or variables. The current working directory for the Integration Service is the default
location for the parameter file.
Enable High Precision When selected, the Integration Service processes the Decimal datatype to a precision
of 28. If a session does not use the Decimal datatype, do not enable high precision.
$Source Connection Database connection you want the Integration Service to use for the $Source variable.
Value
$Target Connection Database connection you want the Integration Service to use for the $Target variable.
Value
Constraint Based Load Uses constraint-based loading.

Ordering
Step 5. Set Target Options

On the last page of the Debugger Wizard, you can select the following target options:
• Discard target data. You can choose to load or discard target data when you run the Debugger. If you
discard target data, the Integration Service does not connect to the target.
• Display target data. You can select the target instances you want to display in the Target window while
you run a debug session.
When you click Finish, if the mapping includes mapplets, the Debugger displays the mapplet instance dialog
box. Select the mapplets from this dialog box that you want to debug. To clear a selected mapplet, press the
Ctrl key and select the mapplet.
When you select a mapplet to debug, the Designer expands it to display the individual transformations when
the Debugger runs.
When you do not select a mapplet to debug, the Designer does not expand it in the workspace. You cannot
complete the following tasks for transformations in the mapplet:
• Monitor or modify transformation data.

• Evaluate expressions.
• Edit breakpoints.
• Step to a transformation instance.
Configuring the Debugger 179

Running the Debugger
When you complete the Debugger Wizard, the Integration Service starts the session and initializes the
Debugger. After initialization, the Debugger moves in and out of running and paused states based on
breakpoints and commands that you issue from the Mapping Designer. The Debugger can be in one of the
following states:
• Initializing. The Designer connects to the Integration Service.

• Running. The Integration Service processes the data.
• Paused. The Integration Service encounters a break and pauses the Debugger.
Note: To enable multiple users to debug the same mapping at the same time, each user must configure
different port numbers in the Tools > Options > Debug tab.
The Debugger does not use the high availability functionality.
Initializing State
When you run the Debugger, the Designer connects to the Integration Service, and the Integration Service
initializes the session. During initialization, the Designer closes the Navigator window and disables functions,
such as switching to another tool, saving the repository, or opening a folder. These functions remain disabled
until the Debugger stops.
Running State
When initialization completes, the Debugger moves to the paused state and waits for the command to
continue processing. When you continue, the Debugger moves to the running state. The Integration Service
transforms data and evaluates data against breakpoint conditions. The Debugger remains in the running
state until the Integration Service encounters a breakpoint, you issue a break command, or the session ends.
Paused State
The Debugger pauses when the Integration Service encounters a break. The following break conditions
cause the Debugger to pause:
• The Integration Service encounters a configured breakpoint condition.

• You instruct the Integration Service to continue to an instance that does not have an associated
breakpoint.
• You issue a manual break command.
• The Integration Service encounters a fatal error.
• The Integration Service completes evaluation of all data. The Debugger tab displays a message that the
session is complete. When you continue the session, the Debugger clears the Target and Transformation
windows.
While the Debugger pauses, you can review and modify transformation output data. The Debugger remains
paused until you continue or end the session.
Debugger Tasks
You can perform multiple tasks when you run the Debugger. The type of information that you monitor and the
tasks that you perform can vary depending on the Debugger state. For example, you can monitor logs in all

three Debugger states, but you can only modify data when the Debugger is in the paused state. You can
complete the following types of tasks:
• Monitor the session. While the Integration Service runs the Debugger, the Mapping Designer displays
indicators and windows to help you monitor the session.
• Modify data and breakpoints. When the Debugger pauses, you can modify output data, row indicators,
and breakpoint conditions.
• Evaluate expressions. When the Debugger pauses, you can invoke the Expression Editor and evaluate
an expression against the current data in a transformation. The Debugger returns the result of the
expression in a message box. You can enter expressions using ports in the selected transformation. You
can also evaluate mapping variables.
• Issue commands to the Integration Service. You can issue commands to the Integration Service, such
as break, continue, or stop.
The following table describes the different tasks you can perform in each of the Debugger states:
Task Description Debugger Access

State
Monitor logs Monitor the session log and the debug log Initializing - View Output Window
in the Output window. Running
Paused
Monitor target data When the Debugger moves from the Running - View Target Instance
initializing state to the running state, the Paused Window
Designer displays the Target window. - View Target Data
You can view updated target data as the Command
Integration Service processes the target
data.
Monitor debug Debug indicators display on mapping Running - View Mapping Objects
indicators objects that help you monitor the Paused
breakpoints and data flow.
Monitor When the Debugger moves from the Paused - View Instance Window
transformation data initializing state to the running state, the - Show Current Instance
Designer displays the Instance window. Command
When the Debugger pauses, the Instance
window displays data of the
transformation that caused the break.
You can also select other transformations
to view.
Modify data While the Debugger pauses, you can Paused - View Instance Window
modify output data and row parameters.
Evaluate expressions While the Debugger pauses, use the Paused - Evaluate Expression
Expression Editor to evaluate mapping Command
variables and expressions in a
transformation.
Issue a manual break Issue a manual break command when Running - Break Now Command
command you want to view transformation data.
Edit breakpoints The Integration Service begins evaluating Running - Edit Breakpoints
the modified breakpoints immediately. Paused Command
Running the Debugger 181

Task Description Debugger Access
State
Refresh data After you modify data, you can refresh the Paused - Refresh Data Command
data. When you refresh data, the from Instance Window
Integration Service returns the result of
the modification. If you enter data that is
not valid, you can edit it again before you
continue processing.
Continue processing When you finish viewing and modifying Paused - Next Instance Command
data, you can continue the Debugger. - Step to Instance
You have several options for continuing Command
the session. - Continue Command
Stop the Debugger Stop the Debugger. Initializing - Stop Debugger Command
Running
Paused
Status request When you request the Debugger status, Running - Status Request Command
the Integration Service displays the status Paused
of the Debugger in the Output window.
Working with Persisted Values

When you run the Debugger against mappings with sequence generators and mapping variables, the
Integration Service might save or discard persisted values:
• Discard persisted values. The Integration Service does not save final values of generated sequence
numbers or mapping variables to the repository when you run a debug session or you run a session in
debug mode and discard target data.
• Save persisted values. The Integration Service saves final values of generated sequence numbers and
mapping variables to the repository when you run a session in debug mode and do not discard target
data. You can view the final value for Sequence Generator and Normalizer transformations in the
transformation properties.
Designer Behavior
When the Debugger starts, you cannot perform the following tasks:
• Close the folder or open another folder.

• Use the Navigator.
• Perform repository functions, such as Save.
• Edit or close the mapping.
• Switch to another tool in the Designer, such as Target Designer.
• Close the Designer.
Note: Dynamic partitioning is disabled during debugging.
You can perform these tasks after the Debugger stops.

Monitoring the Debugger
When you run the Debugger, you can monitor the following information:
• Session status. Monitor the status of the session.

• Data movement. Monitor data as it moves through transformations.
• Breakpoints. Monitor data that meets breakpoint conditions.
• Target data. Monitor target data on a row-by-row basis.
The Mapping Designer displays windows and debug indicators that help you monitor the session:
• Debug indicators. Debug indicators on transformations help you follow breakpoints and data flow.
• Instance window. When the Debugger pauses, you can view transformation data and row information in
the Instance window.
• Target window. View target data for each target in the mapping.
• Output window. The Integration Service writes messages to the following tabs in the Output window:
- Debugger tab. The debug log displays in the Debugger tab.
- Session Log tab. The session log displays in the Session Log tab.
- Notifications tab. Displays messages from the Repository Service.
While you monitor the Debugger, you might want to change the transformation output data to see the effect
on subsequent transformations or targets in the data flow. You might also want to edit or add more
breakpoint information to monitor the session more closely.
Monitoring Debug Indicators

During a session, the mapping displays the indicators in the top left corner of transformations that help you
monitor breakpoints, data flow, and Debugger status:
• Breakpoint indicator. After the Integration Service completes initialization, it reads the breakpoints in the
mapping and displays a stop sign on each transformation to indicate breakpoint conditions. You can view
breakpoint indicators while the Debugger is in the running or paused state. The Mapping Designer does
not display global breakpoint indicators.
• Current source qualifier indicator. When the Integration Service runs the Debugger, it processes data
from each source qualifier in a target load order group concurrently by default. The Mapping Designer
displays a flashing arrow on all current source qualifiers.
Note: You can configure the Integration Service to read sources connected to Joiner transformations
sequentially.
• Current transformation indicator. The Debugger displays a solid yellow arrow that indicates the
transformation or mapplet that the Integration Service was processing when it encountered a break. This
transformation is called the current transformation. The Debugger displays a solid blue arrow at all other
transformations that the Integration Service was processing when it encountered a break at the current
transformation.
• Debugger status. When you start the Debugger, the Mapping Designer displays a Debugger icon by the
tool bars that indicates the Debugger state. When the Debugger is initializing or running, the icon rotates.
When the Debugger is paused, the icon stops.
Monitoring the Debugger 183

Monitoring Transformation Data
When the Debugger pauses, it displays the current row of data in the Instance window for the transformation
in the mapping or mapplet where the Integration Service encountered the break. This is the current
transformation. You can view the data of any transformation at the point where the Debugger pauses by
selecting another transformation from the list in the Instance window.
If you did not select any mapplet to debug after completing the Debugger Wizard, you cannot monitor or view
transformations inside the mapplet when the Debugger runs.
Click Tools > Options > Debug tab to select columns to display in the Debugger Data Display window. For
more information about displaying columns, see “Configuring Debug Options” on page 25.
Note: When the mapping contains a Custom transformation, the Instance window displays information for
ports in all input and output groups.
You can display the following information in the Instance window:
• Port name. Displays all ports that are connected to another transformation or target.
• RowID. Displays row number passing through the transformation.
• Value. Displays the value for each port. If the port contains binary data, this column displays <raw data>.
If the port does not contain data, or if it is NULL, this column displays <no data available>. For Router
transformations, the values display for input ports and output ports that meet the group condition. Output
ports that do not meet the group condition display <no data available> in the value column.
• Datatype. Displays the datatype of the port.
• Length/precision and scale. Displays the length/precision and scale of the port.
• Null indicator. If a column contains a null value, the null indicator column is selected, and the value
displays <no data available>.
• Row type. Insert, update, delete, reject, filtered, or not applicable. <<ROW TYPE>> displays in the Port
column, and the row type value displays in the Value column. The row type does not display if it is not
applicable, such as with Sequence Generator transformations.
• Port indicator. Displays one of the following indicators next to the port name:
- Current row. Indicates the port is in the current row.
- Previous row. Indicates the port is in the previous row.
- Current row, default value. Indicates the value for the column in the current row is the default value.
- Previous row, default value. Indicates the value for the column in the previous row is the default value.
- Current row, modifiable. Indicates an output port in the current row that you can modify.
Tip: Move the pointer across the port indicator to display tooltips about the indicator.
When the Instance window displays the current transformation or any transformation in the pipeline before
the current transformation, the current rows display. If you view a transformation in the Instance window that
appears in the pipeline after the current instance, the previous rows display. An indicator also displays beside
the port name to designate the current or previous row.
For example, in the following mapping, FILTRANS is the current transformation, as shown by the current
transformation indicator. When you view the Instance window for FILTRANS or SQ_ORDERS, you see the
current row. If you switch to EXPTRANS, you see the previous row because the Integration Service has not
processed the current row through EXPTRANS.

The following figure shows transformations with port processing indicators:
Current and previous row indicators can also show when the Instance window displays the default value. The
Debugger uses the same rules to display the default value indicator in the Instance window that it uses to
evaluate default values for breakpoints.
Note: The Debugger does not immediately drop rows flagged to drop. This includes invalid, error, and filtered
rows. The Integration Service sets the ROW_FLAG to NULL and designates the row type by a negative
number, such as -3 (error). You see the error indicators in the session logs with verbose data tracing only.
The Integration Service drops the rows later in the pipeline.
Continuing the Debugger

After you review or modify data, you can continue the Debugger in the following ways:
• Continue to the next break. To continue to the next break, click Continue on the toolbar or from the
Mapping > Debugger menu option. The Debugger continues running until it encounters the next break.
• Continue to the next instance. To continue to the next instance, click Next Instance on the toolbar or
from the Mapping > Debugger menu option. The Debugger continues running until it reaches the next
transformation or until it encounters a break. If the current instance has output going to more than one
transformation instance, the Debugger stops at the first instance it processes. If you did not select a
mapplet to debug when you completed the Debugger Wizard steps, the Debugger continues to the
instance after the mapplet.
• Step to a specified instance. To continue to a specified instance, select the transformation instance in
the mapping, then click Step to Instance on the toolbar or from the Mapping > Debugger menu option. The
Debugger continues running until it reaches the selected transformation in the mapping or until it
encounters a break.
You can step to connected transformations in the mapping, even if they do not have an associated
breakpoint. You cannot step to the following instances:
- Sources
- Targets
- Unconnected transformations
- Mapplets not selected for debugging
Monitoring Target Data

When the Debugger runs, the Designer caches the target data. You can view the cached data in the Target
window while the Debugger is running or paused. You can view cached target data even if you configure the
Debugger Wizard to discard target data.
You can view the following information for each row of target data:
• Row ID. Row number of the cached target data.

• Row type. Insert, update, delete, reject, or filtered.
• Column name and value. Column name and value for each row in the cache.

If the mapping has more than one target, you can choose the target you want to display. Select a target to
view from the list in the Debugger Target Display window. The targets that display in the list are the targets
you selected in the Debugger Wizard. If you want to view a target that you did not select in the wizard, click
Mappings > Debugger > View Target Data.
The Target window displays up to 1,000 rows. After it reaches 1,000 rows, the Designer begins overwriting
data from the first row. You can clear the cache and the Debugger Target Display window by right-clicking in
the Debugger Target Display window, and selecting Clear Data.
Monitoring the Debug Log

When the Debugger initializes, the Integration Service begins writing the debug log in the Debugger tab of
the Output window. The Integration Service writes the following types of messages to the debug log:
• Session initialization
• Acknowledge user request
• The Integration Service encounters a break
• Debug errors
• Debugger status
• Session stops
When the bottom line in the Output window reads that the Integration Service is ready, you know the
Debugger is paused. The Integration Service remains paused until you issue a command, such as Continue,
Step to Next, or Stop.
Note: If the Debugger does not start or if it abruptly stops, and the Integration Service does not write any
message to the Output window, you can look in the Administration Console Domain page for more
information.

The following table shows samples of debug log messages in the Output window:
Debugger Action Sample Debug Log Messages
The Debugger initializes. Establishing a connection to the Integration Service

dwilliam...
Integration Service dwilliam acknowledged its ability to
debug a mapping.
Initializing debugger...
Sending request to Integration Service dwilliam to debug
mapping Customers...
Waiting for Integration Service to initialize...
Establishing communication with the DTM...
Established communication with the DTM.
Waiting for DTM initialization to complete...
Integration Service is running in ASCII mode.
Integration Service is running with High Precision
disabled.
Integration Service initialization completed.
After initialization, the DSQ Execution Order:

Integration Service
acknowledges
breakpoints in the
mapping. Integration Service is Ready.
Sending breakpoints to the Integration Service...
Integration Service acknowledged the request to set
breakpoints.
The Integration Service Integration Service has stopped at a data breakpoint.

encounters a breakpoint.
List of breakpoints that the Integration Service hit:
#3 Data(2,"CUSTOMER_ID > [14]")
The current transformation is Exp_Customers.
Integration Service is Ready.
Issue the Continue Sending request to continue...

command.
Integration Service acknowledged the request to continue.
Issue the Step to Next Sending request to go to next instance...

Instance command. The
Integration Service acknowledged the request to step to
Integration Service
next instance.
acknowledges and
executes the request. The current transformation is Exp_Customers.
Issue the Step to Instance Sending request to step to instance...

command. The Integration
Integration Service acknowledged the request to step to
Service acknowledges
instance.
and executes the request.
The current transformation is SQ_CUSTOMERS.

Debugger Action Sample Debug Log Messages
Modify data in the Sending request to modify data for transformation

Instance window. Exp_Customers, port NEW_CUST_ID, to value [1234566...]
Integration Service acknowledged the request to modify
data.
Sending request to continue...
Integration Service acknowledged the request to continue.
Session is complete. The Response from the Integration Service: Session completed
Integration Service waits <successfully/with failure>. Last chance to look at target
for the final command to data. Debugger will shut down when we continue.
shut down the Debugger. Integration Service is Ready.
The Debugger completes. Integration Service is Shutting Down...

Integration Service execution completed.
Debugger shutdown complete.
To save the log when the session completes, right-click inside the Debugger tab, and choose Save Output As
from the menu.
Using the Workflow Monitor

You can view running and completed workflows and sessions in the Workflow Monitor. The Integration
Service uses a debug workflow to run the debug session. The Workflow Monitor displays the debug workflow
and session names differently depending on the session type you chose in the Debugger Wizard.
The following table describes the workflow and session names the Workflow Monitor displays for each debug
session type:
Session Type Workflow Name Session Name
Existing reusable session DebugWorkflow_mappingname DebugInst_sessionname
Existing non-reusable session workflowname sessionname
Debug session DebugWorkflow_mappingname DebugInst_DebugSession_mappingname
The Workflow Monitor displays the debug run mode in the Run Type column for all debugger sessions and
workflows. You can also access the logs through the Workflow Monitor.
Note: You cannot use the Workflow Monitor to restart, abort, or stop a debug session, debug workflow, or a
session run in debug mode.

Modifying Data
When the Debugger pauses, the current instance displays in the Instance window, and the current instance
indicator displays on the transformation in the mapping. You can make the following modifications to the
current instance when the Debugger pauses on a data breakpoint:
• Modify output data. You can modify output data of the current transformation. When you continue the
session, the Integration Service validates the data. It performs the same validation it performs when it
passes data from port to port in a regular session.
• Change null data to not-null. Clear the null column, and enter a value in the value column to change null
data to not-null.
• Change not-null to null. Select the null column to change not-null data to null. The Designer prompts you
to confirm that you want to make this change.
• Modify row types. Modify Update Strategy, Filter, or Router transformation row types.
For Router transformations, you can change the row type to override the group condition evaluation for
user-defined groups. For example, if the group condition evaluates to false, the rows are not passed
through the output ports to the next transformation or target. The Instance window displays <no data
available>, and the row type is filtered. If you want to pass the filtered row to the next transformation or
target, you can change the row type to Insert. Likewise, for a group that meets the group condition, you
can change the row type from insert to filtered.
After you change data, you can refresh the cache before you continue the session. When you issue the
Refresh command, the Designer processes the request for the current transformation, and you can see if the
data you enter is valid. You can change the data again before you continue the session.
Restrictions
You cannot change data for the following output ports:
• Normalizer transformation. Generated Keys and Generated Column ID ports.

• Rank transformation. RANKINDEX port.
• Router transformation. All output ports.
• Sequence Generator transformation. CURRVAL and NEXTVAL ports.
• Lookup transformation. NewLookupRow port for a Lookup transformation configured to use a dynamic
cache.
• Custom transformation. Ports in output groups other than the current output group.
• Java transformation. Ports in output groups other than the current output group.
Additionally, you cannot change data associated with the following:
• Mapplets that are not selected for debugging

• Input or input/output ports
• Output ports when the Debugger pauses on an error breakpoint
Evaluating Expressions
When the Debugger pauses, use the Expression Editor to evaluate expressions using mapping variables and
ports in a selected transformation.
Modifying Data 189

You can evaluate expressions in the following transformations:
• Aggregator transformation
• Expression transformation
• Filter transformation
• Rank transformation
• Router transformation
• Update Strategy transformation
When you create an expression, you use references to ports within the transformation. The Expression Editor
does not display ports for other transformations in the mapping. When you evaluate the expression, the
Debugger returns the result of the expression in a message box.
Evaluating Expressions Using Mapping Variables

If you define variables in the mapping, you can evaluate the start value or current value of the mapping
variable. To find the start value of a mapping variable, evaluate the mapping variable only.
The Debugger uses the following process to determine the start value of a mapping variable:
1. Parameter file. If you use a parameter file, the Debugger returns the value in the parameter file.
2. Repository. If you do not use a parameter file, the Debugger returns the value in the repository.
3. Initial value. If the repository does not have a stored value for the variable, the Debugger returns the
initial value configured in the mapping variable.
4. Default value. If you do not configure an initial value for the mapping variable, the Debugger returns the
default value based on datatypes.
To find the current value of a mapping variable, evaluate the mapping variable with one of the variable
functions, such as SetMaxVariable or SetCountVariable. The Designer displays only the mapping variables
associated with the transformations in the mapping. To view mapping variables associated with a mapplet,
select the transformation within the expanded mapplet when the Debugger is running.
Steps to Evaluate Expressions

To evaluate an expression while the Debugger pauses, complete the following steps:
To evaluate an expression while the Debugger pauses:
1. Select the transformation for which you want to evaluate an expression.

2. Click Mappings > Debugger > Evaluate Expression.
3. Enter an expression in the Expression Editor that references ports in the selected transformation.
4. To validate the expression, click Validate.
5. To evaluate the expression, click Evaluate.
If the expression is valid, the Integration Service evaluates it. The Integration Service returns the result
of the expression in a message box.

Copying Breakpoint Information and Configuration
The Designer stores breakpoint information and Debugger configuration in the workspace files. If you copy a
mapping or create a shortcut to another folder, or if you want to debug the mapping from another
PowerCenter Client machine, you can transfer the breakpoints and configuration using the Save
Configuration and Load Configuration options on the Debugger menu.
To save breakpoints and configuration associated with a mapping:
1. Open the mapping with breakpoints and configuration that you want to save.
2. Click Mappings > Debugger > Save Configuration.
3. Save the file with a .dcf extension.
4. When you choose an existing .dcf file, the Designer appends the configuration information to the file.
5. If the file contains configuration information for the mapping, the Designer prompts you to verify that you
want to overwrite the configuration.
Transferring Breakpoints and Configuration

You can transfer breakpoints and configuration information saved from one mapping to a different mapping.
To load breakpoints and configuration to another mapping:
1. Make the .dcf file accessible to the PowerCenter Client machine where you want to load configurations.
2. Open the mapping you want to load configuration.
3. Click Mapping > Debugger > Load Configuration.
The Open DCF File dialog box appears.
4. Select the .dcf configuration file and click Open.
If there are multiple configurations in the file, or if the Designer does not find a matching mapping name,
the Designer displays a list of mapping configurations in the file.
5. Select a mapping and click OK.
The Designer loads all breakpoint and configuration for matching mapping objects. It loads all
configuration that is not dependent on mapping objects, such as the Integration Service and the option to
discard target data.
Note: You cannot load breakpoints while the Debugger is active.
Troubleshooting the Debugger

I am trying to run a Debugger session and I get the following error:
Establishing a connection to the Integration Service <name>...
Integration Service <name> acknowledged its ability to debug a mapping.
Initializing debugger...
bind: (WSAEADDRINUSE)Address already in use
This error occurs when the port that the Debugger is using is already in use by another application. Assign a
different port for the Debugger to use.
Copying Breakpoint Information and Configuration 191

To assign the Debugger a different port:
1. Click Tools > Options > Debug.

2. Assign a new port number in the Port field or select Pick a Port Number Between Min and Max
Automatically and assign a range of ports for the Debugger to use.
You can select a port between 5001 and 32000 or set a range between 5001 and 32000.

CHAPTER 10
Viewing Data Lineage

• Viewing Data Lineage Overview, 193

• Configuring Data Lineage Access, 193
• Running Data Lineage from the Designer, 194
Viewing Data Lineage Overview

You can use Metadata Manager to trace the flow of data in PowerCenter from the sources to targets. With
the Metadata Manager data lineage, you can analyze where data originates, how the data is transformed and
what objects transform it, and where the data ends. You can analyze the data flow within a single
PowerCenter repository or across multiple PowerCenter repositories.
You can display the data lineage for PowerCenter objects in the Designer. When you display data lineage for
a PowerCenter object, the Designer connects to the Metadata Manager application and extracts the data
lineage information from the Metadata Manager warehouse. The data lineage diagram appears in a browser
window.
Data lineage analysis on a PowerCenter repository displays one or more of the following PowerCenter
objects:
• Repositories. You can load objects from multiple PowerCenter repositories into Metadata Manager. In
the data lineage, Metadata Manager displays the repository for each metadata object.
• Data structures. Data lineage on a PowerCenter object includes the source definition, target definition,
and transformation data structures.
• Fields. Fields are objects within data structures that store the metadata. Data lineage on a PowerCenter
object includes the source, target, and transformation ports.
Configuring Data Lineage Access

To configure PowerCenter and Metadata Manager to display lineage for PowerCenter objects, complete the
following tasks:
1. Make sure Metadata Manager is running. Create a Metadata Manager Service in the Informatica
Administrator or verify that an enabled Metadata Manager Service exists in the domain that contains the
PowerCenter repository you want to run data lineage analysis on.
193
2. Load the PowerCenter repository metadata. Create a resource for the PowerCenter repository in
Metadata Manager and load the PowerCenter repository metadata into the Metadata Manager
warehouse.
3. Set up the connection between the PowerCenter repository and Metadata Manager. Configure the
Metadata Manager Service and the resource name for the PowerCenter repository in the Administrator
tool.
4. Configure the web browser. When you run data lineage analysis on a PowerCenter object, the
Designer launches data lineage analysis in the default browser configured for your system. Data lineage
requires the Flash 9 viewer installed on the browser.
Running Data Lineage from the Designer

You can access data lineage from any PowerCenter Designer tool. You can display data lineage on source
and target definitions, transformations, mapplets, and mappings.
To run data lineage from the PowerCenter Designer:
1. In the Designer, open the PowerCenter folder containing the object on which you want to run data
lineage.
2. Open the object in the applicable workspace area.
For example, if you want to run data lineage on a transformation, open the transformation in the
Transformation Developer.
3. In the workspace, right-click and select Data Lineage.
4. In the Informatica Metadata Manager Business Glossary browser, enter the user credentials.
The data lineage for the object appears in the browser window.
Note: The performance of the data lineage analysis depends on the amount of available system
resources on the machine running the Metadata Manager application. Running multiple data lineage
analysis on multiple objects simultaneously can impact performance.
After you access data lineage, you can view details about each object in the data lineage diagram. You can
export the data lineage to a PNG image file or print the diagram. You can also email the data lineage to other
users.
194 Chapter 10: Viewing Data Lineage

CHAPTER 11
Comparing Objects
• Comparing Objects Overview, 195

• Comparing Sources, Targets, and Transformations , 196
• Comparing Mappings and Mapplets , 197
Comparing Objects Overview

You can compare two repository objects of the same type to identify differences between the objects through
the Designer. For example, you may want to use a target definition in a mapping, but you have two target
definitions that are similar. You can compare the target definitions to see which one contains the columns you
need. When you compare two objects, the Designer displays their attributes side-by-side.
You can compare the following types of objects:
• Sources. You can compare two sources, two source shortcuts, or a source with a source shortcut.
• Targets. You can compare two targets, two target shortcuts, or a target with a target shortcut.
• Transformations. You can compare two transformations, two transformation shortcuts, or a
transformation with a transformation shortcut.
• Mappings and mapplets. You can compare two mappings, two mapping shortcuts, or a mapping with a
mapping shortcut. You can also compare two mapplets, two mapplet shortcuts, or a mapplet with a
mapplet shortcut.
• Instances. Within mappings and mapplets, you can compare two source instances, two target instances,
or two transformations. Within mappings, you can also compare two mapplet instances.
• Folders. You can compare two folders in the Repository Manager.
• Object shortcut versions. You can compare two versions of an object in the Repository Manager.
You can compare objects under the following circumstances:
• When both objects exist in open folders. You can compare an object in any open folder with another
object of the same type in any open folder. The folders can be in different repositories. You cannot
compare objects of different types.
• When importing an object. When you import an object into a folder that contains an object with the same
name, the Designer lets you compare the objects to determine whether you want to overwrite or use the
existing object.
195
• When copying an object. If you copy an object into a folder that contains an object of that type with the
same name, the Designer lets you compare the two objects to determine whether you want to overwrite or
use the existing object.
• When copying or deploying objects to another repository. If you copy or deploy an object into a folder
in another repository, the Copy or Deployment Wizard compares the objects in the target folder with the
objects you deploy or copy.
• When you view an object that has multiple versions. You can compare the previous version of an
object with the current version of the object to see the changes made to the latest version.
• When you view an object in the Results View window. When you view an object in the Results View
window, you can compare a previous versions of the object with the current version of the object to view
the differences between the different versions.
You can compare objects across folders and repositories through the Designer. To do this, you must have
both folders open. When you compare objects, a dialog box displays the results. Each dialog box contains
different tabs for different types of objects.
The following figure shows a comparison of two relational sources:
Each tab in this dialog box contains two columns. The left column lists the attributes in the first object you
compare, and the right column lists the attributes in the second object. A divider separates the two columns.
Slide the divider left or right to resize the columns. The Designer highlights differences between the objects.
Ports or columns common to both objects appear in the same row.
Note: You cannot change the metadata displayed in the results.
Comparing Sources, Targets, and Transformations

You can compare individual objects of the same type to identify differences between the objects through the
Designer.
196 Chapter 11: Comparing Objects

The following table describes the methods you can use to compare sources, targets or transformations:
To Compare... Open the following tool... Next step...
Sources Source Analyzer Click Sources > Compare.
Targets Target Designer Click Targets > Compare.
Transformations Transformation Developer Click Transformation > Compare.
Instances within a Mapping Designer Select an object and click Transformation > Compare.
mapping
Instances within a Mapplet Designer Select an object and click Transformation > Compare.
mapplet
Note: If one of the fields in this dialog box is blank or displays the name of an object you do not want to
compare, click Browse to select objects to compare.
Comparing Mappings and Mapplets

You can compare two mappings or two mapplets. For example, if you have two mappings with the same
name in different folders, you can compare them to see if they differ.
When you compare two mappings or two mapplets, a dialog box displays the results. Use the tabs on this
dialog box to display the following information:
• Summary information. View a summary of the differences between each mapping or mapplet on the
Summary tab. You can save this information to a text file.
• General information. Compare general information about each object such as name, description and
validity on the Mappings or Mapplets tab. You can also compare general information about shortcut.
• Instances. Compare the source, target, and transformation instances in each mapping or mapplet on the
Instances tab. You can compare source, target, transformation, and mapplet instances of the same type.
Instances with the same name appear on the same line. To compare the instances in detail, select an
instance in each mapping or mapplet and click Compare Instances.
• Links. Compare differences in incoming and outgoing links and the ports that connect the instance to
other transformation instances using the Instances tab. To compare links, first compare instances in two
mappings or mapplets. Then, click on an instance on the Instances tab and click Compare Links. To
compare incoming links, click the Incoming Links tab. To compare outgoing links, click the Outgoing Links
tab. To compare ports for each link, click on an link. If a port exists in both instances, it appears on the
same line.
• Parameters and variables. Compare the parameters and variables in each object on the Variables tab.
• Target load orders. Compare the target load order in each mapping on the Target Load Order tab. The
Designer does not display this tab when you compare mapplets.
• Metadata extensions. Compare the metadata extensions in each mapping or mapplet on the Metadata
Extensions tab.
Comparing Mappings and Mapplets 197

The following table describes the method to compare mappings, mapplets, or instances in two mappings or
mapplets:
To Compare... Open the following tool... Select...
Mappings Mapping Designer Click Mappings > Compare.
Mapplets Mapplet Designer Click Mapplets > Compare.
Instances in two Mapping Designer Click Mappings > Compare.

mappings
Instances in two mapplets Mapplet Designer Click Mapplets > Compare.
Note: If one of the fields in this dialog box is blank or displays the name of an object you do not want to
compare, click Browse to select an object.
198 Chapter 11: Comparing Objects

CHAPTER 12
Managing Business Components

• Managing Business Components Overview, 199

• Managing Business Components and Directories, 200
Managing Business Components Overview

Use business components to group and display sources and mapplets in a repository folder. A business
component node appears in each repository folder in the Repository Manager and the Designer. You can add
an unlimited number of directories to the business component tree.
A business component can refer a source, a mapplet, or a shortcut to a source or mapplet.
The following figure shows directories in which you group business components:
You can use the same source or mapplet multiple times in the business component tree.
If the business component tree is in a shared folder, all directories in the business component tree are
shared.
199
Business Component Locking
The Designer locks the business component tree while its contents are being edited. You cannot copy a
business component when the business component tree is locked.
Creating Links to Business Component Documentation

You can create and edit links that users click to view business documentation that you develop for business
components and directories. Business documentation provides details about a particular repository object or
transformation expression.
Managing Business Components and Directories

Use the Designer to perform the following tasks:
• Create a directory.
• Create a business component.
• Edit a directory.
• Delete a directory or business component.
• Copy a directory or business component.
To move a business component or directory, drag a single business component or an entire directory within
the same business component tree. If you drag a single business component or an entire directory to or from
a different repository folder or repository, the Designer prompts you to create a copy of the original object in
the destination location.
Creating and Editing a Directory

Use directories to organize repository objects within the business component tree. You can enter a name for
each directory in the tree and provide comments to identify it. When you create a directory, the directory
location appears as one of its properties. You can create a directory in a different location by selecting a
different directory node when you create the directory.
To create a business components directory:
1. In the Designer, connect to a repository and open a folder.

2. Click Repository > Business Components > New Directory.
Note: To create a business components directory under another directory, select the directory in the
Navigator and click Repository > Business Components > New Directory.
3. Enter a name and description for the business components directory.
Editing a Directory
To edit a business components directory:

2. Select the business components directory you want to edit.
3. Click Repository > Business Components > Edit Properties.
200 Chapter 12: Managing Business Components

Creating a Business Component
Create business components to view the sources and mapplets using directories. Edit the object from its
original location or from the business components directory. You can reference a source or mapplet multiple
times in the business component tree.
You can also create business components with objects from other repository folders or repositories by using
shortcuts or by copying business components.
To create a business component:
1. In the Designer, connect to a repository.

2. Open the repository folder in which you want to create a business component.
3. From the Navigator in this repository folder, select the source or mapplet to which you want to create a
reference.
4. Drag the source or mapplet into the directory in the business component tree.
Creating Business Components from a Copy

To create a copy of a business component that is not shared, drag the object from a repository folder into a
directory in the business component tree. The Designer prompts you to create a copy of the object in the
business component tree. Copies of objects from other repository folders do not inherit changes you make to
the original object.
Creating Business Components using Shortcuts

To create a business component of an object in a shared folder within a repository, drag the object into a
directory in the business component tree. The Designer prompts you to create a local shortcut. A local
shortcut references a source or mapplet in a shared folder within a repository.
To create a business component of an object in a shared folder of a global repository, connect to the global
repository and drag the object into a directory in the business component tree. The Designer prompts you to
create a global shortcut. A global shortcut is a shortcut in a local repository that references an object in a
shared folder within the global repository.
Deleting a Directory or Business Component

You can delete a directory or business component from the business component tree. Deleting a directory
deletes all subdirectories and business components in the directory. Deleting a directory or business
component does not delete the original repository objects.
To delete a business components directory:

2. Select a business components directory and click Edit > Delete.
Tip: You can delete a directory by selecting it in the Navigator and pressing the Delete key.
Deleting a Business Component

To delete a business component:

2. Select a business component and click Edit > Delete.
Tip: You can delete a business component by selecting it in the Navigator and pressing the Delete key.
Managing Business Components and Directories 201

Copying a Directory or Business Component
You can copy a business components directory to a different location in the same tree. You can also copy a
business components directory to a different repository folder or repository. Copies of objects from other
repository folders do not inherit changes you make to the original object.
To copy a directory or business component:
1. In the Designer, connect to the source database and open the folder from which you want to copy the
directory or business component.
2. In the Navigator, select the object you want to copy.
3. Click Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C.
4. If you want to copy the object to a different repository, connect to the target repository.
5. If you want to copy the object to a different folder, open the destination folder.
6. In the Navigator, select the business components directory location where you want to paste the
directory or business component.
7. Click Edit > Paste, or press Ctrl+V.
Tip: You can copy a directory or business component by connecting to a repository and pressing the
control key while you drag the directory or business component into the business components node in
the destination folder.
202 Chapter 12: Managing Business Components

CHAPTER 13
Creating Cubes and Dimensions

• Creating Cubes and Dimensions Overview, 203

• Creating a Dimension, 205
• Creating a Cube, 206
• Editing a Cube, 207
• Editing a Dimension, 207
• Deleting a Cube or Dimension, 207
• Opening and Closing a Cube, 208
• Viewing Metadata for Cubes and Dimensions, 208
• Tips for Cubes and Dimensions, 208
Creating Cubes and Dimensions Overview

The Target Designer provides an interface to enable you to create and edit cubes and dimensions. Multi-
dimensional metadata refers to the logical organization of data used for analysis in online analytical
processing (OLAP) applications. This logical organization is generally specialized for the most efficient data
representation and access by end users of the OLAP application. The following sections provide an overview
of the concepts relevant to the multi-dimensional features of PowerCenter.
Understanding Multi-Dimensional Metadata

The multi-dimensional model is a key aspect of data warehouse design. A well-designed dimensional model
can help you organize large amounts of data. The dimensional model was originally created for the retail
industry, where analysts view business data by simple dimensions, such as products and geographies. This
dimensional model consists of a large central fact table and smaller dimension tables. The fact table contains
the measurable facts, such as total sales and units sold, and disjoint dimensions represent the attributes
pertaining to various business segments of the industry. The central fact table is the only table in the schema
with multiple joins connecting it to the dimension tables. The dimension tables in turn each have a single join
connecting them to the central fact table.
There are different types of multi-dimensional models depending on the degree of redundancy in the logical
schema. More redundancy can improve the efficiency of data access but represents a less normalized view
of the logical schema. The most common type of a multi-dimensional schema is called a star schema. A star
schema is a normalized multi-dimensional model where each of its disjoint dimensions is represented in a
single table.
203
Another type of a normalized multi-dimensional model is a snowflake schema. A snowflake schema is
logically similar to a star-schema except that at least one dimension is represented in two or more
hierarchically-related tables. The star schema can become a snowflake schema if the product dimension is
represented by means of multiple tables. For example, you could add one dimension table for the main
product attributes, one for the brand attributes, and one for a specific brand attributes.
Non-normalized multi-dimensional models have duplicate attributes in tables that are associated with a
dimension. You can quickly retrieve various attributes of a dimension without having to perform multiple joins
between tables in the dimension.
Key Elements of Multi-Dimensional Metadata

The following table describes key elements of multi-dimensional metadata:
Term Definition
Aggregate Pre-stored summary of data or grouping of detailed data which satisfies a specific
business rule. Example rules: sum, min, count, or combinations of them.
Level A specific property of a dimension. Examples: size, type, and color.
Cube A set of related factual measures, aggregates, and dimensions for a specific dimensional
analysis problem. Example: regional product sales.
Dimension A set of level properties that describe a specific aspect of a business, used for analyzing
the factual measures of one or more cubes which use that dimension. Examples:
geography, time, customer, and product.
Drilling Drilling is the term used for navigating through a cube. This navigation is usually
performed to access a summary level of information or to provide more detailed properties
of a dimension in a hierarchy.
Fact A fact is a time variant measurement of quantitative data in a cube; for example, units
sold, sales dollars, or total profit.
Hierarchy Hierarchy concept refers to the level of granularity represented by the data in a particular
dimension of a cube. For example, state, county, district, and city represent different
granularity in the hierarchy of the geography dimension.
Measure Means for representing quantitative data in facts or aggregates. Example measures are
total sales or units sold per year.
Normalization A process used for reducing redundancies and removing anomalies in related dimension
tables in various hierarchies.
Redundancy Term used for referring to duplication of data among related tables for the sake of
improving the speed of query processing.
Star Schema A normalized multi-dimensional model in which each disjoint dimension is represented by
a single table.
Snow Flake Schema A normalized multi-dimensional model in which at least one dimension is represented by
two or more hierarchically related tables.
204 Chapter 13: Creating Cubes and Dimensions

Creating a Dimension
Before you can create a cube, you need to create dimensions. Complete the following steps to create a
dimension:
1. Enter a dimension description.

2. Add levels to the dimension.
3. Add hierarchies to the dimension.
4. Add level instances to the hierarchies.
Step 1. Create a Dimension

To create a dimension:
1. In the Target Designer, click Targets > Create/Edit Dimension.

The Dimension Editor displays.
2. Click Add Dimension.
• Name. Dimension names must be unique in a folder.
• Description. Enter a description for the dimension. This description appears in the Repository
Manager.
• Database type. The database type of a dimension must match the database type of the cube.
Note: You cannot change the database type after you create the dimension.
4. Click OK.
Step 2. Add Levels to the Dimension

After you create the dimension, add the needed levels. Levels hold the properties necessary to create target
tables.
To add a level to a dimension:
1. In the Dimension Editor, select Levels and click Add Level.

2. Enter a name and description for the level.
The Level name must be unique within the dimension.
3. Click Level Properties.
4. Click the Import from Source Fields button.
The name of a level property must be unique within the dimension.
5. Select a source table from which you want to copy columns to the level.
The columns display in the Source Fields section.
6. Select the columns you want to add to the level.
7. Click the Copy Columns button to add source columns to the level.
8. Click the Add Columns button to add a new column to the level.
9. Click OK after you add all the columns.
The Dimension Editor displays the new level.
Creating a Dimension 205

Step 3. Add Hierarchies to the Dimension
To add a hierarchy to a dimension:
1. In the Dimension Editor, select Hierarchies.

2. Click Add Hierarchy.
3. Enter a hierarchy name, description, and select Normalized or Non-normalized.
Normalized cubes restrict redundant data. Non-normalized cubes allow for redundant data, which
increases speed for retrieving data.
Step 4. Add Levels to the Hierarchy

After you create a hierarchy, you add levels to it. You can have only one root level in a hierarchy.
To add a level to a hierarchy:
1. From the Dimension Editor, drill down to view the levels in the dimension.
2. Drag the level you want to define as the root level in the hierarchy.
The root level is the level of finest granularity.
3. Enter a target table name and description of the target table.
4. Click OK.
A window displays a listing of all the objects affected by the new level.
5. Click OK.
The new level displays under the hierarchy.
Creating a Cube
To create a cube:
1. From the Target Designer, click Targets > Create Cube.

• Cube name. The cube name must be unique in a folder.
• Cube type. Choose Normalized or Non-normalized. Normalized dimensions must have a normalized
cube. Similarly, non-normalized dimensions must have a non-normalized cube.
• Database type. The database type for the cube must match the database type for the dimensions in
the cube.
3. Click Next.
4. Specify the dimensions and hierarchies to include in the cube.
5. Click Next.
6. Add measures to the cube.
You can copy columns from source tables or add new columns.
Measure names must be unique within a fact. Level names must be unique within each cube.
7. Add a name for the fact table.
8. Click Finish.
The Designer adds the cube and fact tables to the workspace.

Editing a Cube
You can edit a cube in the Target Designer. You cannot edit a fact table or dimension table directly. To edit a
column in a fact table or dimension table, you need to edit the cube or dimension.
To edit a cube:
1. Click Targets > Edit Cube.

2. You can modify any settings in the dimension except the following:
• Database type
• Dimension type (normalized or non-normalized)
3. Click Close.
Editing a Dimension
You can edit dimensions in the Target Designer. You cannot, however, change the database type after you
create a dimension.
When you edit a dimension, the Designer marks all mappings with the dimension invalid.
To edit a dimension:
1. Click Targets > Create/Edit Dimension.

2. Optionally, modify any setting in the dimension except database type or dimension type.
3. Click Close.
Deleting a Cube or Dimension

You can delete a cube or dimension from the Navigator in the Designer. Unlike target tables, you cannot
delete cubes and dimensions in the Target Designer.
When you delete a cube, you delete all fact tables associated with the cube. When you delete a dimension,
you delete all dimension tables and references to the dimension.
To delete a cube or dimension:
1. In the Designer, open the repository.

2. In the Navigator, select the cube or dimension you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
A message prompts you to verify if you want to delete the cube or dimension.
4. Click OK to delete the cube or dimension.
Editing a Cube 207

Opening and Closing a Cube
You can open a cube in the Target Designer.
To open a cube:
1. Open a repository and open a folder.

2. Open the Target Designer.
3. Select the cube and drag it into the workspace.
A message prompts you to clear the workspace.
4. Click OK to open the cube.
The Designer clears the workspace and displays all fact and dimension tables associated with the cube.
To close a cube in the Target Designer, click Targets > Close Cube. The Designer closes the cube, saving
the layout of all the tables.
Viewing Metadata for Cubes and Dimensions

You can view the metadata for cubes and dimensions in the Repository Manager.
To view cube or dimension metadata:
1. In the Repository Manager, open a folder.

2. Drill down to the cube or dimension you want to analyze.
The Repository Manager displays the metadata for each object.
Tips for Cubes and Dimensions

Consider the following tips when working with cubes and dimensions:
• If you want to copy a cube, you need to copy the folder that stores the cube.
• To view the levels of a cube or dimension, you can either edit the cube or dimension or use the Navigator
in the Repository Manager.
• You cannot revert to previous versions of cubes or dimensions.
• You can delete a cube or dimension from the Navigator.
• You can delete a dimension using Targets > Create/Edit Dimension.
• You cannot delete cubes and dimensions from the Target Designer workspace.
• If you want to change a column in a fact table or dimension table, you need to edit the cube or dimension.
You cannot edit a fact table or dimension table directly.
• If you delete a level, the Designer deletes the associated level instances in hierarchies. The Designer also
removes the level instance from any associated cubes.
• A primary key is generated for each fact and dimension table. The format is GK_TABLE_NAME.
• A foreign key is added to the appropriate fact table when you associate a dimension level instance to the
fact table.

• You can drag a cube to the workspace and then edit the cube and cardinality by double-clicking the links.
• You cannot delete or create a link between fact and dimension tables in the workspace. You can only
delete and create links in the Cube and Dimension Editors. You can create a graph in the hierarchy.
Tips for Cubes and Dimensions 209

CHAPTER 14
Using the Mapping Wizards

• Maintaining Star Schemas, 210

• Understanding the Mapping Wizards, 212
• Creating a Pass-Through Mapping, 214
• Creating a Slowly Growing Target Mapping, 216
• Creating a Type 1 Dimension Mapping, 218
• Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Mapping, 222
• Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Mapping, 228
• Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range Mapping, 234
• Creating a Type 3 Dimension Mapping, 240
• Creating Targets in the Target Database, 246
• Scheduling Sessions and Workflows, 246
• Creating a Mapping from the Informatica Mapping Templates, 247
Maintaining Star Schemas

When you design a star schema, you create a fact table for information collected over time, such as
purchases or transactions. You then build separate dimension tables for related lists of information, such as
inventory or shipping methods. Each dimension table has a logical primary or generated composite key to
enable access to dimensional data. For example, you might use an inventory part number as a primary key,
or create a composite key using a part number and a current flag.
210
The following image shows a star schema with four dimension tables and one fact table:
When you implement a star schema, you decide how to handle updates to the fact and dimension tables.
Fact tables change regularly as new information collects. Do you need to keep all existing data in the fact
table, or do you want only the most recent version or snapshot?
If you do not need any historical fact information, you can drop or truncate the existing fact table before using
a new session in a workflow. To keep historical information in a fact table, you usually append the latest
snapshot to the existing table, using a flag such as a load date or session number to identify the most recent
snapshot.
Although dimension tables are typically static lists, most dimension tables do change over time. For example,
you might need to update an inventory dimension once a month to reflect new or changed part numbers.
Since these changes are smaller in magnitude compared to changes in fact tables, these dimensions are
known as slowly growing or slowly changing dimensions.
Slowly growing dimensions are dimension tables that have slowing increasing dimension data, without
updates to existing dimensions. You maintain slowly growing dimensions by appending new data to the
existing table.
Slowly changing dimensions are dimension tables that have slowly increasing dimension data and updates to
existing dimensions. When updating existing dimensions, you decide whether to keep all historical dimension
data, no historical data, or just the current and previous versions of dimension data.
When you do not need historical information in a slowly growing or slowly changing dimension table, you can
drop or truncate the existing table before using a new session in a workflow. However, in some cases,
inserting new dimensions and updating existing dimensions can be more efficient than reloading the entire
table.
When you need historical information in a dimension table, you decide how to differentiate between current
and historical data in the target:
• To keep a full history, you might version new data by:

- Creating a version number and versioning the primary key.
- Creating a composite key using a current version flag.
- Creating an effective date range.

• To keep a partial history, you might keep a current version and a previous version in a single row. You
can also enter a timestamp to indicate the most recent update.
Maintaining Star Schemas 211

Understanding the Mapping Wizards
The Designer provides two mapping wizards to help you create mappings quickly and easily. Both wizards
are designed to create mappings for loading and maintaining star schemas, a series of dimensions related to
a central fact table. You can, however, use the generated mappings to load other types of targets.
You choose a different wizard and different options in each wizard based on the type of target you want to
load and the way you want to handle historical data in the target:
• Getting Started Wizard. Creates mappings to load static fact and dimension tables and slowly growing
dimension tables.
• Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard. Creates mappings to load slowly changing dimension tables
based on the amount of historical dimension data you want to keep and the method you choose to handle
historical dimension data.
After using a mapping wizard, you can edit the generated mapping to further customize it.
Using the Getting Started Wizard

The Getting Started Wizard creates mappings to load static fact and dimension tables and slowly growing
dimension tables.
The Getting Started Wizard can create two types of mappings:
• Pass through. Loads a static fact or dimension table by inserting all rows. Use this mapping when you
want to drop all existing data from the table before loading new data.
• Slowly growing target. Loads a slowly growing fact or dimension table by inserting new rows. Use this
mapping to load new data when existing data does not require updates.
The following table describes the getting started mapping types:
Getting Started Target Table Type History Data Handling

Mapping Type
Pass through Static Fact or None Inserts all source rows. Use the truncate target
Dimension table option in the session properties, or use a
pre-session shell command to drop or truncate
the target before each session run.
Slowly growing target Slowly Growing Fact Full Flags and inserts new rows to the existing
or Dimension target.
Using the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard

The Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard creates mappings to load slowly changing dimension tables:
• Type 1 Dimension mapping. Loads a slowly changing dimension table by inserting new dimensions and
overwriting existing dimensions. Use this mapping when you do not want a history of previous dimension
data.
• Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping. Loads a slowly changing dimension table by inserting new
and changed dimensions using a version number and incremented primary key to track changes. Use this
mapping when you want to keep a full history of dimension data and to track the progression of changes.
• Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping. Loads a slowly changing dimension table by inserting new
and changed dimensions using a flag to mark current dimension data and an incremented primary key to
212 Chapter 14: Using the Mapping Wizards

track changes. Use this mapping when you want to keep a full history of dimension data, tracking the
progression of changes while flagging only the current dimension.
• Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping. Loads a slowly changing dimension table by
inserting new and changed dimensions using a date range to define current dimension data. Use this
mapping when you want to keep a full history of dimension data, tracking changes with an effective date
range.
• Type 3 Dimension mapping. Loads a slowly changing dimension table by inserting new dimensions and
updating values in existing dimensions. Use this mapping when you want to keep the current and previous
dimension values in the dimension table.
The following table describes the slowly changing dimension mapping types:
Slowly Changing Target Table History Data Handling

Dimensions Mapping
Type 1 Dimension Slowly Changing None Inserts new dimensions. Overwrites existing
Dimension dimensions with changed dimensions.
Type 2 Dimension/ Slowly Changing Full Inserts new and changed dimensions. Creates
Version Data Dimension a version number and increments the primary
key to track changes.
Type 2 Dimension/Flag Slowly Changing Full Inserts new and changed dimensions. Flags the
Current Dimension current version and increments the primary key
to track changes.
Type 2 Dimension/ Slowly Changing Full Inserts new and changed dimensions. Creates
Effective Date Range Dimension an effective date range to track changes.
Type 3 Dimension Slowly Changing Partial Inserts new dimensions. Updates changed
Dimension values in existing dimensions. Optionally uses
the load date to track changes.
Choosing Sources for the Mappings

Use the following sources with a mapping wizard:
• Flat file
• Relational
• Application
• Shortcut to a flat file, relational, or Application sources
You cannot use COBOL or XML sources with the mapping wizards.
When you select a source for a mapping, the mapping wizards display all available sources by source name.
The Designer can optionally display sources and target definitions by business name, rather than source and
target name. Even when this option is selected, mapping wizards display sources by source name.
The Mapping Wizard cannot import a source when a column name uses an SQL keyword. When the Mapping
Wizard encounters an SQL keyword used as a column name, it prompts you to choose another source. If you
want to use a source with a column using an SQL keyword, create the mapping in the Mapping Designer.
The mapping wizards also complete the following based on the selected source:
• Use the source name to name the source qualifier as follows: SQ_SourceName for file or relational
sources, or ASQ_SourceName for Application sources.
Understanding the Mapping Wizards 213

• Create port names based on source column names.
Creating a Pass-Through Mapping

The pass-through mapping inserts all source rows. Use the pass-through mapping to load tables when you
do not need to keep historical data in the target table. If source rows already exist in the target, truncate or
drop the existing target before running the workflow. In the pass-through mapping, all rows are current.
You might use the pass-through mapping to load a fact or dimension table if the table remains static for a
period of time, and then changes dramatically.
For example, you might have a vendor dimension table that remains the same for a year. At the end of the
year, you reload the table to reflect new vendor contracts and contact information. If this information changes
dramatically and you do not want to keep historical information, you can drop the existing dimension table
and use the pass-through mapping to reload the entire table. If the information changes only incrementally,
you might prefer to update the existing table using the Type 1 Dimension mapping created by the Slowly
Changing Dimensions Wizard.
Understanding the Mapping

The pass-through mapping performs the following tasks:
• Selects all source rows

• Inserts all rows into the target
The following figure shows a mapping that the Getting Started Wizard creates when you create a pass-
through mapping:
A single data flow passes from a source definition, through a source qualifier and an Expression
transformation, to the target. By default, the Expression transformation passes data directly to the target
without changes.

Understanding the Transformations
The following table describes the function of each transformation in the pass-through mapping:
Transformation Transformation Type Description

Name
SQ_SourceName Source Qualifier or Selects all rows from the source you choose in the Mapping
Application Source Wizard.
Qualifier
EXP_TransformData Expression Passes all source data to the target without changes.
T_TargetName Target Definition Target definition allowing source data to be inserted into
the target.
Steps to Create a Pass-Through Mapping

To create a pass-through mapping:
1. In the Mapping Designer, click Mappings > Wizards > Getting Started.
2. Enter a mapping name and select Simple Pass Through, and click Next.
The naming convention for mapping names is m_MappingName.
3. Select a source definition to use in the mapping.
All available source definitions appear in the Select Source Table list. This list can include shortcuts, flat
file, relational, and Application sources.
4. Enter a name for the mapping target table and click Finish.
The new mapping appears in the workspace. The naming convention for target definitions is
T_TARGET_NAME.
Make necessary edits to the mapping.
Create the target table in the target database before running a workflow.
Customizing the Mapping

After the wizard creates the mapping, you can configure the Expression transformation, EXP_TransformData.
You can also add any other transformations to customize the mapping.
If you want data to pass directly from source to target without any other transformations, delete the
Expression transformation. You can optimize performance for pass-through mappings by connecting the
source qualifier directly to the target.
Configuring a Pass-Through Session

The pass-through mapping inserts source rows into the target. To prevent primary key errors from duplicate
rows, drop or truncate the target table before running the workflow. Use the truncate target table option in the
session properties, or use a pre-session shell command to perform this task automatically.
Creating a Pass-Through Mapping 215

Creating a Slowly Growing Target Mapping
The slowly growing target mapping filters source rows based on user-defined comparisons, and then inserts
only those found to be new to the target. Use the slowly growing target mapping to determine which source
rows are new and to load them to an existing target table. In the slowly growing target mapping, all rows are
current.
Use the slowly growing target mapping to load a slowly growing fact or dimension table, one in which existing
data does not require updates.
For example, you have a site code dimension table that contains only a store name and a corresponding site
code that you update only after the company opens a new store. Although listed stores might close, you want
to keep the store code and name in the dimension for historical analysis. With the slowly growing target
mapping, you can load new source rows to the site code dimension table without deleting historical sites.
Handling Keys
When you create a slowly growing target mapping, the Designer creates an additional column in the mapping
target, PM_PRIMARYKEY. In this column, the Integration Service generates a primary key for each row
written to the target, incrementing new key values by 1.

The slowly growing target mapping performs the following tasks:
• Selects all rows

• Caches the existing target as a lookup table
• Compares logical key columns in the source against corresponding columns in the target lookup table
• Filters out existing rows
• Generates a primary key for new rows
• Inserts new rows to the target
The following figure shows a mapping that the Getting Started Wizard creates when you create a slowly
growing target mapping:
The slowly growing target mapping uses a Lookup and an Expression transformation to compare source data
against existing target data. When you step through the Getting Started Wizard you enter the logical key
columns in the source to compare against the existing target. When the Expression transformation detects
source rows without matching key columns in the target, it flags the row new.
A Filter transformation passes only new rows to the Update Strategy transformation. The Update Strategy
transformation marks new rows for insert and a Sequence Generator creates a new primary key value for
each row written to the target.

The following table describes the function of each transformation in the slowly growing target mapping:

Name
Qualifier
LKP_GetData Lookup Caches the existing target table.

Compares a logical key column in the source against the
corresponding key column in the target.
EXP_DetectChanges Expression Uses the following expression to flag source rows that have
no matching key in the target (indicating they are new):
IIF(ISNULL(PM_PRIMARYKEY),TRUE,FALSE)
Populates the NewFlag field with the results.
Passes all rows to FIL_InsertNewRecord.
FIL_InsertNewRecord Filter Uses the following filter condition to filter out any rows from
EXP_DetectChanges that are not marked new (TRUE):
NewFlag. Passes new rows to UPD_ForceInserts.
UPD_ForceInserts Update Strategy Uses DD_INSERT to insert rows to the target.
SEQ_GenerateKeys Sequence Generator Generates a value for each new row written to the target,
incrementing values by 1.
Passes values to the target to populate the
PM_PRIMARYKEY column.
T_TargetName Target Definition Instance of the target definition for new rows to be inserted
into the target.
Steps to Create a Slowly Growing Target Mapping

To create a slowly growing target mapping:
1. In the Mapping Designer, click Mappings > Wizards > Getting Started.
2. Enter a mapping name and select Slowly Growing Target, and click Next.
The naming convention for mapping names is m_MappingName.
3. Select a source definition to be used in the mapping.
All available source definitions appear in the Select Source Table list. This list includes shortcuts, flat
4. Enter a name for the mapping target table. Click Next.
The naming convention for target definitions is T_TARGET_NAME.
5. Select the column or columns from the Target Table Fields list that you want the Integration Service to
use to look up data in the target table. Click Add.
The wizard adds selected columns to the Logical Key Fields list.
Tip: The columns you select should be a key column in the source.
Creating a Slowly Growing Target Mapping 217

When you run a workflow containing the session, the Integration Service performs a lookup on existing
target data. The Integration Service returns target data when Logical Key Fields columns match
corresponding target columns.
To remove a column from Logical Key Fields, select the column and click Remove.
Note: You cannot add a port using the name, FILLER, to the Logical Key field list.
6. Click Finish.
The new mapping appears in the workspace. Make necessary edits to the mapping.
Note: The Fields to Compare for Changes field is disabled for the slowly growing target mapping.
Configuring a Slowly Growing Target Session

The slowly growing target mapping flags new source rows, and then inserts them to the target with a new
primary key. The mapping uses an Update Strategy transformation to indicate new rows must be inserted.
Therefore, when you create a session for the mapping, configure the session as follows:
1. In the session properties, click the General Options settings on the Properties tab. Set Treat Source
Rows As to Data Driven.
2. In the session properties, click the Target Properties settings on the Mappings tab. To verify that the
Integration Service loads rows to the target properly, select Insert for each relational target.
Creating a Type 1 Dimension Mapping

The Type 1 Dimension mapping filters source rows based on user-defined comparisons and inserts only
those found to be new dimensions to the target. Rows containing changes to existing dimensions are
updated in the target by overwriting the existing dimension. In the Type 1 Dimension mapping, all rows
contain current dimension data.
Use the Type 1 Dimension mapping to update a slowly changing dimension table when you do not need to
keep any previous versions of dimensions in the table.
For example, you might have a site dimension table with store code, location, and overhead that you update
after the company opens a new store. This dimension is used for sales and overhead calculations. Since you
do not need to know the previous address of the same store or the store overhead from the previous year,
you do not need previous dimension data in the table. With the Type 1 Dimension mapping, you can keep
current data without a historical log.
Handling Keys
When you use the Type 1 Dimension option, the Designer creates an additional column in the mapping
target, PM_PRIMARYKEY. In this column, the Integration Service generates a primary key for each row
written to the target, incrementing new key values by 1.

The Type 1 Dimension mapping performs the following tasks:
• Selects all rows.

• Caches the existing target as a lookup table.

• Compares logical key columns in the source against corresponding columns in the target lookup table.
• Compares source columns against corresponding target columns if key columns match.
• Flags new rows and changed rows.
• Creates two data flows: one for new rows, one for changed rows.
• Generates a primary key for new rows.
• Inserts new rows to the target.
• Updates changed rows in the target, overwriting existing rows.
The following figure shows a mapping that the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard creates when you select
the Type 1 Dimension option:
The Type 1 Dimension mapping uses a Lookup and an Expression transformation to compare source data
against existing target data. When you step through the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard, you enter the
lookup conditions (source key columns) and source columns that you want the Integration Service to
compare against the existing target.
For each source row without a matching primary key in the target, the Expression transformation marks the
row new. For each source row with a matching primary key in the target, the Expression compares user-
defined source and target columns. If those columns do not match, the Expression marks the row changed.
The mapping then splits into two separate data flows.
The first data flow uses the Filter transformation, FIL_InsertNewRecord, to filter out existing rows. The Filter
transformation passes only new rows to the UPD_ForceInserts Update Strategy transformation.
UPD_ForceInserts inserts new rows to the target, and a Sequence Generator creates a primary key for each
row.
In the second data flow, the FIL_UpdateChangedRecord Filter transformation allows only changed rows to
pass to the Update Strategy transformation, UPD_ChangedUpdate. UPD_ChangedUpdate replaces existing
rows in the target with the updated source rows.
Creating a Type 1 Dimension Mapping 219

The following table describes the function of each transformation in the Type 1 Dimension mapping:

Name
Qualifier

Compares key columns in the source against corresponding
key columns in the target. When matching keys exist,
LKP_GetData returns additional column data from the
target for comparison.
Passes all rows to EXP_DetectChanges.
EXP_DetectChanges Expression Uses the following expression to flag source rows that do
not have matching keys in the target. The expression
returns TRUE if a matching key does not exist in the target,
indicating the row is new:
Populates the NewFlag port with the results.
Uses the following expression to flag source rows that have
a matching key in the target and contain changes in the
specified columns. The expression returns TRUE only if a
matching key exists in the target (indicating the row is not
new) and if it detects a difference between source and
target columns: IIF(ISNULL(PM_PRIMARYKEY) AND
(SourceColumnName<>PM_PREV_TargetColumnNam
e) AND (other comparisons) TRUE,FALSE)
Populates the ChangedFlag port with the results.
Passes all rows to FIL_InsertNewRecord and
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord.
Data Flow for New Rows

For each new row in the source, this data flow creates a primary key, sets the beginning of the effective date
range, and inserts the row into the target.
The following table describes the data flow for new rows:

Name

Name
Passes values to the target to populate the
into the target.
Data Flow for Changed Rows

For each changed row in the source, this data flow marks the row for update and overwrites the
corresponding row in the target.
The following table describes the data flow for changed rows:
Transformation Name Transformation Description

Type
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord Filter Uses the following filter condition to filter out any rows
from EXP_DetectChanges that are not marked changed
(TRUE): ChangedFlag. Passes changed rows to
UPD_ChangedUpdate.
UPD_ChangedUpdate Update Strategy Uses DD_UPDATE to overwrite corresponding rows in

the target.
T_TargetName1 Target Definition Instance of the target definition allowing changed rows
to be overwritten in the target.
Steps to Create a Type 1 Dimension Mapping

To create a slowly growing target mapping, complete the following steps:
1. In the Mapping Designer, click Mappings > Wizards > Slowly Changing Dimension.
2. Enter a mapping name and select Type 1 Dimension, and click Next.
The naming convention for mappings is m_MappingName.
3. Select a source definition to be used by the mapping.
5. Select the column or columns you want to use as a lookup condition from the Target Table Fields list and
click Add.

When you run the workflow containing the session, the Integration Service performs a lookup on existing
6. Select the column or columns you want the Integration Service to compare for changes, and click Add.
The wizard adds selected columns to the Fields to Compare for Changes list.
When you run the workflow containing the session, the Integration Service compares the columns in the
Fields to Compare for Changes list between source rows and the corresponding target (lookup) rows. If
the Integration Service detects a change, it marks the row changed.
To remove a column from the list, select the column and click Remove.
7. Click Finish.
The new mapping appears in the workspace. Make the necessary edits to the mappings.
Note: In the Type 1 Dimension mapping, the Designer uses two instances of the same target definition to
enable inserting and updating data in the same target table. Generate only one target table in the target
database.
Configuring a Type 1 Dimension Session

The Type 1 Dimension mapping inserts new rows with a new primary key and updates existing rows. When
you create a session for the mapping, configure the session as follows:
Integration Service loads rows to the target properly, select Insert and Update as Update for each
relational target.
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Mapping

The Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping filters source rows based on user-defined comparisons and
inserts both new and changed dimensions into the target. Changes are tracked in the target table by
versioning the primary key and creating a version number for each dimension in the table. In the Type 2
Dimension/Version Data target, the current version of a dimension has the highest version number and the
highest incremented primary key of the dimension.
Use the Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping to update a slowly changing dimension table when you
want to keep a full history of dimension data in the table. Version numbers and versioned primary keys track
the order of changes to each dimension.
When you use this option, the Designer creates two additional fields in the target:
• PM_PRIMARYKEY. The Integration Service generates a primary key for each row written to the target.
• PM_VERSION_NUMBER. The Integration Service generates a version number for each row written to the
target.

Handling Keys
In a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping, the Integration Service generates a new primary key value for
each new dimension it inserts into the target. An Expression transformation increments key values by 1,000
for new dimensions.
When updating a dimension, the Integration Service increments the existing primary key by 1.
For example, the Integration Service inserts the following new row with a key value of 65,000 since this is the
sixty-fifth dimension in the table.
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES
65000 Sandal 5
The next time you run the workflow containing the session, the same item has a different number of styles.
The Integration Service creates a new row with updated style information and increases the existing key by 1
to create a new key of 65,001. Both rows exist in the target, but the row with the higher key version contains
current dimension data.
65000 Sandal 5
65001 Sandal 14
When you run the workflow again, the Integration Service again increments the key. The highest key version
contains current dimension data. The target keeps a full history of the item and the order in which the
versions occurred.
65000 Sandal 5
65001 Sandal 14
65002 Sandal 17
Numbering Versions
In addition to versioning the primary key, the Integration Service generates a matching version number for
each row inserted into the target. Version numbers correspond to the final digit in the primary key. New
dimensions have a version number of 0.
For example, in the data below, the versions are 0, 1, and 2. The highest version number contains the current
dimension data.
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES PM_VERSION_NUMBER
65000 Sandal 5 0
65001 Sandal 14 1
65002 Sandal 17 2
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Mapping 223

The Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping performs the following tasks:

• Generates a primary key and version number for new rows.
• Increments the primary key and version number for changed rows.
• Inserts changed rows in the target.
The following figure shows a mapping that the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard creates when you select
the Type 2 Dimension/Version Data option:
The Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping uses a Lookup and an Expression transformation to compare
source data against existing target data. When you step through the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard,
you enter the lookup conditions (source key columns) and source columns that you want the Integration
Service to compare against the existing target.
The mapping then splits into two data flows.
UPD_ForceInserts inserts new rows to the target. A Sequence Generator creates a primary key for each row.
The Expression transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertNew, increases the increment between keys by
1,000 and creates a version number of 0 for each new row.
In the second data flow, the FIL_InsertChangedRecord Filter transformation allows only changed rows to
pass to the Update Strategy transformation, UPD_ChangedInserts. UPD_ChangedInserts inserts changed
rows to the target. The Expression transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertChanged, increments both the
key and the version number by one.

The following table describes the function of each transformation in the Type 2 Dimension/Version Data
mapping:

Name
Qualifier

LKP_GetData returns additional column data from the
target for comparison.
EXP_DetectChanges Expression Uses the following expression to flag source rows that do
not have matching keys in the target. The expression
returns TRUE if a matching key does not exist in the target,
indicating the row is new:
Uses the following expression to flag source rows that have
a matching key in the target and contain changes in the
specified columns. The expression returns TRUE only if a
matching key exists in the target (indicating the row is not
new) and if it detects a difference between source and
target columns: IIF(ISNULL(PM_PRIMARYKEY) AND
(SourceColumnName<>PM_PREV_TargetColumnNam
e) AND (other comparisons) TRUE,FALSE)
FIL_InsertChangedRecord.

The following table describes the data flow for new rows. For each new row in the source, this data flow
creates a primary key and version number, and then inserts it into the target:

Name
Passes values to EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertNew.

Name
EXP_KeyProcessing_I Expression Uses the following expression to increment generated

nsertNew values by 1,000: NEXTVAL * 1,000. Then passes
incremented values to the target to populate the
Creates a version number of 0 for each row to populate the
PM_VERSION_NUMBER column in the target.
into the target.

The following table describes the data flow for changed rows. For each changed row in the source, this data
flow increments the existing primary key by one, creates a corresponding version number, and inserts the
row into the target:

Type
FIL_InsertChangedRecord Filter Uses the following filter condition to filter out any rows
(TRUE): ChangedFlag. Passes changed rows to
UPD_ChangedInserts.
UPD_ChangedInserts Update Strategy Uses DD_INSERT to insert rows to the target.
EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertC Expression Uses the following expression to increment the existing

hanged primary key by one: PM_PRIMARYKEY + 1.
Uses the following expression to increment the existing
version number by one: (PM_PRIMARYKEY + 1) %
1,000.
to be inserted into the target.
Steps to Create a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Mapping

To create a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping:
1. In the Mapping Designer, click Mappings > Wizards > Slowly Changing Dimensions.
2. Enter a mapping name and select Type 2 Dimension. Click Next.
All available source definitions appear in the Select Source Table list. The list includes shortcuts, flat file,
relational, and Application sources.
click Add.

When you run the workflow containing the session, the Integration Service performs a lookup on existing
When you run the workflow containing the session, the Integration Service compares the columns in the
Fields to Compare for Changes list between source rows and the corresponding target rows. If the
Integration Service detects a change, it marks the row changed.
7. Click Next.
8. Select Keep the ‘Version’ Number in Separate Column. Click Finish.
Note: In the Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping, the Designer uses two instances of the same
target definition to enable the two separate data flows to write to the same target table. Generate only
one target table in the target database.
Customizing the Mapping

Depending on the number of versions you expect the dimension data to have, you might reduce or increase
the increment the Integration Service creates between generated keys. By default, the Integration Service
increments the sequence by 1,000. This allows for 1,000 versions of a single dimension.
If appropriate, you might reduce or increase the increment. To do this, you edit the Expression
transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertNew, after creating the mapping.
To change the primary key increment:
1. Double-click the title bar of the Expression transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertNew.

2. Click the Ports tab.
3. Click in the far right corner of the Expression field of the PM_PRIMARYKEY port.
The Expression Editor appears.
4. Delete the existing value, 1000, and enter the value you want the Integration Service to use when
incrementing the primary key. Click Validate.
Configuring a Type 2 Dimension/Version Data Session

The Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping inserts both new and updated rows with a unique primary key.
When you configure a session for the mapping, complete the following steps:
Integration Service loads rows to the target properly, select Insert for each relational target.

Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Mapping
The Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping filters source rows based on user-defined comparisons and
inserts both new and changed dimensions into the target. Changes are tracked in the target table by flagging
the current version of each dimension and versioning the primary key. In the Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current
target, the current version of a dimension has a current flag set to 1 and the highest incremented primary key.
Use the Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping to update a slowly changing dimension table when you
want to keep a full history of dimension data in the table, with the most current data flagged. Versioned
primary keys track the order of changes to each dimension.
When you use this option, the Designer creates two additional fields in the target:
• PM_CURRENT_FLAG. The Integration Service flags the current row “1” and all previous versions “0.”
Flagging the Current Value

The Integration Service generates a current flag of 1 for each row written to the target. This flag indicates the
dimension is new or newly updated. If the row is an update to an existing dimension, the Integration Service
resets the existing dimension current flag to 0.
As a result, all current versions of a dimension appear in the target with a current flag of 1. All previous
versions have a current flag of 0.
For example, the following dimension data is current because the current flag is set to 1:
ITEM STYLES PM_CURRENT_FLAG
Sandal 5 1
Boot 25 1
When these dimensions change, the Integration Service inserts the updated versions with the current flag of
1. The Integration Service also updates the existing rows in the target. It finds the previous current version
(where the current flag is set to 1 and updates the current flag to 0:
ITEM STYLES PM_CURRENT_FLAG
Sandal 5 0
Boot 25 0
Sandal 12 1
Boot 15 1
Handling Keys
When you use the Flag Current option, the Integration Service generates a primary key value for each row
written to the target, incrementing key values by one. An Expression transformation increments key values by
1,000 for new dimensions.
When updating an existing dimension, the Integration Service increments the existing primary key by 1.

For example, the following dimensions are current dimension data (current flags set to one). Their primary
keys are multiples of 1,000. This indicates they are both the first version of a dimension:
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES PM_CURRENT_FLAG
3000 Sandal 5 1
4000 Boot 25 1
When the Integration Service inserts updated versions of these dimensions into the target, it sets the current
flag to 1. It also creates a new primary key for the updated row by incrementing key of the existing dimension
by one. The Integration Service indicates the existing dimension is no longer current by resetting its current
flag to 0:
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES PM_CURRENT_FLAG
3000 Sandal 5 0
4000 Boot 25 0
3001 Sandal 12 1
4001 Boot 15 1

The Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping performs the following tasks:

• Generates a primary key and current flag for new rows.
• Increments the existing primary key and sets the current flag for changed rows.
• Updates existing versions of the changed rows in the target, resetting the current flag to indicate the row
is no longer current.
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Mapping 229

The following figure shows a mapping that the Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current option in the Slowly Changing
Dimensions Wizard creates:
The Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping uses a Lookup and an Expression transformation to compare
source data against existing target data. When you step through the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard,
you enter the lookup conditions (source key columns) and source columns that you want the Integration
Service to compare against the existing target.
The mapping then splits into three data flows.
UPD_ForceInserts inserts new rows to the target. A Sequence Generator creates a primary key for each new
row. The Expression transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertNew, increases the increment between keys
by 1,000 and creates a current flag of 1 for each new row.
rows to the target. The Expression transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertChanged, increments the
primary key by one and creates a current flag of 1 to indicate the updated row contains current dimension
data.
In the third data flow, for each changed row written to the target, the Filter transformation,
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord, passes the primary key of the previous version to the Update Strategy
transformation, UPD_ChangedUpdate. UPD_ChangedUpdate updates dimensions in the target. The
Expression transformation, EXP_UpdateChanged, sets the current flag to 0. This changes the status of the
previous dimension from current to not-current.

The following table describes the function of each transformation in the Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current
mapping:
Transformation Transformation Description

Name Type
Qualifier

LKP_GetData returns additional column data from the target for
comparison.
EXP_DetectChanges Expression Uses the following expression to flag source rows that do not
have matching keys in the target. The expression returns TRUE
if a matching key does not exist in the target, indicating the row
is new: IIF(ISNULL(PM_PRIMARYKEY),TRUE,FALSE)
Uses the following expression to flag source rows that have a
matching key in the target and contain changes in the specified
columns. The expression returns TRUE only if a matching key
exists in the target, which indicates the row is not new, and if it
detects a difference between source and target columns:
IIF(ISNULL(PM_PRIMARYKEY) AND
(SourceColumnName<>PM_PREV_TargetColumnName)
AND (other comparisons) TRUE,FALSE)
Passes all rows to FIL_InsertNewRecord,
FIL_InsertChangedRecord, and FIL_UpdateChangedRecord.

creates a primary key and increments it by 1,000. It also flags the row current and inserts it into the target:

Name

Name
EXP_KeyProcessing_I Expression Uses the following expression to increment generated

nsertNew values by 1,000: NEXTVAL * 1,000. Then passes
incremented values to the target to populate the
Creates a current flag of 1 for each row to populate the
PM_CURRENT_FLAG column in the target.
into the target.

flow increments the existing primary key by 1, flags the row current, and inserts it into the target:

Type
that are not marked changed: ChangedFlag. Passes
changed rows to UPD_ChangedInserts.
EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertC Expression Uses the following expression to increment the existing

hanged primary key by one: PM_PRIMARYKEY + 1.
Creates a current flag of 1 for each row to populate the
PM_CURRENT_FLAG column in the target.
to be inserted into the target.
Data Flow to Update Existing Rows

The following table describes the data flow for existing rows. For each changed row in the source, this data
flow updates the end date of the corresponding row in the target to indicate the existing row is no longer
current:

Type
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord Filter Uses the following filter condition to filter out any rows
(TRUE): ChangedFlag.
For each changed row, passes the primary key of the
previous version to UPD_ChangedUpdate.
UPD_ChangedUpdate Update Strategy Uses DD_UPDATE to update existing rows in the target.

Type
EXP_KeyProcessing_Update Expression For each changed row, sets PM_CURRENT_FLAG to 0

Changed for the previous version in the target, indicating that
version is no longer current.
T_TargetName3 Target Definition Instance of the target definition allowing updates to

existing rows in the target.
Steps to Create a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Mapping

To create a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping:
click Add.
When you run the session, the Integration Service performs a lookup on existing target data. The
Integration Service returns target data when Logical Key Fields columns match corresponding target
columns.
When you run the session, the Integration Service compares the columns in the Fields to Compare for
Changes list between source rows and the corresponding target (lookup) rows. If the Integration Service
detects a change, it marks the row changed.
7. Click Next. Select Mark the ‘Current’ Dimension Record with a Flag.
8. Click Finish.
Note: In the Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping, the Designer uses three instances of the same
target definition to enable the three separate data flows to write to the same target table. Generate only
one target table in the target database.

Configuring a Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current Session
The Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping inserts both new and updated rows with a unique primary key.
It also updates existing rows in the target. When you configure a session for the mapping, complete the
following steps:
relational target.
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range

Mapping
The Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping filters source rows based on user-defined comparisons
and inserts both new and changed dimensions into the target. Changes are tracked in the target table by
maintaining an effective date range for each version of each dimension in the target. In the Type 2
Dimension/Effective Date Range target, the current version of a dimension has a begin date with no
corresponding end date.
Use the Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping to update a slowly changing dimension table when
you want to keep a full history of dimension data in the table. An effective date range tracks the chronological
history of changes for each dimension.
When you use this option, the Designer creates the following additional fields in the target:
• PM_BEGIN_DATE. For each new and changed dimension written to the target, the Integration Service
uses the system date to indicate the start of the effective date range for the dimension.
• PM_END_DATE. For each dimension being updated, the Integration Service uses the system date to
indicate the end of the effective date range for the dimension.
Maintaining the Effective Date Range

The Integration Service generates a begin date for each new and changed dimension it inserts into the
target, using the current system date. The end date for these dimensions is NULL.
Each time the Integration Service inserts a changed dimension, it updates the previous version of the
dimension in the target, using the current system date to fill the previously null end date column.
As a result, all current dimension data in the Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range target have null values
in the PM_END_DATE column. All previous versions of dimension data have a system date in
PM_END_DATE to indicate the end of the effective date range for each version.
For example, the following dimensions are current dimension data since their end date columns are null:
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES PM_BEGIN_DATE PM_END_DATE
4325 Sock 13 9/1/98 -
5401 Boot 20 10/1/98 -

When the Integration Service finds updated versions of these dimensions in the source, it inserts them into
the target, using the system date to indicate the beginning of their effective date ranges and leaving the end
dates null.
The Integration Service also updates the existing versions in the target, entering the system date to end the
effective date range:
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES PM_BEGIN_DATE PM_END_DATE
4325 Sock 13 9/1/98 6/1/99
5401 Boot 20 10/1/98 6/1/99
6345 Sock 18 6/1/99 -
6346 Boot 25 6/1/99 -
Handling Keys
When you use the Effective Date Range option, the Integration Service generates a primary key value for
each row written to the target, incrementing key values by one.

The Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping performs the following tasks:

• Creates three data flows: one for new rows, one for changed rows, one for updating existing rows.
• Generates a primary key and beginning of the effective date range for new rows.
• Generates a primary key and beginning of the effective date range for changed rows.
• Updates existing versions of the changed rows in the target, generating the end of the effective date
range to indicate the row is no longer current.
Creating a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range Mapping 235

The following figure shows a mapping that the Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range option in the Slowly
Changing Dimensions Wizard creates:
The Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping uses a Lookup and an Expression transformation to
compare source data against existing target data. When you step through the Slowly Changing Dimensions
Wizard, you enter the lookup conditions (source key columns) and source columns that you want the
Integration Service to compare against the existing target.
The mapping then splits into three data flows.
The Expression transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertNew, uses the system date to indicate the start of
the effective date range. The transformation leaves the end date null, which indicates the new row contains
current dimension data.
rows to the target. The Expression transformation, EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertChanged, uses the system
date to indicate the start of the effective date range. The transformation leaves the end date null, which
indicates the changed row contains current dimension data.
In the third data flow, for each changed row written to the target, the Filter transformation,
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord, passes the primary key of the previous version to the Update Strategy
transformation, UPD_ChangedUpdate. UPD_ChangedUpdate updates rows in the target. The Expression
transformation, EXP_UpdateChanged, updates the end date column with the system date. This changes the
status of the dimension from the current version to a previous version.

The following table describes the function of each transformation in the Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date
Range mapping:

Name Type
Qualifier

Compares key columns in the source against corresponding key
columns in the target. When matching keys exist, LKP_GetData
returns additional column data from the target for comparison.
have matching keys in the target. The expression returns TRUE
if a matching key does not exist in the target, indicating the row
is new: IIF(ISNULL(PM_PRIMARYKEY),TRUE,FALSE)
exists in the target (indicating the row is not new) and if it
Passes all rows to FIL_InsertNewRecord,
FIL_InsertChangedRecord, and FIL_UpdateChangedRecord.

creates a primary key, sets the beginning of the effective date range, and inserts the row into the target:

Name

Name
EXP_KeyProcessing_I Expression Passes generated values to the target to populate the

nsertNew PM_PRIMARYKEY column in the target.
Uses SYSDATE to populate the PM_BEGIN_DATE column
in the target, marking the beginning of the effective date
range.
into the target.

flow creates a new primary key, sets the beginning of the effective date range, and inserts the row into the
target:
Transformation Name Transformation Type Description
from EXP_DetectChanges that are not marked
changed (TRUE): ChangedFlag. Passes changed
rows to UPD_ChangedInserts.
SEQ_GenerateKeys (same Sequence Generator Generates a value for each changed row written to the
Sequence Generator as target, incrementing values by 1.
above) Passes values to
EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertChanged.
EXP_KeyProcessing_Insert Expression Passes generated values to the target to populate the

Changed PM_PRIMARYKEY column in the target.
Uses SYSDATE to populate the PM_BEGIN_DATE
column in the target, marking the beginning of the
effective date range.
T_TargetName2 Target Definition Instance of the target definition allowing changed

rows to be inserted into the target.

flow updates the end date of the corresponding row in the target to indicate the existing row is no longer
current:
Transformation Name Transformation Type Description
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord Filter Uses the following filter condition to filter out any
rows from EXP_DetectChanges that are not marked
changed (TRUE): ChangedFlag.
For each changed row, passes the primary key of the
previous version to UPD_ChangedUpdate.
UPD_ChangedUpdate Update Strategy Uses DD_UPDATE to update existing rows in the

target.
EXP_CalcToDate Expression Uses SYSDATE to update the PM_END_DATE

column in the existing target row, marking the end of
the effective date range.

Steps to Create a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range

Mapping
To create a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping:
click Add.
columns.

Changes list between source rows and the corresponding target rows. If the Integration Service detects
a change, it marks the row changed.
7. Click Next.
8. Select Mark the Dimension Records with their Effective Date Range. Click Finish.
Note: In the Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping, the Designer uses three instances of the
same target definition to enable the three separate data flows to write to the same target table. Generate
only one target table in the target database.
Configuring a Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range Session

The Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping inserts both new and updated rows with a unique
primary key. It also updates existing rows in the target. When you configure a session for the mapping,
complete the following steps:
relational target.
Creating a Type 3 Dimension Mapping

The Type 3 Dimension mapping filters source rows based on user-defined comparisons and inserts only
those found to be new dimensions to the target. Rows containing changes to existing dimensions are
updated in the target. When updating an existing dimension, the Integration Service saves existing data in
different columns of the same row and replaces the existing data with the updates. The Integration Service
optionally enters the system date as a timestamp for each row it inserts or updates. In the Type 3 Dimension
target, each dimension contains current dimension data.
Use the Type 3 Dimension mapping to update a slowly changing dimension table when you want to keep only
current and previous versions of column data in the table. Both versions of the specified column or columns
are saved in the same row.
When you use this option, the Designer creates additional fields in the target:
• PM_PREV_ColumnName. The Designer generates a previous column corresponding to each column for
which you want historical data. The Integration Service keeps the previous version of dimension data in
these columns.
• PM_EFFECT_DATE. An optional field. The Integration Service uses the system date to indicate when it
creates or updates a dimension.
Saving Previous Values

When you step through the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard, you choose the columns in which you want
to detect changes. The Designer creates an additional column for each column you select and names the

additional column after the original, PM_PREV_ColumnName. The Integration Service uses these columns to
store previous dimension values.
When the Integration Service writes a new dimension to the target, the previous columns remain null. Each
time the Integration Service updates a dimension, it writes existing data into the corresponding previous
column, and then writes updates into the original column. As a result, each row in a Type 3 Dimension target
contains current dimension data. Each row also contains the previous versions of dimension data, if the
dimension has changed.
For example, the first time the Integration Service writes the following dimensions to the target, the previous
column, PM_PREV_STYLES remains null:
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES PM_PREV_STYLES
6345 Sock 20 -
6346 Boot 25 -
When the Integration Service updates these rows, it writes the values in the STYLES column (20 and 25) into
PM_PREV_STYLES, and then replaces the style data with new style data (14 and 31):
PM_PRIMARYKEY ITEM STYLES PM_PREV_STYLES
6345 Sock 14 20
6346 Boot 31 25
Handling Keys
In the Type 3 Dimension mapping, the Integration Service generates a primary key value for each new row
written to the target, incrementing key values by one. Updated rows retain their original key values.
Marking the Effective Date

The Type 3 Dimension mapping can optionally note the date on which the Integration Service creates or
updates a dimension. If you choose this option, the Designer creates the PM_EFFECT_DATE column. The
Integration Service enters the system date in this column each time it creates a new row or updates a row.

The Type 3 Dimension mapping performs the following tasks:

• Creates two data flows: one for new rows, one for updating changed rows.
• Generates a primary key and optionally notes the effective date for new rows.
• Writes previous values for each changed row into previous columns and replaces previous values with
updated values.

• Optionally uses the system date to note the effective date for inserted and updated values.
• Updates changed rows in the target.
The following figure shows a mapping that the Type 3 Dimension option in the Slowly Changing Dimensions
Wizard creates:
The Type 3 Dimension mapping uses a Lookup and an Expression transformation to compare source data
against existing target data. When you step through the Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard, you enter the
lookup conditions (source key columns) and source columns that you want the Integration Service to
compare against the existing target. The Designer creates additional columns for the change columns to hold
historic data.
The mapping then splits into two data flows.
The first data flow uses the Filter transformation, FIL_InsertNewRecord, to filter out rows. The Filter
If you select the Effective Date option in the mapping wizard, the Designer creates an Expression
transformation, EXP_EffectiveDate_InsertNew. The Integration Service uses the system date to indicate
when it creates a new row.
In the second data flow, the FIL_UpdateChangedRecord Filter transformation allows only changed rows to
pass to the Update Strategy transformation UPD_ChangedInserts. In addition, the Filter transformation
updates the changed row: it takes the new versions of data from the source qualifier, and uses existing
versions of dimension data (passed from the Lookup transformation) to populate the previous column fields.
UPD_ChangedInserts inserts changed rows to the target. If you select the Effective Date option in the
mapping wizard, the Designer creates an Expression transformation, EXP_EffectiveDate_InsertChanged. The
Integration Service uses the system date to indicate when it updates a row.

The following table describes the function of each transformation in the Type 3 Dimension mapping:

Name Type
Qualifier

LKP_GetData returns additional column data from the target
for comparison.
have matching keys in the target. The expression returns
TRUE if a matching key does not exist in the target, indicating
the row is new:
exists in the target (indicating the row is not new) and if it
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord.

creates a primary key, optionally notes the load date, and inserts the row into the target:

Name
Passes values to EXP_KeyProcessing_InsertNew, if you
selected the Mapping Wizard Effective Date option.
Otherwise, passes values to the target to populate the

Name
EXP_KeyProcessing_I Expression Created only when you select the Effective Date option in
nsertNew the Mapping Wizard.
Passes generated values to the target to populate the
PM_PRIMARYKEY column in the target.
Uses SYSDATE to populate the PM_EFFECT_DATE
column in the target, indicating when the row is created.
into the target.

flow updates the corresponding row in the target, copying existing data into previous columns, updating new
data, and optionally notes the date the row changed:

Type
FIL_UpdateChangedRecord Filter Uses the following filter condition to filter out any
rows from EXP_DetectChanges that are not marked
changed (TRUE): ChangedFlag.
Uses values returned from LKP_GetData to
populate previous columns.
Passes changed rows to UPD_ChangedUpdate.
UPD_ChangedUpdate Update Strategy Uses DD_UPDATE to update existing rows in the

target.
Passes updated rows to
EXP_EffectiveDate_InsertChanged, if you selected
the Mapping Wizard Effective Date option.
Otherwise, passes updated rows to the target.
EXP_EffectiveDate_InsertChanged Expression Created only when you select the Effective Date
option in the Mapping Wizard.
Uses SYSDATE to populate the
PM_EFFECT_DATE column in the target, indicating
when the row is updated.

Steps to Create a Type 3 Dimension Mapping

To create a Type 3 Dimension mapping:

click Add.
columns.
Changes list between source rows and the corresponding target (lookup) rows. If the Integration Service
detects a change, it marks the row changed.
Note: Select the columns for which you want to keep previous values. To keep previous values in the
target, the Designer creates an additional column for each column in this list. It names the columns
PM_PREV_ColumnName.
7. Click Next.
8. If you want the Integration Service to timestamp new and changed rows, select Effective Date.
The wizard displays the columns the Integration Service compares and the name of the column to hold
historic values.
9. Click Finish.
Note: In the Type 3 Dimension mapping, the Designer uses two instances of the same target definition to
enable the two separate data flows to write to the same target table. Generate only one target table in
the target database.
Configuring a Type 3 Dimension Session

The Type 3 Dimension mapping inserts new rows and updates existing rows in the target. When you
configure a session, complete the following steps:
1. Click the General Options settings on the Properties tab. Set Treat Source Rows As to Data Driven.
2. Click the Target Properties settings on the Mappings tab. To verify that the Integration Service loads
rows to the target properly, select Insert and Update as Update for each relational target.

Creating Targets in the Target Database
The mapping wizards create a new target definition based on columns in the source definition and the options
you select. This ensures the resulting target table contains the necessary columns for the mapping. By
default, the resulting target definition has:
• The same database type as the repository.

• The same column names, definitions, descriptions, and key restrictions as the source definition.
• Any additional columns necessary to track or update changes.
After a wizard creates a target definition for the mapping, use the Target Designer to create the target table in
the target database before running the session.
If the repository and target database types differ, be sure to change the database type of the target definition
to match the target database before generating the target.
Scheduling Sessions and Workflows

After you create mappings to load the star schemas, create sessions and workflows to run the mappings. To
verify that the Integration Service loads each table appropriately, configure each session according to the
mapping type you created.
To verify that the fact tables contain the most recent data, refresh all dimension tables before loading the fact
table. You can accomplish this by creating a workflow that executes the dimension sessions before executing
the fact session.
To verify that all dimension sessions successfully complete before the Integration Service runs a fact session,
use the following workflow logic:
1. Place all dimension sessions in the workflow before the fact session.
2. Link all dimension sessions to a Decision task.
3. Define the following decision condition:
$<session_name1>.Status = SUCCEEDED AND $<session_name2>.Status = SUCCEEDED AND ...
$<session_nameN>.Status = SUCCEEDED
4. Place the fact session in the workflow after the Decision task, and link the Decision task to the fact
session.
5. Configure the following link condition from the Decision task to the fact session:
$<Decision_name>.Condition = TRUE
For example, you create three sessions that load data to dimension tables and one session that loads data to
a fact table.

The following figure shows the workflow you can create:
Define the following decision condition for the sess_successful Decision task:
$s_dimension1.Status = SUCCEEDED AND $s_dimension2.Status = SUCCEEDED AND
$s_dimension3.Status = SUCCEEDED
Define the following link condition for the link from the Decision task to the s_fact fact session:
$sess_successful.Condition = TRUE
To improve workflow performance, run the dimension sessions concurrently. Arrange the sessions in the
workflow to start at the same time. If the Integration Service cannot start and run all dimension sessions
concurrently due to the existing session load, you can run the dimension sessions sequentially by arranging
the dimension sessions sequentially in the workflow.
If you have a dimension table that does not need to reload each time you run the workflow, you can disable
that session.
Creating a Mapping from the Informatica Mapping

Templates
Informatica mapping templates are predefined mapping templates that cover common data warehousing
patterns. Slowly Changing Dimensions, Remove Duplicates, and Incremental Load are the data warehousing
patterns for which Informatica provides mapping templates. These templates provide solutions for common
issues in the data warehousing designs. You can use the predefined mapping templates to document
methods to map or process data.
Use the Import Mapping Template Wizard to specify a mapping name, description, and parameter values for
each mapping that you want to create from the Informatica mapping template.
Note: When you reuse a parameter file, verify that the parameter file and the mapping template are of the
same parameter type.
To create a mapping from the mapping template wizards, complete the following tasks:
1. Select the mapping template.

2. Specify the mapping details and the parameter values.
3. Create the mappings and save the parameter values.
4. Import the mappings into the repository.
Step 1. Select the Mapping Template

In the first step of the Mapping Template Wizard, select the mapping template that you want to use.
Creating a Mapping from the Informatica Mapping Templates 247

To start the Mapping Template Wizard:
1. Open the Designer and connect to the repository.

2. Open the folder that contains the source and target objects or a shortcut to the source and target objects
that you want to use in the imported mappings.
3. Select Mapping > Mapping Template Wizards and select the mapping template that you want to use.
The Import Mapping Template Wizard appears.
4. To use an existing mapping template parameter file, click Use Existing. Navigate to the location where
the parameter file is stored, and then select the file.
By default, the parameter files are stored in the following directory:
C:\Documents and Settings\<current user>\Local Settings\Temp
Step 2. Specify Mapping Details and Parameter Values

You can specify the parameter values for each mapping that you want to generate.
To specify the mapping details and the parameter values:
1. In the first page of the Import Mapping Template Wizard, click the Add button.
2. In the MappingName field, enter a mapping name.
3. Optionally, enter a description.
4. Click the Open button in the Parameters/Values field.
5. Enter the following information in the Parameters for Mapping dialog box:
Field Description
Source Table All available source definitions of the current working directory.
Incremental Extract Condition Incremental extract condition. For example, enter UPDATE-
TS>SYSDATE-1 as incremental extract condition.
Create Target Table Creates a target table instead of using an existing target table.
The target database type will be the same as the source database type.
Target Table All available target definitions of the repository folder.
Surrogate Key Primary key of the target table.
Logical Key Fields Columns of the source table that identify a particular entity.
Comparison Key Fields Set of fields that identify a changed row between the source and target
tables.
The Database Types field shows the type of the database that you selected. You cannot modify this
option.
6. If you use an existing target table, set the field association. To set the field association, click Set Fields
Association.
7. In the Field Association dialog box, click the Add button.
8. Select the source field from the Source Fields list.
9. Select the target field from the Target Fields list.

10. In the Field Association dialog box, click OK.
11. In the Parameters for Mapping dialog box, click OK.
12. In the Import Mapping Template Wizard, click Next.
The second page of the Import Mapping Template Wizard displays the list of mappings you configured.
Step 3. Create Mappings and Save Parameter Values

You can select the mappings that you want to generate. To save parameter values for the selected mapping,
reuse the mapping template parameter file and create more mappings. The wizard saves the parameter
values for each mapping that you selected in the mapping template parameter file.
Note: Save the parameter values to a mapping template parameter file. If you save the parameter file for a
mapping and an error occurs while you generate that mapping, you can retrieve the parameter value settings.
To create the mappings and save the parameter values:
1. From the list of mappings that appear, select the mappings that you want to generate.
2. To create one mapping with multiple pipelines, click Create multiple pipelines in a single mapping, and
then enter a name for the mapping.
3. Click Save parameter values for the selected mappings, and then click Browse to navigate to the folder
where you want to save the parameter file.
By default, the Publish Template function creates a mapping template parameter file in the same location
as the mapping template file. You can choose to overwrite the existing file or create a mapping template
parameter file.
4. Click Next.
The wizard prompts you to export table definitions.
5. Click Yes.
The Export Object dialog box appears, and the table definitions are exported to the default location.
6. Click Close in the Export Objects dialog box.
Step 4. Import Mappings into the Repository

You can import mappings into the Repository using these steps.
To import the mappings into the repository:
1. Review the list of mappings to verify that the wizard generated the correct number of mappings.
By default, the option to create workflows and sessions for the mappings is selected.
2. To launch the Workflow Generation Wizard, click Next. For more information about the Workflow
Generation Wizard, see “Using the Workflow Generation Wizard” on page 137.
To disable the option to create workflows and sessions for the mappings, click Finish.
The generated mappings appear in the mappings node of the selected repository folder.
Creating a Mapping from the Informatica Mapping Templates 249

APPENDIX A
Datatype Reference
This appendix includes the following topics:
• Datatype Reference Overview, 250

• Transformation Data Types, 251
• IBM DB2 and Transformation Datatypes, 257
• Informix and Transformation Datatypes, 258
• Microsoft SQL Server and Transformation Datatypes, 259
• Oracle and Transformation Datatypes, 261
• SAP HANA and Transformation Datatypes, 263
• Sybase and Transformation Datatypes, 264
• Teradata and Transformation Datatypes, 266
• ODBC and Transformation Datatypes, 268
• COBOL and Transformation Datatypes, 269
• Flat File and Transformation Datatypes, 269
• XML and Transformation Datatypes, 270
• Converting Data, 270
Datatype Reference Overview

When you create a mapping, you create a set of instructions for the Integration Service to read data from the
source table, transform it, and write it to a target table. The Integration Service transforms data based on
dataflow in the mapping, starting at the first transformation in the mapping, and the datatype assigned to
each port in a mapping.
The Designer displays two types of datatypes:
• Native datatypes. Specific to the source and target databases, flat files, or ERP systems. Native
datatypes appear in the Source Analyzer and Target Designer. They also appear in source and target
definitions in the Mapping Designer and in source definitions in the Mapplet Designer.
• Transformation datatypes. Set of datatypes that appear in the transformations. They are internal
datatypes based on ANSI SQL-92 generic datatypes, which the Integration Service uses to move data
across platforms. Because the transformation datatypes are generic, you can use different source and
target platforms. For example, you can read information from an Oracle source and write it to a Sybase
target. Likewise, you can read information from a flat file and write it to a Microsoft SQL Server database.
The transformation datatypes appear in all transformations in a mapping.
250
When the Integration Service reads source data, it converts the native datatypes to the comparable
transformation datatypes before transforming the data. When the Integration Service writes to a target, it
converts the transformation datatypes to the comparable native datatypes.
When you specify a multibyte character set, the datatypes allocate additional space in the database to store
characters of up to three bytes.
Transformation Data Types

The following table describes the transformation data types:
Data Size in Bytes Description

Type
Bigint 8 bytes -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to

9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Precision of 19, scale of 0
Integer value.
Binary Precision 1 to 104,857,600 bytes

You cannot use binary data for COBOL or flat file
sources.
Date/Time 16 bytes Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 A.D.

(precision to the nanosecond)
Combined date/time value.
Decimal 8 bytes (if high precision is off or Decimal value with declared precision and scale.
precision is greater than 28) Scale must be less than or equal to precision.
16 bytes (if precision <= 18 and high Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28
precision is on)
20 bytes (if precision > 18 and <= 28)
Double 8 bytes Precision of 15 digits

Double-precision floating-point numeric value.
Integer 4 bytes -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

Integer value.
Nstring Unicode mode: (precision + 1) * 2 1 to 104,857,600 characters

ASCII mode: precision + 1 Fixed-length or varying-length string.
Ntext Unicode mode: (precision + 1) * 2 1 to 104,857,600 characters

Real 8 bytes Precision of 7, scale of 0

Double-precision floating-point numeric value.
Transformation Data Types 251

Data Size in Bytes Description
Type
Small Integer 4 bytes -32,768 and 32,767

Integer value.
String Unicode mode: (precision + 1) * 2 1 to 104,857,600 characters

Text Unicode mode: (precision + 1) * 2 1 to 104,857,600 characters

timestampWit 13 bytes Aug. 1, 1947 A.D to Dec. 31, 2040 A.D.

hTZ -12:00 to +14:00
Precision of 36 and scale of 9.
Timestamp with Time Zone data type does not
support the following time zone regions:
- AFRICA_CAIRO
- AFRICA_MONROVIA
- EGYPT
- AMERICA_MONTREAL
Integer Datatypes
You can pass integer data from sources to targets and perform transformations on integer data. The
transformation language supports Bigint, Integer, and Small Integer datatypes.
The transformation integer datatypes represent exact values.
Integer Values in Calculations

When you use integer values in calculations, the PowerCenter Integration Service sometimes converts
integer values to floating-point numbers before it performs the calculation. For example, to evaluate
MOD( 12.00, 5 ), the PowerCenter Integration Service converts the integer value “5” to a floating-point
number before it performs the division operation. The PowerCenter Integration Service converts integer
values to double or decimal values depending on whether you enable high precision.
252 Appendix A: Datatype Reference

The PowerCenter Integration Service converts integer values in the following arithmetic operations:
Arithmetic Operation High Precision Disabled High Precision Enabled
1
Functions and calculations that cannot introduce No conversion Decimal
decimal points.
For example, integer addition, subtraction, and
multiplication, and functions such as CUME,
MOVINGSUM, and SUM.
Non-scientific functions and calculations that can Double Decimal

introduce decimal points.
For example, integer division, and functions such
as AVG, MEDIAN, and PERCENTILE.
All scientific functions and the EXP, LN, LOG, Double Double
POWER, and SQRT functions.
1. If the calculation produces a result that is out of range, the Integration Service writes a row error.
The transformation Double data type supports precision of up to 15 digits, while the Bigint data type supports
precision of up to 19 digits. Therefore, precision loss can occur in calculations that produce Bigint values with
precision of more than 15 digits.
For example, an expression transformation contains the following calculation:

POWER( BIGINTVAL, EXPVAL )
Before it performs the calculation, the PowerCenter Integration Service converts the inputs to the POWER
function to double values. If the BIGINTVAL port contains the Bigint value 9223372036854775807, the
PowerCenter Integration Service converts this value to 9.22337203685478e+18, losing the last 4 digits of
precision. If the EXPVAL port contains the value 1.0 and the result port is a Bigint, this calculation produces a
row error since the result, 9223372036854780000, exceeds the maximum bigint value.
When you use an Integer data type in a calculation that can produce decimal values and you enable high
precision, the PowerCenter Integration Service converts the integer values to decimal values.
For transformations that support the Decimal data type with precision up to 28 digits, precision loss does not
occur in a calculation unless the result produces a value with precision greater than 28 digits in high precision
mode. In this case, the PowerCenter Integration Service stores the result as a double. If the port precision is
less than or equal to 28 digits and the result produces a value greater than 28 digits in high precision mode,
the PowerCenter Integration Service rejects the row.
Integer Constants in Expressions

The Integration Service interprets constants in an expression as floating-point values, even if the calculation
produces an integer result. For example, in the expression INTVALUE + 1000, the Integration Service
converts the integer value “1000” to a double value if high precision is not enabled. It converts the value 1000
to a decimal value if high precision is enabled. To process the value 1000 as an integer value, create a
variable port with an Integer datatype to hold the constant and modify the expression to add the two ports.
NaN Values
NaN (Not a Number) is a value that is usually returned as the result of an operation on invalid input operands,
especially in floating-point calculations. For example, when an operation attempts to divide zero by zero, it
returns a NaN result.

Operating systems and programming languages may represent NaN differently. For example the following list
shows valid string representations of NaN:
nan
NaN
NaN%
NAN
NaNQ
NaNS
qNaN
sNaN
1.#SNAN
1.#QNAN
The Integration Service converts QNAN values to 1.#QNAN on Win64EMT platforms. 1.#QNAN is a valid
representation of NaN.
Convert String Values to Integer Values

When the Integration Service performs implicit conversion of a string value to an integer value, it truncates
the data at the first non-numeric character. For example, you link a string port that contains the value
“9,000,000,000,000,000,000.777” to a Bigint port. The Integration Service converts the string to the bigint
value 9,000,000,000,000,000,000.
Write Integer Values to Flat Files

When writing integer values to a fixed-width flat file, the file writer does not verify that the data is within
range. For example, the file writer writes the result 3,000,000,000 to a target Integer column if the field width
of the target column is at least 13. The file writer does not reject the row because the result is outside the
valid range for Integer values.
Binary Datatype
If a mapping includes binary data, set the precision for the transformation binary datatype so that the
Integration Service can allocate enough memory to move the data from source to target.
You cannot use binary datatypes for COBOL or flat file sources.
Date/Time Datatype
The Date/Time datatype handles years from 1 A.D. to 9999 A.D. in the Gregorian calendar system. Years
beyond 9999 A.D. cause an error.
The Date/Time datatype supports dates with precision to the nanosecond. The datatype has a precision of 29
and a scale of 9. Some native datatypes have a smaller precision. When you import a source that contains
datetime values, the import process imports the correct precision from the source column. For example, the
Microsoft SQL Server Datetime datatype has a precision of 23 and a scale of 3. When you import a Microsoft
SQL Server source that contains Datetime values, the Datetime columns in the mapping source have a
precision of 23 and a scale of 3.
The Integration Service reads datetime values from the source to the precision specified in the mapping
source. When the Integration Service transforms the datetime values, it supports precision up to 29 digits.
For example, if you import a datetime value with precision to the millisecond, you can use the
ADD_TO_DATE function in an Expression transformation to add nanoseconds to the date.
If you write a Date/Time value to a target column that supports a smaller precision, the Integration Service
truncates the value to the precision of the target column. If you write a Date/Time value to a target column
that supports a larger precision, the Integration Service inserts zeroes in the unsupported portion of the
datetime value.

Decimal and Double Data Types
You can pass decimal and double data from sources to targets and perform transformations on decimal and
double data.
The transformation language supports the following data types:
Decimal
Precision 1 to 28 digits, scale 0 to 28 . You cannot use decimal values with scale greater than precision
or a negative precision. Transformations display any range you assign to a Decimal data type, but the
PowerCenter Integration Service supports precision only up to 28 digits.
When you enable high precision and the port precision is greater than 28 digits, the PowerCenter
Integration Service stores the result as a double.
Double
Precision of 15.
Decimal and Double Values in Calculations

Precision loss can occur with Decimal and Double data types in a calculation when the result produces a
value with a precision greater than the maximum.
If you disable high precision, the PowerCenter Integration Service converts decimal values to double.
Precision loss occurs if the decimal value has a precision greater than 15 digits. For example, you have a
mapping with Decimal (20,0) that passes the number 40012030304957666903. If you disable high precision,
the PowerCenter Integration Service converts the decimal value to double and passes 4.00120303049577 x
1019.
For transformations that support Decimal data type of precision up to 28 digits, use the Decimal data type
and enable high precision to ensure precision of up to 28 digits.
Precision loss does not occur in a calculation unless the result produces a value with precision greater than
the maximum allowed digits. In this case, the PowerCenter Integration Service stores the result as a double.
Do not use the Double data type for data that you use in an equality condition, such as a lookup or join
condition.
The following table lists how the PowerCenter Integration Service handles decimal values based on high
precision configuration:
Port Data Type Precision High Precision Off High Precision On
Decimal 0 to 15 Decimal Decimal
Decimal 15 to 28 Double Decimal
Decimal Over 28 Double Double
When you enable high precision, the PowerCenter Integration Service converts numeric constants in any
expression function to Decimal. If you do not enable high precision, the PowerCenter Integration Service
converts numeric constants to Double.
You can ensure the maximum precision for numeric values greater than 28 or 38 digits depending on the
transformation. Before you perform any calculations or transformations with the transformation functions,
truncate or round any large numbers.

Rounding Methods for Double Values
Due to differences in system run-time libraries and the computer system where the database processes
double datatype calculations, the results may not be as expected. The double datatype conforms to the IEEE
794 standard. Changes to database client library, different versions of a database or changes to a system
run-time library affect the binary representation of mathematically equivalent values. Also, many system run-
time libraries implement the round-to-even or the symmetric arithmetic method. The round-to-even method
states that if a number falls midway between the next higher or lower number it round to the nearest value
with an even least significant bit. For example, with the round-to-even method, 0.125 is rounded to 0.12. The
symmetric arithmetic method rounds the number to next higher digit when the last digit is 5 or greater. For
example, with the symmetric arithmetic method 0.125 is rounded to 0.13 and 0.124 is rounded to 0.12.
To provide calculation results that are less susceptible to platform differences, the Integration Service stores
the 15 significant digits of double datatype values. For example, if a calculation on Windows returns the
number 1234567890.1234567890, and the same calculation on UNIX returns 1234567890.1234569999, the
Integration Service converts this number to 1234567890.1234600000.
String Datatypes
The transformation datatypes include the following string datatypes:
• Nstring
• Ntext
• String
• Text
Although the Nstring, Ntext, String, and Text datatypes support the same precision up to 104,857,600
characters, the Integration Service uses String to move string data from source to target and Text to move
text data from source to target. Because some databases store text data differently than string data, the
Integration Service needs to distinguish between the two types of character data. If the source qualifier
displays String, set the target column to String. Likewise, if the source qualifier displays Text, set the target
column to Text, Long, or Long Varchar, depending on the source database.
In general, the smaller string datatypes, such as Char and Varchar, display as String in the Source Qualifier,
Lookup, and Stored Procedure transformations, while the larger text datatypes, such as Text, Long, and Long
Varchar, display as Text in the Source Qualifier.
Use Nstring, Ntext, String, and Text interchangeably within transformations. However, in the Source Qualifier,
Lookup, and Stored Procedure transformations, the target datatypes must match. The database drivers need
to match the string datatypes with the transformation datatypes, so that the data passes accurately. For
example, Nchar in a lookup table must match Nstring in the Lookup transformation.

IBM DB2 and Transformation Datatypes
The following table compares IBM DB2 datatypes and transformation datatypes:
Datatype Range Transformation Range
Bigint -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to Bigint -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to

9,223,372,036,854,775,807 9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Precision 19, scale 0
Blob 1 to 2,147,483,647 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Char(L) 1 to 254 characters String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Char for bit data 1 to 254 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Clob 1 to 2,447,483,647 bytes Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Date 0001 to 9999 A.D. Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,
Precision 19; scale 0 (precision 9999 A.D.
to the day) (precision to the nanosecond)
Dbclob Up to 1 GB Ntext 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Decimal(P,S) Precision 1 to 31, scale 0 to 31 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Float Precision 1 to 15 Double Precision 15
Graphic 1 to 127 bytes Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Integer -2,147,483,648 to Integer -2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647 2,147,483,647
Long Varchar 1 to 32,700 characters String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Long Vargraphic Up to 16,350 bytes Ntext 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Numeric(P,S) Precision 1 to 31, scale 0 to 31 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Smallint -32,768 to 32,767 Small Integer Precision 5, scale 0
Time 24-hour time period Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,
Precision 19, scale 0 9999 A.D.
(precision to the second) (precision to the nanosecond)
Timestamp 26 bytes Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,

Precision 26, scale 6 9999 A.D.
(precision to the microsecond) (precision to the nanosecond)
Varchar Up to 4,000 characters String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
IBM DB2 and Transformation Datatypes 257

Datatype Range Transformation Range
Varchar for bit data Up to 4,000 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Vargraphic Up to 16,336 bytes String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Informix and Transformation Datatypes

The following table compares Informix datatypes to the transformation datatypes that display in the Source
Qualifier, Lookup, and Stored Procedure transformations. You can change the transformation datatype within
the mapping, and the Integration Service converts the data. However, the datatype in the Source Qualifier,
Lookup, and Stored Procedure transformations must match the source datatype. If they do not match, the
mapping is invalid.
Note: Only the Informix Text datatype appears as the transformation Text datatype in Source Qualifier,
Lookup, and Stored Procedure transformations. However, use the transformation datatypes Text and String
interchangeably.
Informix Range Transformation Range
Byte Minimum is 1 byte. No maximum Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes

size.
Char(L) 1 to 32,767 characters String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Date Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,
A.D. 9999 A.D.
Precision 19, scale 0 (precision to the nanosecond)
(precision to the day)
Datetime year to Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,
fraction A.D. 9999 A.D.
Precision 21 to 25, scale 1 to 5 (precision to the nanosecond)
(precision to the millisecond)
Float(P) Precision 1 to 14 Double Precision 15
Int8 -9,223,372,036,854,775,807 to Bigint -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to

9,223,372,036,854,775,807 9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Integer -2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647 Integer -2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647
Money(P,S) Precision 1 to 32, scale is 2 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Nvarchar 1 to 255 characters Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters

Informix Range Transformation Range
Serial(L) -2,147,483,647 to 2,147,483,647 Integer -2,147,483,648 to

2,147,483,647
Smallfloat Precision 1 to 7, scale 0 Real Precision 7, scale 0
Text Maximum length is 2e31 Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Varchar(M,R) 1 to 255 characters String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Datatype Synonyms
The following table compares Informix synonyms to transformation datatypes:
Synonym Transformation
Bigint (Extended Parallel Server) Bigint
Character(L) String
Character Varying(m,r) String
Dec Decimal
Double Precision Double
Int Integer
Numeric Decimal
Real Real
Microsoft SQL Server and Transformation Datatypes

The following table compares Microsoft SQL Server datatypes and transformation datatypes:
Microsoft SQL Range Transformation Range

9,223,372,036,854,775,807 9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Binary(L) 1 to 8,000 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Bit 1 bit String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Microsoft SQL Server and Transformation Datatypes 259

Char(L) 1 to 8,000 characters String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Datetime Jan 1, 1753 A.D. to Dec 31, Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,
9999 A.D. 9999 A.D.
(precision to 3.33 milliseconds)
Datetime2 Jan 1,1 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,
A.D. 9999 A.D.
(precision to 100 nanoseconds)
Float -1.79E+308 to 1.79E+308 Double Precision 15
Image 1 to 2,147,483,647 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Int -2,147,483,648 to Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

2,147,483,647 Precision 10, scale 0
Money -922,337,203,685,477.5807 to Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28

922,337,203,685,477.5807
Nchar 1 to 4,000 characters Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Ntext 1 to 1,073,741,823 characters Ntext 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Numeric(P,S) Precision 1 to 38, scale 0 to 38 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Numeric Identity 1 to 9,999 Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

Nvarchar 1 to 4,000 characters Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Real -3.40E+38 to 3.40E+38 Real Precision 7, scale 0
Smalldatetime Jan 1, 1900, to June 6, 2079 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31,
Precision 19, scale 0 9999 A.D. (precision to the
nanosecond)
(precision to the minute)
Smallmoney -214,748.3648 to 214,748.3647 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Sysname 1 to 128 characters Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Text 1 to 2,147,483,647 characters Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Timestamp 8 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Tinyint 0 to 255 Small Integer Precision 5, scale 0

Varbinary(L) 1 to 8,000 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Varchar(L) 1 to 8,000 characters String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Datatype Synonyms
The following table compares Microsoft SQL Server synonyms to transformation datatypes:
Binary Varying Binary
Character String
Character Varying String
Dec Decimal
Integer Integer
Uniqueidentifier Datatype
PowerCenter imports the Microsoft SQL Server uniqueidentifier datatype as a Microsoft SQL Server Varchar
datatype of 38 characters.
Oracle and Transformation Datatypes

The following table compares Oracle datatypes and transformation datatypes:
Oracle Range Transformation Range
Blob Up to 4 GB Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Char(L) 1 to 2,000 bytes String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Clob Up to 4 GB Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Date Jan. 1, 4712 B.C. to Dec. 31, 4712 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
A.D. A.D.
Oracle and Transformation Datatypes 261

Oracle Range Transformation Range
Long Up to 2 GB Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters

If you include Long data in a
mapping, the Integration Service
converts it to the transformation
String datatype, and truncates it to
104,857,600 characters.
Long Raw Up to 2 GB Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Nchar 1 to 2,000 bytes Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Nclob Up to 4 GB Ntext 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Number Precision of 1 to 38 Double Precision of 15
Number(P,S) Precision of 1 to 38, Decimal Precision of 1 to 28, scale of 0 to

scale of 0 to 38 28
Nvarchar2 1 to 4,000 bytes Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Raw(L) 1 to 2,000 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Timestamp Jan. 1, 4712 B.C. to Dec. 31, 9999 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
A.D. A.D.
Precision 19 to 29, scale 0 to 9 (precision to the nanosecond)
Varchar(L) 1 to 4,000 bytes String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Varchar2(L) 1 to 4,000 bytes String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
XMLType Up to 4 GB Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters

based CLOB
storage
Number(P,S) Datatype
PowerCenter supports Oracle Number(P,S) values with negative scale. However, it does not support
Number(P,S) values with scale greater than precision 28 or a negative precision.
If you import a table with an Oracle Number with a negative scale, the Mapping Designer displays it as a
Decimal datatype, but the Integration Service converts it to a double.
Char, Varchar, Clob Datatypes

When the Integration Service uses the Unicode data movement mode, the Integration Service reads the
precision of Char, Varchar, and Clob columns based on the length semantics you set for columns in the
Oracle database. If you use the byte semantics to determine column length, the Integration Service reads the
precision as the number of bytes. If you use the char semantics, the Integration Service reads the precision
as the number of characters.

SAP HANA and Transformation Datatypes
The following table compares SAP HANA datatypes and transformation datatypes:
SAP HANA Range Transformation Range

Datatype Datatype
Alphanum Precision 1 to 127 Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters

9,223,372,036,854,775,807 9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Binary Used to store bytes of binary data Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Blob Up to 2 GB Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Clob Up to 2 GB Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Date Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
A.D. A.D.
Decimal Precision 1 to 34 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28

(precision,
scale) or Dec
(p, s)
Double Specifies a single-precision 64-bit Double Precision 15

floating-point number
Float Precision 1 to 53 Double Precision 15
Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

NClob Up to 2 GB Ntext 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Nvarchar Precision 1 to 5000 Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Real Specifies a single-precision 32-bit Real Precision 7, scale 0

floating-point number
Seconddate 0001-01-01 00:00:01 to Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
9999-12-31 24:00:00 A.D.
Shorttext Specifies a variable-length Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters

character string, which supports
text search and string search
features
Smalldecimal Precision 1 to 16 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
SAP HANA and Transformation Datatypes 263

SAP HANA Range Transformation Range
Datatype Datatype
Text Specifies a variable-length Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters

character string, which supports
text search features
Time 24-hour time period Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
A.D.
Timestamp 0001-01-01 00:00:00.0000000 to Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
9999-12-31 23:59:59.9999999 A.D.
Varchar Precision 1 to 5000 String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Varbinary 1 to 5000 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Sybase and Transformation Datatypes

The following table compares Sybase ASE and IQ datatypes and transformation datatypes:
Sybase Range Transformation Range

9,223,372,036,854,775,807 9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Binary (n) - Sybase ASE: server logical page Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
size
- Sybase IQ: 1 to 255 bytes
Bit 0 or 1 String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Char (n) ASE server logical page size String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
A.D. A.D.
Datetime Jan 1, 1753 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
A.D. A.D.
(precision to 1/300 second)
Decimal (P,S) Precision 1 to 38, scale 0 to 38 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Float Machine dependent Double Precision 15

Sybase Range Transformation Range
Image 1 to 2,147,483,647 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Int -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

Money -922,337,203,685,477.5808 to Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28

922,337,203,685,477.5807
Nchar (n) ASE server logical page size Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Numeric (P,S) Precision 1 to 38, scale 0 to 38 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Nvarchar (n) ASE server logical page size Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Real Machine dependent Real Precision 7, scale 0
Smalldatetime Jan 1, 1900, to June 6, 2079 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
Precision 19, scale 0 A.D.
(precision to the minute) (precision to the nanosecond)
Smallmoney -214,748.3648 to 214,748.3647 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Text 1 to 2,147,483,647 characters Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Time 12:00:00AM to 11:59:59:999PM Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999
Precision 8; scale 0 A.D.
Timestamp 8 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Timestamp 0001-01-01 Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999

(Sybase IQ) 00:00:00.000000 to 9999-12-31 A.D.
23:59:59.999999 (precision to the nanosecond)
Unichar ASE server logical page size Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Univarchar ASE server logical page size Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Varbinary (n) - Sybase ASE: server logical page Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
size
- Sybase IQ: 1 to 32,767 bytes
Varchar (n) ASE server logical page size String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
The following datatypes are not supported by Sybase IQ:
• Image
• Nchar (n)
Sybase and Transformation Datatypes 265

• Nvarchar (n)
• Text
• Unichar
• Univarchar
Datatype Synonyms
The following table compares Sybase synonyms to Transformation datatypes:
Char Varying String
Character(L) String
Character Varying String
Dec Decimal
Integer Small Integer
National Char Nstring
National Char Varying Nstring
National Character Nstring
National Character Varying Nstring
Nchar Varying Nstring
Binary and Varbinary Datatypes for Sybase IQ

Sybase IQ supports the Binary and Varbinary datatypes when the ASE_Binary_Display database option is
set to OFF in Sybase IQ. By default, the option is ON. For more information, see the Sybase documentation.
Teradata and Transformation Datatypes

The following table compares Teradata datatypes and transformation datatypes:
Teradata Range Transformation Range

9,223,372,036,854,775,807 9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Byte 1 to 64,000 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes

Teradata Range Transformation Range
Byteint -128 to 127 Small Integer Precision 5, scale 0
Char 1 to 64,000 bytes String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
A.D. A.D.
Decimal Precision 1 to 18, scale 0 to 18 Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Float -2.226E+308 to 1.797E+308 Double Precision 15
Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

Smallint -32768 to 32768 Small Integer Precision 5, scale 0
Time 00:00:00.000000 to Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999

23:59:61.999999 A.D.
Timestamp 1 to 19 characters Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999

Precision 19 to 26, scale 0 to 6 A.D.
Varbyte 1 to 64,000 bytes Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Varchar 1 to 64,000 bytes String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Datatype Synonyms
The following table compares Teradata synonyms to transformation datatypes:
Numeric Decimal
Real Double
Teradata and Transformation Datatypes 267

ODBC and Transformation Datatypes
The following table compares ODBC datatypes, such as Microsoft Access or Excel, to transformation
datatypes:
Datatype Transformation Range
Bigint Bigint -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to

9,223,372,036,854,775,807
Binary Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Bit String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Char(L) String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Date Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 A.D.

Decimal(P, S) Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Double Double Precision 15
Float Double Precision 15
Integer Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

Long Varbinary Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Nchar Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Nvarchar Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Ntext Ntext 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Numeric Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
Real Real Precision 7, scale 0
Smallint Smallint Precision 5, scale 0
Text Text 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Time Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 A.D.

Timestamp Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 A.D.

Tinyint Small Integer Precision 5, scale 0

Datatype Transformation Range
Varbinary Binary 1 to 104,857,600 bytes
Varchar(L) String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Note: When the Integration Service runs in Unicode data movement mode, the column precision that you
specify for ODBC datatypes determines the number of characters the Integration Service reads and writes.
COBOL and Transformation Datatypes

The following table compares COBOL datatypes to transformation datatypes:
COBOL Transformation Range
Nstring String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Number Decimal Precision 1 to 28; scale 0 to 28
String String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Flat File and Transformation Datatypes

The following table compares flat file datatypes to transformation datatypes:
Flat File Transformation Range
Bigint Bigint Precision of 19 digits, scale of 0
Datetime Date/Time Jan 1, 0001 A.D. to Dec 31, 9999 A.D. (precision to the
nanosecond)
Double Double Precision of 15 digits
Integer Integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Nstring Nstring 1 to 104,857,600 characters
Number Decimal Precision 1 to 28, scale 0 to 28
String String 1 to 104,857,600 characters
When the Integration Service reads non-numeric data in a numeric column from a flat file, it drops the row
and writes a message in the session log. Also, when the Integration Service reads non-datetime data in a
datetime column from a flat file, it drops the row and writes a message in the session log.
COBOL and Transformation Datatypes 269

Number Datatype
For flat files, the Integration Service reads data with a Number datatype as it appears in the file. If you want
to specify decimal precision and scale, use an Expression transformation to convert number ports to decimal
ports. Also enable high precision in the session.
For example, if the flat file contains a 5-digit numeric field called Price, and you want to output the Price as a
number with two decimal places, you would set up the following expression:
PRICE / 100
This expression moves the decimal place two digits to the left as shown in the following example:
Number Return Value

34500 345.00
12340 123.40
23450 234.50
XML and Transformation Datatypes

PowerCenter supports all XML datatypes specified in the W3C May 2, 2001 Recommendation. For more
information about XML datatypes, see the W3C specifications for XML datatypes at
http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2.
When you pass data to the target, make sure that it is in the correct format so that the Integration Service
writes the data correctly in the target XML file.
You can change XML datatypes in the source and target definitions. You can change midstream XML
datatypes in the Transformation Developer. You cannot change XML datatypes when you import them from
an XML schema, and you cannot change the transformation datatypes for XML sources within a mapping.
Converting Data
You can convert data from one datatype to another by using the following methods:
• Passing data between ports with different datatypes (port-to-port conversion).

• Using transformation functions to convert data.
• Using transformation arithmetic operators to convert data.
Port-to-Port Data Conversion

The Integration Service converts data based on the datatype of the port. Each time data passes through a
port, the Integration Service looks at the datatype assigned to the port and converts the data if necessary.
When you pass data between ports of the same numeric datatype and the data is transferred between
transformations, the Integration Service does not convert the data to the scale and precision of the port that
the data is passed to. For example, you transfer data between two transformations in a mapping. If you pass
data from a decimal port with a precision of 5 to a decimal port with a precision of 4, the Integration Service
stores the value internally and does not truncate the data.

You can convert data by passing data between ports with different datatypes. For example, you can convert a
string to a number by passing it to an Integer port.
The Integration Service performs port-to-port conversions between transformations and between the last
transformation in a dataflow and a target.
The following table describes the port-to-port conversions the Integration Service performs:
Datatype Bigint Integer, Decimal Double, String, Nstring, Date/ Binary

Small Real Text Ntext Time
Integer
Bigint No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
Integer, Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Small
Integer
Decimal Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No
Double, Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No

Real
String, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Text
Nstring, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Ntext
Date/Time No No No No Yes Yes Yes No
Binary No No No No No No No Yes
Converting Strings to Dates

You can convert strings to datetime values by passing the strings to a Date/Time port. However, the strings
must be stored in the date format defined by the DateTime Format String session property.
Converting Strings to Numbers

The Integration Service converts strings to numbers based on the ASCII numeric format.
The following table provides examples of how the Integration Service converts strings to numbers when you
pass strings from a string port to a numeric port:
String Converts to Decimal Double, Real Bigint, Integer, Small Integer
‘18e-3’ 18 0.018 18
‘18-e-3abc’ 18 0.018 18
‘123abc’ 123 123 123
Converting Data 271

String Converts to Decimal Double, Real Bigint, Integer, Small Integer
‘A123cb’ 0 0 0
‘abc’ 0 0 0

APPENDIX B
Configure the Web Browser

This appendix includes the following topic:
• Configure the Web Browser, 273
Configure the Web Browser

Some PowerCenter Client browser functions require you to configure the following options in Internet
Explorer:
Adobe Flash Player Plug-In

Metadata Manager requires the Adobe Flash Player plug-in version 9 or later to upload PowerCenter
parameter files and to display data lineage. To upload PowerCenter parameter files or to run data
lineage analysis in Metadata Manager or from the Designer, download and install the Flash Player plug-
in on the web browser. Get the Flash Player plug-in from the following web site:
www.adobe.com/products/flashplayer
Scripting and ActiveX
Enable the following controls on Microsoft Internet Explorer:
• Active scripting
• Allow programmatic clipboard access
• Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins
• Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting
To configure the controls, click Tools > Internet options > Security > Custom level.
Note: Configure the scripting and ActiveX controls to display the Start Page for the PowerCenter Client.
273
Index
A business components (continued)

local vs. global shortcuts 201
active transformations locking 200
connecting 116 moving 200
mapplets 143 overview 199
adding business components directory
repositories 34 copying 202
sources to mappings 124 creating 201
target update statements 132 deleting 201
aggregate editing 200
definition (metadata) 204 business documentation
Application Source Qualifier transformation adding links to mappings 54, 112
description 124 creating links 46
arguments for expressions 45
for user-defined functions 164 for repository objects 45
attributes root 45
propagated 121 viewing 46
autolink business names
by name 117 adding to sources 44
by position 117 adding to target definitions 73, 102
adding to targets 44
as source column names 45
B as target column names 45

display sources 20
bigint display targets 20
constants in expressions 253 displaying in Navigator 44
high precision handling 252 in Source Qualifier 45
using in calculations 252 renaming imported sources 51
writing to flat files 254 using 44
binary datatypes
overview 254
blocking transformations
data flow validation 135
C
breakpoints character loss
.dcf files 191 code pages 88
copying 191 flat files 88
creating 169, 171 character sets
data conditions 173, 174 Flat File Wizard 67
Debugger 169 checking in
error conditions 173 versioned objects 36
global 172 checking out
global data conditions 176 versioned objects 36
instance name 172 COBOL
ISDEFAULT 176 comparing to transformation datatypes 269
ISNULL 176 copybook 57
steps to enter 176 creating normalized targets 95
transformation 172 tab handling 57
transformation data conditions 175 COBOL file properties
business components configuring Advanced properties 60
adding shortcuts 201 configuring Columns tab 60
copying 202 configuring Table tab 60
creating 201 COBOL source definitions
definition 199 code pages 56
deleting 201 components 58
directories 199 configuring properties 59
linking to documentation 200 copybooks 57
274
COBOL source definitions (continued) connections
FD section 58, 61 validating 116, 134
field attributes 61 Constraint Based Load Ordering
fields 58 debug session parameter 179
importing 57 constraints
OCCURS statement 59, 60 adding to target definitions 102
PICTURE clauses 61 converting
REDEFINES statement 59 datatypes 269
table options 60 strings to dates 271
word storage 60 strings to numbers 269, 271
COBOL sources copy as
tab handling 57 mappings 111
code pages copying
character loss 88 business components 202
COBOL sources 56 business components directory 202
delimited source 77 mappings 111
fixed-width source 74 mapplets 144
flat files 88 user-defined functions 168
mapping parameters 153 creating
mapping variables 153 breakpoints 171
relational targets 90 business components 201
color themes cubes 206
applying 24 dimensions 205
colors directory for business components 201
configuring 23 flat file source definitions 74
format options 23 flat file target definitions 74
column description keys for targets 102
retaining when re-importing a source 55 mappings 110
columns mapplet ports 146
adding to dimensions 205 mapplets 143
adding to targets 74 target definitions 89, 100
delimited file settings 70 target tables 246
relational targets 103 Type 1 Dimension mapping 218, 221
comments Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping 234, 239
adding to mappings 112 Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping 228, 233
adding to source definitions 54 Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping 222, 226
COMP columns Type 3 Dimension mapping 240, 244
COBOL word storage 60 user-defined functions 166
comparing Cube Wizard
mapping and mapplet dependencies 197 overview 206
mapping and mapplet links 197 cubes
mapping parameters and variables 197 adding fact tables 206
mappings and mapplets 197 creating 206
mapplet instances 197 database type 206
metadata extensions 197 definition (metadata) 204
reusable transformations 196 deleting 207
source instances 197 editing 207
sources 196 opening and closing 208
target instances 197 overview 203
target load orders 197 tips 208
targets 196 viewing metadata 208
transformation instances 197 wizard for creating 206
configuring current value
breakpoints 171 mapping variables 157
custom tools 29 CurrentlyProcessedFileName port
data lineage 193 adding to file sources 86
Debugger 177 custom tools
mapplet ports 146 configuring 29
connecting
mapplet output groups 146
mapplets to mappings 146
mapplets with SQL override 146 D
multiple transformations 115 data
objects in mappings 115 converting port-to-port 269
ports 116 converting strings to numbers 269
rules for connecting objects 116 converting types of 269
sources to targets, overview 115 handling truncated and overflow 131
transformations 116 previewing 40
Index 275
data breakpoint conditions Debugger (continued)
global 176 creating debug session 178
overview 174 data breakpoints 173
transformations 175 data conditions 174
data breakpoints debug indicators 183
global options 174 Debugger Wizard 177
transformation options 174 Designer behavior 182
data flow validation error breakpoints 173
overview 135 evaluating expressions 189
data lineage initializing state 180
configuring 193 Instance Data window 19
description 193 Instance window 183
displaying 194 modifying data 189
data movement mode monitoring target data 185
datatypes 250 next instance 185
data preview options 25
relational targets 40 overview 169
data types paused state 180
decimal 255 persisted values 182
double 255 restrictions for modifying data 189
transformation 251 ROW-ID 174
database type ROW-TYPE 174
for cubes 206 running 180
for dimensions 205 running in debug mode 178
DataDirect ODBC drivers running state 180
platform-specific drivers required 52, 92 session type 178
datatypes states 180
Bigint 252 Target Data window 19
binary 254 target options 179
COBOL 269 Target window 183
conversion 269 tasks 180
Date/Time 254 toolbar 27
flat file 269 Debugger tab
for user-defined function arguments 164 monitoring debug log 186
IBM DB2 257 Output window 183
Informix 258 Debugger Wizard
Integer 252 configuring 177
mapping variables 157 debugging
Microsoft SQL Server 259 mappings 113, 169
native datatypes 250 mapplets 179
ODBC 268 decimal
Oracle 261 high precision handling 252, 255
overview 250 decimal data types
reading flat file sources 269 overview 255
Small Integer 252 default options
string 256 Designer, customizing 20
Sybase ASE 264 default values
Teradata 266 mapping parameters 152
transformation 250 mapping variables 152
transformation datatypes in targets 98 defining
XML 270 mapping parameters 156
Date/Time datatypes deleting
overview 254 business components 201
dates business components directory 201
display format 35 cubes 207
debug indicators dimensions 207
monitoring 183 mappings 113
debug log mapplets 144
monitoring 186 user-defined functions 167
sample 186 delimited flat files
debug session advanced settings 77
session parameters 178 column settings 70
Debugger importing source definitions 77
ANY-PORT 174 row settings 77
configuring 177 rules 79
continuing 185 dependencies
copying configuration 191 implicit 119, 120
creating breakpoints 169, 171 link path 119
276 Index
dependencies (continued) displaying
propagated 121 data lineage 194
viewing 114 date 35
deployment groups icons 32
user-defined functions, adding 168 time 35
description fields toolbars 28
maximum precision 73, 102 zooming 33
Designer documentation
adding mappings 110 path 45
behavior during Debugger sessions 182 domains
business documentation 45 metadata extensions 42
checking out and in versioned objects 36 double
configuring data lineage 193 high precision handling 255
copying objects 37 double data types
creating links to business documentation 46 overview 255
creating shortcuts 35 drilling
creating toolbars 29 definition (metadata) 204
customizing options 20 DTM Buffer Size
customizing toolbars 29 debug session parameter 179
date display format 35
displaying data lineage 194
exporting objects 38
importing objects 38 E
Instance Data window 19 editing
Mapping Designer 18 business components directory 200
Mapplet Designer 18 cubes 207
Navigator 19 dimensions 207
opening and closing a folder 35 mappings 112
output window 19 mapplets 144
overview 18 relational source definitions 54
port validation 116 user-defined functions 167
printing mappings 35 Enable High Precision
searching 30 debug session parameter 179
searching for versioned objects 36 entering
shortcut keys 39 repository object descriptions 36
Source Analyzer 18 error handling
SQL DDL commands 105 misalignment, flat file 68
status bar 19 errors
Target Data window 19 port 116
Target Designer 18 validated during mappings 134
tasks 34 Excel
time display format 35 datatypes 268
toolbars 27 exporting
tools 18 mappings 112
viewing reports 47 mapplets 144
windows 19 objects 38
working with business components 199 user-defined functions 167
workspace window 19 Expression Editor
zooming 33 mapping parameters 155
dimension tables mapping variables 161
levels 205 public and private functions 165
metadata 203 using with user-defined functions 168
non-normalized models 203 expression strings
reasons for 210 defining in parameter files 162
sources 205 Expression transformation
dimensions example with Transaction Control transformation 129
creating 205 expression variables
database type for 205 mapping parameters and variables 162
definition (metadata) 204 expressions
deleting 207 creating with user-defined functions 165, 168
editing 207 validating 135
overview 203
slowly changing 210
slowly growing 210
tips 208 F
viewing metadata 208 fact tables
directories adding to cubes 206
grouping business components 199 definition 210
Index 277
fact tables (continued) full screen
definition (metadata) 204 view 34
with metadata 203 function type
FD Section description 165
COBOL source definitions 58 functions
field attributes in mapping variables 159
COBOL source definitions 61 user-defined functions 164
field width
description 80
fields
COBOL source definitions 58 G
deleting 38 general options
moving 38 Designer, configuring 20
file list Getting Started Wizard
CurrentlyProcessedFileName port 86 creating targets 246
returning source file names with data rows 86 description 212
FileName column pass-through mapping 212, 214
flat file example 129 scheduling sessions 246
flat file targets 74 slowly growing target mapping 212, 216
generating flat file targets 128 sources 213
running a session with flat file targets 129 global repositories
Find in Workspace tool business components 201
overview 31 globalization
Find Next tool sources 48
overview 30
fixed-width files
advanced settings 74
importing sources 74 H
flat file definitions hierarchies
generating flat files by transaction 128 adding to dimensions 206
Flat File Wizard definition (metadata) 204
delimited file column settings 70 schema example 203
delimited file options 70 high precision
flat file column settings 68 Bigint data type 252
flat file options 68 Decimal data type 252
importing source definitions 66 historical data
flat files differentiating from current 210
code page 67 maintaining 210
code pages 88
column settings 68
comparing to transformation datatypes 269
consecutive shift characters 87 I
creating by transaction 128 IBM DB2
datatypes, reading 269 comparing to transformation datatypes 258
delimited 79 icons
editing source definition properties 72 displaying 32
editing target definition properties 72 implicit dependencies
formatting columns 80 propagating 119, 120
importing delimited 77 importing
importing fixed-width 74 COBOL sources 57
importing, overview 66 delimited flat file source definitions 77
multibyte data 88 fixed-width flat file source definitions 74
precision, targets 88 flat files 66
rules for delimited 79 mappings 112
shift-sensitive 86 mapplets 144
shift-sensitive flat file requirements 87 Microsoft Excel source definitions 63
special character handling 67 objects 38
supported character sets 67 relational source definitions 51
troubleshooting 88 relational target definitions 92
updating ASCII source definitions 72 user-defined functions 167
wizard for importing 66 indexes
folders creating for target tables 104
copy as 111 defining on target 104
opening and closing 35 dropping for target tables 106
fonts importing for target definitions 92
configuring 23 re-creating for target tables 106
format options Informix
configuring in the Designer 23 comparing to transformation datatypes 258
278 Index
initial values
datetime format 154, 159 M
mapping parameters 152 maintaining
mapping variables 152 historical data 210
input ports star schemas 210
connecting mapplet 146 Mapping Architect for Visio
defining in mapplets 141 mapping templates 109
overview 115 Mapping Composite Report
Input transformation viewing 47
configuring 146 Mapping Designer
in mapplets 141, 146 creating mappings 110
ports 146 usage for 18
input/output ports mapping parameters
overview 115 code pages 153
Instance Data comparing 197
window 19 creating 154
Instance window datetime format 154
Debugger 183 default values 152
monitoring data 184 defining 156
integers definition 154
constants in expressions 253 expanding in expressions 162
converting from strings 254 initial values 152
using in calculations 252 IsExprVar property 154, 162
writing to flat files 254 naming convention 154
Integration Service overview 151
datatype usage 250 tips for using 162
invalidating using in expressions 155
sessions 113 mapping variables
ISDEFAULT aggregation type 157
breakpoint conditions 176 clearing values 161
IsExprVar property code pages 153
mapping parameters 154, 162 comparing 197
mapping variables 159, 162 creating 159
ISNULL function current value 157
breakpoint conditions 176 datatype 157
datetime format 159
Debugger 182, 189
K default values 152
definition 156
keys expanding in expressions 162
creating for targets 102 functions 159
key relationships and re-importing source 55 initial values 152
keywords IsExprVar property 159, 162
setting for relational targets 102 mapplets 159
naming convention 159
overriding values 161
L overview 151
start value 157
Layout toolbar tips for using 162
overview 27 using in expressions 161
levels values 156
adding to dimensions 205 mapping wizards
adding to hierarchy 206 creating targets 246
definition (metadata) 204 Getting Started 212
dimension tables 205 overview 212
link paths scheduling sessions for 246
propagating dependencies 119 Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard 212
viewing 113 sources 213
linking mappings
autolinking by name 117 adding comments 112
autolinking by position 117 adding mapplets 145
business component documentation 200 adding sources 124
locking adding targets 89
business components 200 comparing 197
comparing dependencies 197
comparing links 197
connecting flat file FileName port 129
connecting objects 115
Index 279
mappings (continued) mapplets (continued)
copy as 111 in mappings 126
copying 111 input ports 141
creating 110 input source data 141
debugging 113 mapping variables 159
debugging overview 169 metadata extensions in 42
deleting 113 monitoring data 184
editing 112 output groups 141, 146
editing for relational database changes 50, 53 output overview 141
exporting 112 output ports 141
importing 112 overview 140
invalidation causes 50 pipeline partitioning 147
metadata extensions in 42 port attributes 146
opening 110 ports 146
overriding source table name 125 printing differences between 197
overriding target table name 134 repository objects supported 141
pass-through mapping 212, 214 rules for validation 144
printing 35 selecting to debug 179
printing differences between 197 session behavior 140
process 109 set tracing level 144
renaming 112 sources within mapplet 141
reverting to previous versions 112 target data 141
slowly growing target 212 tips for creating 148
slowly growing target mapping 216 toolbar 27
star schemas 210 unsupported objects 147
tasks 110 using in mappings 145
toolbar 27 validating 143
Type 1 Dimension mapping 218 viewing reports 47
Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping 212, 234 measure
Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping 212, 228 definition (metadata) 204
Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping 212, 222 metadata
Type 3 Dimension mapping 212, 240 aggregate 204
updating targets 100 cubes 204
validating 134 dimension 204
validating multiple 136 drilling 204
viewing reports 47 fact table 204
working with mapplets 126 hierarchies 204
working with targets 126 levels 204
working with transformations 126 measure 204
Mapplet Composite Report multi-dimensional 203
viewing 47 normalization 204
Mapplet Designer redundancy 204
usage for 18, 140 snowflake schema 204
mapplet ports star schema 204
adding to Input/Output transformations 146 viewing cubes and dimensions 208
configuring 146 metadata extensions
creating 146 comparing across mappings 197
mapplets creating 42
active and passive 143 deleting 44
adding a description 144 domains 42
comparing 197 editing 43
comparing dependencies 197 overview 42
comparing instances 197 Metadata Manager
comparing links 197 configuring data lineage 193
components 141 displaying data lineage 193
configuring 143 Microsoft Access
connecting input ports 146 datatypes 268
connecting with SQL override 146 Microsoft Excel
copying 144 datatypes 268
creating 143 formatting numeric data 63
creating targets from 98 importing source definitions 64
creating transformation logic 143 Microsoft SQL Server
definition 140 comparing to transformation datatypes 259
deleting 144 datatypes 259
editing 144 misalignment
exporting 144 flat file 68
illustration of 141 modifying data
importing 144 Debugger 189
280 Index
monitoring older versions of objects
debug indicators 183 viewing 36
debug log 186 opening
Debugger 183, 188 mappings 110
target data 185 options
multi-dimensional metadata color themes, selecting 24
overview 203 debug 25
MX (Metadata Exchange) web services 25
saving data 20 options (Designer)
MX views format 23
performance 20 general 20
tables 22
Oracle
N comparing to transformation datatypes 261

Number(P,S) values 262
naming conventions output groups
for mappings 110 connecting to output ports in mapplets 146
NaN definition 141
described 253 ports 146
native datatypes output ports
overview 250 mapplets 141
Navigator overview 115
deleting mappings from 113 Output transformation
usage for 19 configuring 146
Next Instance in mapplets 141, 146
Debugger 185 ports 146
non-normalized Output window
cube attribute 206 Debugger tab 183
dimension tables 203 example of mapping validation 136
normalization Session Log tab 183
definition (metadata) 204 overflow data
normalized handling 131
cube attribute 206 overriding
multi-dimensional schema 203 mapping variable values 161
Normalizer transformation
creating a target from 96
debugging 189
description 124 P
null characters parameter files
fixed-width source 74 expression strings, defining 162
flat file 76 specifying location for debug session 179
Number(P,S) values parameters
Oracle 262 mappings 151
numeric operations pass-through mapping
converting strings to dates 271 creating 214
converting strings to numbers 271 customizing 215
description 212
overview 214
O repository objects created 214

session options 215
object validation passive transformations
overview 135 connecting 116
objects mapplets 143
comparing 36 persisted values
connecting in mappings 115 Debugger 182
copying 37 pipeline partitioning
displaying data lineage 194 mapplets 147
viewing older versions 36 port description
OCCURS statement retaining when re-importing a source 55
COBOL source definitions 59 port-to-port data conversion
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) overview 270
comparing datatypes to transformation 268 ports
DataDirect driver issues 52, 92 adding to Input/Output transformations 146
importing source definitions 52 connecting 116
importing target definitions 92 connecting to mapplet input 146
precision in unicode mode 268 connecting to multiple transformations 115
OLAP applications creating in mapplets 146
metadata 203 deleting 38
Index 281
ports (continued) reusable transformations
errors 116 in mapplets 141
linking 116 root variable
linking by name 117 overview 46
linking by position 117 Row type
propagating attributes 119 debug session parameter 179
renaming 39 rules
source dependencies 114 delimited flat files 79
PowerCenter repository for target updating 132
viewing data lineage analysis 193
PowerCenter Repository Reports
viewing in Designer 47
powrmart.ini S
configure for third-party drivers 52, 93 saving
default tab size 57 historical data 210
importing target indexes 92 scale
pre- and post-session SQL description 74, 80
target instances 133 relational sources 54
precision relational targets 103
description 74, 80 scheduling
flat files 88 sessions for mapping wizards 246
relational sources 54 searching
relational targets 103 Designer 30
previewing data versioned objects in the Designer 36
target 40 Sequence Generator transformation
XML data 40 debugging 189
printing Session Log tab
mappings 35 Output window 183
private session reject file
configuring for user-defined functions 165 using for overflow data 131
propagate using for truncated data 131
port attributes 119 sessions
public configuring Type 1 Dimension 222
configuring for user-defined functions 165 configuring Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range 240
configuring Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current 234
configuring Type 2 Dimension/Version 227
Q configuring Type 3 Dimension 245

invalidating 113
QNAN pass through, configuring 215
converting to 1.#QNAN 253 running in debug mode 178
scheduling for star schemas 246
slowly growing target, configuring 218
R updates from source definitions 53

shift-sensitive
Rank transformation consecutive shift characters 87
debugging 189 flat files 86
record sets requirements 87
COBOL source definitions 59 shortcut keys
records keyboard 39
updating to include non-key columns 131 shortcuts
REDEFINES statement as business components 201
COBOL source definitions 59 creating 35
redundancy in mapplets 141
definition (metadata) 204 Simple Pass Through mapping
Reject Truncated/Overflow Rows option description 212
using 131 Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard
renaming creating targets for 246
source definitions 54 description 212
repositories scheduling sessions 246
adding 34 sources 213
Repository Manager Type 1 Dimension mapping 218
viewing metadata in 208 Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping 212, 234
repository objects Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping 212, 228
description 36 Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping 212, 222
editing 39 Type 3 Dimension mapping 212, 240
supported in mapplets 141 slowly growing target mapping
Repository toolbar creating 216
overview 27 description 212
282 Index
slowly growing target mapping (continued) special character handling (continued)
keys, handling 216 target table and field names 90
overview 216 SQL
repository objects created 216 generating and executing to create targets 105
session options 218 SQL Editor
small integers using to modify UPDATE statement 131
constants in expressions 253 Standard toolbar
using in calculations 252 overview 27
writing to flat files 254 star schema
snowflake schema definition 203
definition 203 maintaining 210
Source Analyzer start value
editing source definitions 53, 54 mapping variables 157
importing relational source definitions 53 status bar
usage for 18 definition 19
source column dependencies Step to Instance
viewing 114 Debugger 185
$Source connection value string datatypes
debug session parameter 179 overview 256
source definitions strings
adding to mappings 124 converting to dates 271
changing database type 54 converting to numbers 254, 271
COBOL 59 Sybase ASE
connecting ports 115 comparing to transformation datatypes 264
editing COBOL 59 Sybase IQ
editing fixed-width 72 comparing to transformation datatypes 264
editing relational 54 synonym datatypes
for mapping wizards 213 comparisons 261
importing delimited flat file 77 Teradata 267
importing Microsoft Excel 63 syntax
importing relational 51 configuring for user-defined functions 164
in mapplets 141
overview 48, 66
re-importing 55
renaming 54 T
special character handling 49 table name prefix
updating 53 target owner 133
updating ASCII 72 table names
updating relational 53 overriding source table name 125
using as base for target definitions 94 overriding target table name 134
source description table owner name
retaining when re-importing a source 55 targets 133
Source Qualifier transformation tables
business names 45 Designer options, configuring 22
description 124 $Target connection value
option to create automatically 22 debug session parameter 179
option to create manually 22 Target Data window
using string parameters 153 description 19
using variables 153 target definitions
source tables adding columns 74, 103
overriding table name 125 adding to mappings 124
sources comparing datatypes with transformations 98
adding to dimensions 205 connecting ports 115
adding to mappings 124 creating from a mapplet 98
comparing 196 creating from a Normalizer transformation 96
connecting targets 115 creating from a transformation with multiple groups 96
flat file code page 74, 77 creating from source definitions 94
for mapping wizards 213 creating from transformations 96, 99, 100
globalization features 48 creating indexes 104
metadata extensions in 42 creating keys 102
null character 76 creating, overview 89
overriding source table name 125 editing relational definitions 100
targets connected 114 generating target tables from 105
troubleshooting 65 importing indexes 92
within mapplets 141 importing relational targets 92
special character handling overview, relational 89
flat file definitions 67 previewing data 40
source table and field names 49 renaming 102
Index 283
target definitions (continued) tools
setting options 100 configuring custom 29
special character handling 90 debug options 25
steps to create from transformations 99 toolbar 27
troubleshooting 106 web service options 25
updating, relational 102 tracing levels
Target Designer in mapplets 144
creating cubes and dimensions in 203 Transaction Control transformation
usage for 18 example with an Expression transformation 129
using 89 transformation data
target instance monitoring 184
pre- and post-session SQL 133 transformation data types
target load order list of 251
comparing across mappings 197 transformation datatypes
setting 127 comparing to COBOL 269
target load order groups comparing to flat file 269
description 127 comparing to IBM DB2 258
target owner comparing to Informix 258
table name prefix 133 comparing to ODBC 268
target SQL override comparing to Oracle 261
overview 131 comparing to Sybase ASE 264
target tables comparing to Sybase IQ 264
creating 105 comparing to Teradata 266
overriding table name 134 Microsoft SQL Server 259
previewing data 40 overview 250
re-creating 106 transformations
target update comparing 196
adding statement 132 connecting 116
overview 131 creating 116
Target window creating targets from 96
Debugger 183 in mappings 126
monitoring 185 in mapplets 141
targets Input transformation 146
adding to mappings 89 metadata extensions in 42
code pages 90 Output transformation 146
comparing 196 pass-through mapping 215
connecting multiple transformations to 115 reusing in mapplets 140
database types 89 slowly growing target mapping 217
editing cubes 207 toolbar 27
editing dimensions 207 Type 1 Dimension mapping 220
generating flat files by transaction 128 Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping 237
in mappings 126 Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping 231
mapping wizards 246 Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping 225
mapplet data 141 Type 3 Dimension mapping 243
metadata extensions in 42 troubleshooting
overriding target table name 134 flat files 88
overriding update to include non-key columns 131 sources 65
overview, relational 89 target definitions 106
previewing data 40 truncated data
rules for updating 132 handling 131
table name prefix, owner name 133 Type 1 Dimension mapping
target SQL override 131 creating 218, 221
target update override 131 description 212
viewing source dependencies 114 handling keys 218
Teradata overview 218
comparing datatypes to transformation 266 repository objects created 218
datatypes 266 session options 222
time transformations 220
display format 35 Type 2 Dimension/Effective Date Range mapping
tips creating 234, 239
creating mapplets 148 description 212
cubes and dimensions 208 handling keys 235
toolbars overview 234
creating 29 repository objects created 235
customizing 29 session options 240
description 27 transformations 237
Designer 27 Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping
displaying 28 creating 228, 233
284 Index
Type 2 Dimension/Flag Current mapping (continued) versioned objects (continued)
description 212 searching for in the Designer 36
handling keys 228 viewing in workspace 36
overview 228 viewing multiple versions 36
repository objects created 229 versioning
session options 234 toolbar 27
transformations 231 versions
Type 2 Dimension/Version Data mapping reverting to previous mappings 112
creating 222, 226 View toolbar
customizing 227 overview 27
description 212 viewing
handling keys 223 business documentation 46
numbering versions 223 full screen 34
repository objects created 224 link paths 113
session options 227 metadata for cubes and dimensions 208
transformations 225 older versions of objects 36
Type 3 Dimension mapping source column dependencies 114
creating 240, 244
description 212
handling keys 241
overview 240 W
repository objects created 241 web services
session options 245 backward compatibility 25
transformations 243 options 25
wizards
Cube Wizard 206
U Flat File Wizard 66

Getting Started Wizard 212
Unicode mode overview of mapping types 212
ODBC precision 268 Slowly Changing Dimensions Wizard 212
updating word storage
flat file source definitions 72 COBOL 60
modifying SQL statement 131 Workflow Generation Wizard
relational source definitions 53 overview 137
relational targets 102 rules and guidelines 137
rules for target updates 132 Workflow Manager
user-defined functions adding repositories 34
configuring arguments 164 Workflow Monitor
configuring function syntax 164 monitoring Debugger 188
copying 168 workspace
creating 166 full screen view 34
deleting 167 iconizing 32
editing 167 navigating 30
exporting 167 printing 35
importing 167 restoring 32
in the Expression Editor 168 usage for 19
nesting 165 zooming 33
overview 164 workspace objects
validating 168 iconizing 32
restoring 32
WSDL
V creating for generated mappings 25
validating
mappings 134
mapplets 143 X
multiple mappings 136 XML
user-defined functions 168 datatypes 270
values previewing data 40
mapping variables 156 XML Editor
variables previewing data 40
expanding in expressions 162 XML Source Qualifier transformation
mappings 151 description 124
versioned objects
Allow Delete without Checkout option 26
checking in 36
checking out 36
comparing older versions 36
Index 285
Z
zoom
display format 33
286 Index

PC 100 DesignerGuide en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC 100 DesignerGuide en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC 100 DesignerGuide en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Informatica PowerCenter (Version 10.

Copyright (c) 1993-2015 Informatica LLC. All rights reserved.

See patents at https://www.informatica.com/legal/patents.html.

Part Number: PC-DEG-10000-0001

Chapter 1: Using the Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Chapter 2: Working with Sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Chapter 3: Working with Flat Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Chapter 4: Working with Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Chapter 6: Mapplets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Chapter 7: Mapping Parameters and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Chapter 8: Working with User-Defined Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 9: Using the Debugger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Chapter 10: Viewing Data Lineage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Chapter 11: Comparing Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Chapter 13: Creating Cubes and Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Chapter 14: Using the Mapping Wizards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Appendix A: Datatype Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Appendix B: Configure the Web Browser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Informatica My Support Portal

As a member, you can:

• Access all of your Informatica resources in one place.

Informatica Product Availability Matrixes

Informatica How-To Library

Informatica Knowledge Base

Informatica Support YouTube Channel

Informatica Global Customer Support

Using the Designer

• Using the Designer Overview, 18

Using the Designer Overview

The following figure shows the Designer windows:

The following figure shows the Overview window:

Using the Designer Overview 19

Configuring Designer Options

You can configure the following options in the Designer:

Configuring General Options

To configure general options:

1. Click Tools > Options.

20 Chapter 1: Using the Designer

General Option Description

Configuring Designer Options 21

HTML Documentation HTML or URL path to enter links to business documentation.

Configuring Tables Options

To configure table definition options:

1. Click Tools > Options.

Tables Option Tool Availability Description

Columns Default All tools Default width of table columns in bytes.

22 Chapter 1: Using the Designer

Create Source Mapping Designer, Designer creates a Source Qualifier or a Normalizer

General Default All tools Default width of all repository objects.

General Default All tools Default height of all repository objects.

Configuring Format Options

To configure format options:

1. Click Tools > Options.

Element Tool Availability Description

Background All tools Background of the workspace area.

Configuring Designer Options 23

Relationship Link Source Analyzer, Link showing primary-key/foreign-key relationship

Propagate Link Mapplet Designer, Link affected by port attribute propagation.

Foreground Color of the table caption text.